Home

Paint Shop Pro 8 User Guide

1. Paint Shop Pro User Guide Copyright Information Copyright 2003 by Jasc Software Inc All rights reserved No portion of the contents of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written permission of Jasc Software Inc Trademark Information Animation Shop ImageCommander Media Center Plus Paint Shop and the Jasc orbit logo are trademarks of Jasc Software Inc Jasc Paint Shop Pro and The Power to Create are registered trademarks of Jasc Software Inc Acrobat PostScript Photoshop Photoshop Elements are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated The Postscript language is copyrighted by Adobe Systems Incorporated Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Autodesk is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc MacPaint is a product and trademark of Claris Corporation GIF is a service mark property and Graphic Interchange Format is copyright property of CompuServe Inc CorelDRAW Ventura Publisher WordPerfect are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Corel Corporation GEM GEM Paint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Digital Research Inc Digimarc is a registered trademark of Digimarc Corporation Deluxe Paint is a registered trademark of Electronic Arts Kodak Photo CD is registered trademark of Eastman Kodak Company OS 2 Lotus 1 2 3 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corpora
2. 3 Click Yes The Print Layout window will display a new layout that contains all the images that were in the template Printing Images from the Browser Use the Paint Shop Pro Browser to print all images within a folder or only selected images Print the images as thumbnails or print them any size using a template When you print from the Browser Paint Shop Pro automatically includes the file name under each image as well as the folder name at the top of the page and a page number at the bottom To print images from the Browser 1 Choose File gt Browse or press Ctrl B The Browse window opens and the main menu updates with Browse commands 2 Navigate to the folder that contains the files you want to print 3 Select files using one of these methods m Click the file s thumbnail To select more than one file press Ctrl and click each file To select sequential files click the first file then press Shift and click the last file Note To deselect a file press Ctrl and click its thumbnail 4 Choose File gt Print to open the Browser Print dialog 370 Chapter 16 Printing Images 5 Choose options from the Printer and Copies group boxes For more information see Printing Multiple Images on a Page on page 360 Choose a thumbnail option Use Thumbnails Mark the check box to use thumbnail images which print faster but are lower resolution and fuzzy Clear the check box to print the images at
3. For raster images click the color box to select from the Material dialog for 16 million color images or the image palette for images of all other color depths To choose a transparent background for greyscale or 16 million color images only mark the Transparent check box For more information on choosing colors or materials see Using the Materials Palette on page 82 For vector images you only need to choose the color depth Vector images start with a transparent vector layer Note The Memory Required field displays the amount of memory required for the image Your computer should have at least two to three times this amount of RAM To reduce the memory requirement reduce the resolution or the dimensions of the image 4 Click OK The new image opens in the work space Creating New Images from Existing Images You can use a copy of an existing image or a layer to create a new image You can also create an image from any graphic data copied to the Windows clipboard from Paint Shop Pro To duplicate an entire image 1 Open the image you want to duplicate 2 Choose Window gt Duplicate or press Shift D A new window containing the image opens in the work space To create a new image from a layer of another image 1 On the Layer palette click the layer you want to copy 2 Choose Edit gt Copy To 1 2 To Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 37 Note If you use the Cut or Copy commands
4. 165 Adjusting Selection Borders 1 ce es 166 Modifying SCICCUONS 6 x at 5 hccwcare odiana ia arate eee aca hee ae 167 Moving Selections within an Image aaa 174 Converting a Selection into a Layer cc eee 175 Creating Custom Patterns from Selections onanan aaa 175 Saving and Loading Selections oana aaa 176 154 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images Using the Selection Tools Transforming a selection Here are a few of the ways you can edit selections m Cut copy or paste selections m Crop to a selection m Move selections within the image m Flip mirror or rotate selections m Correct colors within selections m Apply effects to selections m Paint or draw in selections Use multiple selections tools You can make an initial selection with one selection tool and then Switch to another selection tool to add to or subtract from the selection For more information see Modifying Selections on page 167 or Subtracting from a Selection on page 169 The way in which you select part of the image depends upon the type of layer raster or vector For more information on data types see About Raster and Vector Graphics on page 32 Paint Shop Pro contains selection tools that create raster or pixel selections as well as vector selection tools that select vector objects Raster Selection Tools Selection tool Makes a selection of a specific shape such as a rectangle c
5. 6 Click OK Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 61 Improving Saturation After you have corrected the color balance and contrast of your image adjust the saturation Saturation is the vividness of colors that results from the amount of grey in each color Saturated colors such as fire engine red appear bright and brilliant Desaturated colors such as pastels appear subdued or washed out Automatically Enhancing Saturation To adjust the overall color saturation of your image automatically use the Automatic Saturation Enhancement command You can apply the command to a selection or an entire layer Note This command works on 16 million color and greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 If you apply this command to a selection rather than the entire image the saturation adjustment may not be as effective because all image information is not available This command has no effect on greyscale images because they have no color it can be used on sepia or duotone images To automatically enhance saturation 1 Choose Adjust gt Hue and Saturation gt Automatic Saturation Enhancement 2 In the preview window center an important part of the image such as a face Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary 3 Adjust the Bias the vividness of the corrected colors Less colorful Nor
6. To modify the image pixels directly choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Color Balance To create an adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Color Balance For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 To reset the settings in the Presets drop down list select Default In the Tone balance group box select which lightness level tonal range of colors to adjust Shadows dark colors Midtones colors in the middle range and Highlights bright colors Adjust each one individually To have the corrected image match the lightness of the original image mark the Preserve luminosity check box In the Color balance group box drag a slider toward a color to increase that color in the image or drag a slider away from a color to decrease the color Increasing the proportion of one color decreases the proportion of its opposite on the color wheel The values in the Color levels edit boxes show the color changes for the red green and blue channels Values range from 100 to 100 Zero indicates the original color balance Click OK Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit color images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Creating a duotone Yo
7. CMYK Profile Default Ed Black Generation Transfer and Components Ink Calibration gococseescossceseoescsocoeoocsessosesesessoscosososessososeseg C GCR grey component replacement m Parameters Total coverage limit 300 4 Black ink limit 100 Black starts at fi 0 GGA black gamma 3 Default Cancel Help 2 In the Method group box choose from the following options UCR Undercolor Removal Replaces some of the cyan magenta and yellow components of neutral grey and shadow areas with black This helps compensate for some of the trapping problems that occur in multi color printing GCR Grey Component Replacement Replaces grey components in colored areas with black The least prominent color is reduced or removed completely along with proportional amounts of the other two colors to define a grey component which is then replaced with black ink 3 In the Parameters group box configure the following settings 374 Chapter 16 Printing Images Total coverage limit This can range from 200 to 400 Blank ink coverage limit This can range from 0 to 200 Black starts at This can range from 0 to 100 GCR Black Gamma This can range from 1 to 4 This option is inactive unless the GCR option is selected Note The black line in the graph represents the black value and updates as you change the settings To configure the Transfer and Components tab 1 Inthe CMYK Profile dialog click
8. Chapter 1 Getting Started 9 Accessing Free Technical Support When you buy Paint Shop Pro you have free access to Jasc s staff of technical support personnel Contact us to get assistance in any of the following ways US Canada Contact Method Call Technical Support Technical Support on the Web Fax Technical Support 800 622 2793 Call Customer Service 8am 5pm CST Monday Friday International Contact Address or Number Method Find your local country www jasc com world contact details on the Web International e mail intl jasc com Call International Customer 1 952 930 9800 Service 8am 5pm GMT 6 00 Monday Frid English Only ee epee ence Fax International Customer 1 952 930 9172 Service 10 Chapter 1 Getting Started Using Web Based Resources On the Help menu of Paint Shop Pro you can access a number of Website pages dedicated to support issues Choose Help gt Jasc Software Online and select one of the following Website links Jasc Software Website Visit www jasc com to preview or buy the latest Jasc products access the Learning Center or the Support Center and find answers to your questions Support Center Access the Jasc Customer Care Center to search for answers in our Knowledge Base submit questions to Technical Support or give us feedback Register Product Online Register your copy of Paint Shop Pro online Check for Updates Check the Jasc com Website for updates
9. Mark Boost selected colors to give selected colors more weight by a factor of the value you enter Use this if you have made a selection in the image and you want its colors stand out from the rest of the image After marking the check box and set the value to determine the amount of color boosting Mark the Include Windows colors check box to include the 16 standard Windows colors in the palette If the image will be used on the Web mark this check box GIF Optimizer Format Tab 1 Choose a type of file to determine how the image is displayed as it downloads Non interlaced The image downloads one line at a time starting from the top m Interlaced The image is displayed incrementally in several passes and detail is added each time Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download 346 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools Don t lose more data Each time you open and save a JPEG image data Is discarded It is a good idea to keep a copy of the original image 2 Choose a version for the file Choose Version 89a to save transparency information It is selected automatically if the image contains transparent pixels Version 87a is available only if the image does not contain a transparency GIF Optimizer Download Times Tab This tab displays the size of the compressed file and an estimate of the download time at four Internet speeds If the f
10. Note After you create a selection you cannot change the Selection Type or the Anti alias setting Changing these options applies to the next selection you make You can change the feathering see Changing the Feathering of a Selection on page 169 3 To make the selection do one of the following Click and drag in the image As you drag a border indicates the selection When you release the mouse the selection border becomes a marquee If you select a Feather value that portion of the selection is added to the marquee 156 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images Align that selection You can use grids and guides in the image window to help you align your selections For more information see Using Rulers Grids and Guides on page 129 To make a selection of a specific size on the Tool Options palette click Custom Selection J and then enter the selection position in pixels for the left top right and bottom positions The positions are measured from the top left corner m On the Tool Options palette choose Layer opaque ij to select Opaque areas the non transparent area that has data of the current layer Choose Merged opaque to select the opaque area of all layers within the image This option is unavailable if the image has only one layer 4 To create a rectangular selection from an odd shaped selection In the Create selection from area of Tool Options choose Current selection
11. 287 eead lig ja s Ta gt a CHAPTER RE Working with Masks A mask is a greyscale image that is applied to a layer Use mask layers hide and show parts of a layer fade between layers and create other special effects A mask can be created from a selection from an alpha channel or an existing image Masks can completely cover a layer or cover a layer with varying levels of opacity Contents A L Soc nvaebantuss mise See aadeken seme pees 288 Creating MASKS i544 eawheddedada es ove eh eee Ee 289 EOE MASKS 6 ideo A eo oo SE ee Ee a a Be 294 Savna WOKS o 4 pada he ee er 297 Loading MASKS caus eee ORG DSHS ES PROD PROCES eH ae ERS 298 Deleting GSKS oi a avd new sesh bute Wane ae eee ok ea eae 301 288 Chapter 12 Working with Masks About Masks Original and masked images Color depth Masks work with greyscale with transparency and 16 million color images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 A mask layer covers parts of another layer completely or with varying levels of opacity Use masks to fade between layers or to create special effects with precision For example mask all details around the main subject in a photograph or use a mask to create a Web page navigation bar that fades away You can create a new mask layer that you can paint on which hides or shows underlying layers You can also create a mask layer from an image a selection or the luminance of an image
12. 90 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials When should choose a color from the desktop You can choose a foreground or background color from the desktop when you particularly like an icon color or when you want to match the Windows desktop colors Material and Color boxes on the Materials palette left and a Color box on a Paint Shop Pro dialog right Choosing Colors from an Image or the Desktop Use the Dropper tool to choose a foreground or background color from any open image Or use a special feature of Color and Material boxes to select from any color within Paint Shop Pro such as a color on a toolbar If you have Windows 2000 or later you can choose a color from other applications such as a color displayed in a word processor Note You can also use the Jasc Color Picker to choose a color from any open image See To choose a color from the active image on page 88 To use the Dropper tool to choose a color 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Dropper tool A The tool may be hidden under the Color Replacer tool 2 Position the cursor over the color in the image 3 Left click to make the color the foreground color or right click to make it the background color To choose a color from the active image 1 Position the cursor over the active image Note This applies to the Brush Eraser and Picture Tube tools 2 Hold down the Ctrl key and left click to choose the color as the foreground
13. Customizing menu and toolbar appearance 417 Paint Shop Pro 393 toolbars 412 customizing context menus 415 the workspace 413 Cut command 124 D dash segment style 236 defects removing noise in images 65 68 removing source 62 64 Deform tool 141 143 145 options 144 deformation maps 148 deinterlace command 62 deleting a selection 163 brush tips 210 images 127 masks 301 nodes 256 vector objects 237 Despeckle command 65 dialogs about 25 color box 27 editing values 27 presets 27 preview windows 26 proofing 26 Digimarc registering 353 digital camera importing images 38 digital watermark using 351 distort 243 Distortion effects 319 distortions correcting in photographs 69 71 overview of correction options 69 Dodge brush 220 downloading images mounted drive 39 Windows XP 39 drawing curved and straight lines 233 custom line styles 235 custom shapes 232 free form lines 234 lines 232 preset shapes 231 segment types 233 straight lines 233 drawing mode 232 duotone images 197 Dynamic adjustment method 194 E Edge Preserving Smooth command 66 Edge Seeker 157 Edit menu Command History 128 Copy 36 124 Copy Merged 37 124 Empty Clipboard 126 Paste Index 425 As New Image 37 As New Selection 165 Paste As New Image 124 Paste As New Layer 124 Paste As New Selection 125 Paste As Transparent Selection 125 P
14. Emptying the Clipboard Placing large amounts of data in the clipboard can slow your computer s performance Emptying the clipboard erases the clipboard data Note This command cannot be undone To empty the clipboard Choose Edit gt Empty Clipboard Deleting Images Chapter 6 Editing Images 127 In Paint Shop Pro you can delete image files from the main workspace or using the Browser To delete the current image in the workspace Choose File gt Delete or press Ctrl Delete To delete an image using the Browser 1 Display the Browser choose File gt Browse or press Ctrl B 2 Navigate to the folder containing the file you want to delete 3 Select the image to be deleted 4 Choose File gt Delete or press Ctrl Delete Using Undo Redo What you can t undo In Paint Shop Pro you can undo most actions with these exceptions m Renaming files m Saving files m Opening and closing files m Changes that are program wide and not specific to the current image such as changes to color settings and preferences m Actions that do not change image pixels such as zooming and scrolling You can undo most actions as you edit an image Use the Undo command to remove brush strokes color adjustments effects etc Use the Redo command to reapply a command that you have undone Use the Command History dialog to view which actions you have performed and to revert to a previous state of the image You can also
15. For each color or for all colors if they are linked drag the slider until the inner rectangle seems to blend into the outer rectangle Note If you have difficulty getting the inner rectangle to blend into the outer rectangle your monitor may be too old and faded Click OK Note Click Reset to return no gamma adjustment 1 00 420 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro When to use Color Management You need to use Color Management if any of the following are true m Your pre press provider requires Specific color values for a known set of printing conditions m You are using the same color graphics for printing on a printer and displaying on a monitor m You plan to use international and domestic printing presses Using Windows Color Management Color Management is a feature in Windows 98 or later that improves color consistency and accuracy between images displayed on monitors and printed on paper Color Management also allows you to preview how images will look when printed on a specific color printer Color Management is generally not used for Web images because most Web browsers don t use Color Management In order for Windows Color Management to work effectively you must have proper color profiles for all the devices you are using To create proper monitor and printer profiles you must use third party color profiling tools that include software or hardware for determining how your monitor and printer pro
16. Pixel Resize Duplicates or removes pixels as necessary to achieve the selected width and height of the image Use this type with hard edged images and simple graphics To constrain the new image dimensions to the image s current proportions mark the Lock Aspect Ratio check box The aspect width to height ratio defaults to the ratio of the active image Changing the aspect ratio distorts the image by stretching or contracting it in one dimension more than the other To keep the image s current print size mark the Maintain original print size check box The image resolution will change keeping the print size constant For information on selecting image resolution see About Image Size Resolution and Color Depth on page 33 In the Pixel Dimensions group box enter the new Width and Height values From the drop down list choose whether to enter values in pixels or as a percent of the original size Click OK change the resolution print size of an image Choose Image gt Resize Shift S to open the Resize dialog Clear the Resample using check box In the Print Size group box enter the new Width and Height values or the new Resolution value Choose measurement systems from the drop down lists For information on selecting image resolution see About Image Size Resolution and Color Depth on page 33 Click OK Chapter 6 Editing Images 139 Changing Canvas Size Original image and canvas added at
17. Softening the Image The three Softness commands are Soft Focus Soften Soften More Soften applies a uniform blur to your image Soften More applies the Soften command with more intensity The Soft Focus command makes the image look as though it was taken with a camera using a soft focus filter To use the Soften and Soften More commands choose Adjust gt Softness and either the Soften or Soften More command To use the Soft Focus command 1 Choose Adjust gt Softness gt Soft Focus to open the dialog 2 In the preview window center the important part of the image Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 69 3 For Softness set a percentage value to choose the strength of the correction At lower values the image is softened only a small amount At higher values the image appears to have a blurred effect 4 For Edge importance set a percentage value to choose the strength of the correction At lower values the edges of the image are softened At higher values the detail of the edges are retained 5 Mark the Include scattered light check box if you want bright areas in the background of the image to be softened 6 For Amount set a percentage value to choose the strength of the halo effect At lower values the halo is added to only very bright areas in the image At higher values a halo effect is created around bright areas 7 Fo
18. marquee applying effects to 164 definition of 153 hiding 166 moving 166 masks about 288 as greyscale layers 289 changing overlay color 295 creating from channels 293 creating from images 291 creating from selections 292 creating new 290 deleting 301 deleting from alpha channels 301 displaying overlay 294 430 Index editing 294 gradient 296 inverting 295 layers 288 loading from alpha channels 300 loading from disk 298 pattern 296 saving to alpha channel 297 saving to disk 297 see contents 289 texture 296 Match mode 159 Materials palette 82 choosing colors 84 choosing texture 84 using 84 Median Filter command 67 Menu bars displaying 413 resetting 413 merging images 151 merging nodes 256 Mesh Warp tool 147 Mirror command 151 miter limit 230 moir patterns removing 64 monitor interaction with Windows Color Management 419 Monitor adjustments 418 Monitor Gamma command 419 Motion blur 78 Mounted Drive 38 moving commands 413 multiple image printing see print layout N Negative Image command 200 negative creating positive image from 200 new features 2 new image 35 36 characteristics 35 dimensions 35 duplicating existing image 36 from clipboard 37 from layer 36 37 node on node indicator 249 nodes adding 254 adding with knife mode 255 adjusting control arms 253 anatomy of 251 changing types 253 defin
19. painting brush options 211 with brushes 208 with Picture Tubes 224 palette docking 17 hiding and displaying 17 Materials 82 options 116 resizing 17 roll up 17 using 16 weighted 111 paper quality and printing 356 Paste command 124 paths definition of 229 editing 245 reversing 248 patterns choosing 93 creating new 94 making from selections 175 undesirable in images 64 PCD file format preferences 410 Pen tool contiguous 232 create as vector 232 curve tracking 230 drawing mode 232 edit mode 245 freehand 234 knife mode 250 255 line segments 233 point to point 233 segment types 233 simple mode 232 Perspective Correction tool 146 Photo Sharing command 399 432 Index photo sharing service uploading images 328 photographs basic steps in improving 52 correcting distortions 69 71 correcting faded 59 improving 51 improving colors 54 59 60 61 retouching 72 picking colors 27 picture frames 322 Picture Tubes 224 creating 225 downloading more 226 Plug ins about 406 adding 406 in File Locations 406 PNG files exporting 348 number of colors 349 PNG optimizer settings 348 Point to Point selection tool 157 position on canvas 242 Posterize command reducing lightness levels 199 PostScript file format preferences 410 Preferences Autosave Settings 409 CMYK conversion 372 File Format preferences 410 File Locations 404 reset
20. A raster selection can be either standard non floating or floating A standard selection is part of a layer or image When you edit a standard selection you modify the image itself Standard selections are what you create when you use the Selection Freehand and Magic Wand tools A floating selection temporarily rests above the image or layer The Layer palette displays a Floating Selection icon J to indicate that the layer contains a floating selection Floating applies to raster selections only Selections are automatically floated when you do one of the following Move a selection with one of the selection tools Selection Freehand or Magic Wand tool m Paste a selection by choosing Edit gt Paste gt As New Selection Select the Floating option when creating text Floating selections are automatically defloated to the nearest raster layer or promoted to a raster layer when you deselect the selection create a new Selection or add to or subtract from the selection As a result much of the time you do not have to be aware of whether a selection is floating or standard Paint Shop Pro takes care of it for you However you can also float a selection using the Float command which creates a copy of the selection that you can move or modify without changing the original image When you finish editing the floating selection use the Defloat command to defloat it 166 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images To floa
21. Additive colors Subtractive colors Computer monitor colors and printed colors may often be quite different which is a challenge when you are trying to match a certain color Colors can also appear different from monitor to monitor Image colors on a monitor are influenced by a variety of factors the color range called the color gamut of the input device such as the scanner or camera the manufacturer and age of the monitor and the monitor s brightness and contrast settings When you print an image you introduce other factors that influence color the quality and absorption properties of the paper the color gamut of the printer and the conversion of RGB values from the monitor to the CMYK values of the printer s ink This conversion is a challenge because of the different approaches to color between monitors and printers Because monitors use light to display color they use additive colors when you add them together they produce white Conversely when you remove all monitor colors you produce black Because printers use ink to display color they use subtractive colors when you remove colors you produce white and when you add all printer colors you produce black As a result monitors and printers have different color gamuts Although they share many of the same colors there are some colors a monitor can display that a printer can t print and some colors a printer can print that a monitor can t display
22. Creating and Editing Cells In the Image Slicer dialog use the tools in the Tools group box to divide the image into cells and to edit the cell boundaries The Grid tool creates a grid of evenly spaced cells either over the entire image or within another cell The Line tool creates a horizontal or vertical line To create the cells 1 Choose File gt Export gt Image Slicer to open the Image Slicer dialog 2 Do either of the following To create evenly spaced and sized cells click the Grid tool l Click in the image The Grid Size dialog opens Set the number of Rows and Columns 338 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools To isolate a specific area such as a logo click the Slice tool Tips Val Click and drag in the image where you want a line to m Use the Pan tool drag the image appear To create a vertical line click and drag vertically to in the preview to view hidden create a horizontal line click and drag horizontally areas of the image m Increase the size of the dialog to view more of the image in the To move a line or grid border preview area 1 Choose either the Pan tool or Slice tool Z m Use the Zoom buttons to l magnify a specific area of the 2 Move the cursor over a line mage 3 When the cursor changes to the double sided arrow t click and drag the line to a new position To move only the segment within the current cell press the Shift key before clicking the line Note You can move lines up b
23. Displaying the Layer palette Display or hide the Layer palette or move it anywhere on the screen For information on moving docking and undocking the Layer palette see Using Palettes on page 16 To display or hide the Layer palette Choose View gt Layer palette or press F8 Viewing the Contents of Layers The image window shows all visible layers in the image To view a thumbnail of a layer s contents use the Layer palette To turn off or on the visibility of layers in the image window see Showing and Hiding Layers Groups and Vector Objects on page 270 To view the contents of one layer On the Layer palette move the cursor over a layer name to display a thumbnail of the layer contents Selecting Layers When an image has more than one layer you must select the layer you want to work on Changes to the image affect only the selected layer also called the active layer You can select only one layer at a time To select a layer On the Layer palette click the name of the layer to highlight the selected layer Expanding and Contracting Layers and Layer Groups The Layer palette displays its components like the tree of folders and directories in Windows Explorer Items that have sub components have a minus sign in front of them when expanded or a plus sign when contracted Chapter 11 Working with Layers 267 Expand a vector layer or layer group to see the names of its sub component
24. Text filled with a pattern AS O Effect How to do it bX ee Fill text with a Open the image you want to use to fill the text click i fi S e repeated image the Background Material box on the Materials palette click the Pattern tab and select the image from the drop down list Use this background material to create new vector or raster text or to edit existing vector text For existing raster text paint or fill the text with the background material Fill text with one Open a copy of the image Create new text as a image selection on the image on the Text tool s Tool Options palette in the Create As drop down list choose Selection Then copy the selection to a new image Creating Text on Object Paths Create text that fits any vector object line or shape Every vector object in Paint Shop Pro has a path or outline that defines its shape Use this object path to create text with interesting variations Note You cannot create deformed text on a path Paint Shop Pro will remove the deformation when placing the text on the path There are two ways to create text on a path Create the path a line or shape then create new text on the path Create the path and the text as separate objects then fit the text to the path Put some distance between text and path To change the distance between the text and the object path change the text leading see Formatting Text on page 306 Make the object
25. To arrange multiple windows Do either of the following Choose Window gt Cascade to display windows stacked and cascading from the upper left to the lower right of the workspace Choose Window gt Tile Vertically or Window gt Tile Horizontally to display windows side by side vertically or horizontally Windows are resized to fit within the workspace Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 21 To close an image window Do either of the following Toclose an active window choose File gt Close or click the Close button Xx on the title bar of the image To close all windows choose Window gt Close All If there are any unsaved changes in the images you will be prompted to save the files To see a list of all open windows Choose Window All open windows display at the bottom of the Window menu in the order they were last viewed Navigating the View Area When an image is too large to fit within its window scroll bars appear on the bottom and right sides of the image To view another area of the image Do one of the following On the Tools toolbar choose the Pan tool Rl and then click and drag in the image m Click and drag the horizontal or vertical scroll bar m Press the arrow keys to move the image by small increments m Display the Overview palette choose View gt Palettes gt Overview and then drag the preview rectangle to a new position To fit the window to the image Choose Wi
26. Categories Commands Hc Run Bounds criptt Tools Run Bounds cripte U dC d x E TEE Run Bound cripta Node Edit Contest Menu i Vector Selection Contest M iuri oumae enal Layer Contest Menu Run BourndScriptS Layer Yector Context Men l All Commands Run Bounds cripte F About Protected Script Mode The scripts in Paint Shop Pro 8 are created in the Python programming language which can unfortunately be used to create and execute malicious scripts Because of this potential danger Paint Shop Pro includes two explicit directory sets Scripts Restricted Scripts residing here are restricted see Restriction information below Scripts Trusted Script residing here are trusted What is Restricted Some general notes about Restricted scripts Ifa Restricted script calls a Trusted script the Trusted script runs as Restricted If a Trusted script calls a Restricted script the Restricted script remains Restricted Following the return of the Restricted script the Trusted script is trusted again When the application searches for scripts Restricted scripts are searched before Trusted scripts In the Script toolbar s Select Script drop down list the two sets of scripts are intermingled and listed alphabetically When saving a script the path defaults to the Restricted directory for the first time this is done with the application After that it defaults to the most recently used director
27. Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 195 Adjusting the Lightness Levels Use the Levels command to make adjustments to the brightness contrast and gamma in the image Adjusting the gamma changes the brightness values of middle grey tones To use the Levels command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 Do one of the following To modify the image pixels directly choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Levels m To create a Levels adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Levels For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 In the Channel drop down list select a color channel to edit Choose RGB to edit the red green and blue channels together Choose Red Green or Blue to edit the individual color channels To increase the contrast of the image drag the Input levels sliders which show the image s brightness values To darken the darkest values drag the black diamond to the right all values below this value become zero black To lighten the lightest values drag the clear diamond to the left all values above this value become 255 white To change the value of medium grey drag the grey Gamma diamond left or right the range for of the gamma value is 0 to 7 99 with 1 being in the middle To decrease the contrast drag the Output levels sliders
28. D 44 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro To select files by file characteristics 1 On the Browser menu choose File gt Select In the Select dialog you can select files that have specific file or image attributes such as name file extension size width bits per pixel and date 2 Select the file and image attributes then click OK To change the order of thumbnails Click the file s thumbnail and drag it to a new position within the same folder To sort thumbnails by file characteristics 1 Choose File gt Sort to open the Thumbnail Sort dialog 2 On the Primary Sort tab select the primary sort criteria for thumbnails 3 To add additional sort criteria click the Secondary Sort tab and select additional criteria 4 Click OK Note Sorting thumbnails is a one time operation The thumbnails will not remain sorted if you add new images or change the properties of the existing files New images are always added to the end of the list To invert which files are selected Choose Edit gt Invert Selection All selected thumbnails are deselected and all unselected thumbnails are selected To rename files 1 Press Ctrl R or right click the thumbnail and select Rename from the context menu 2 Type the new filename The Browser does not automatically add an extension 3 Click OK Copying one image into another image You can copy the layers of one image into another image See Cuttin
29. Organize the Layer palette Set layer properties such as opacity and blend mode for the whole group Limit the effect of adjustment layers to layers below them in a group rather than in the entire image Move all grouped layers in the stacking order by clicking and dragging the layer group name Move layers together on the image canvas if the group is linked Otherwise grouped layers move independently For more information see Linking Layers and Layer Groups on page 272 Layer groups can contain raster vector mask and adjustment layers and must contain at least one layer Layer groups can also contain other layer groups called nested groups If you move all of the layers out of a layer group Paint Shop Pro deletes the layer group Note Adjustment and mask layers cannot be the bottom layer Vector objects cannot be moved from their layer group 272 Chapter 11 Working with Layers How to add a layer to the bottom of a layer group Drag the layer to the second to bottom position Then drag the bottom layer up To create a layer group 1 On the Layer palette click the first layer to be in the layer group 2 Do one of the following m On the Layer palette click the Layer Group button EI m Choose Layers gt New Layer Group The Layer Properties dialog opens Make changes as necessary and click OK m Choose Layers gt Arrange gt Move Into Group The layer group is created and the s
30. Patterns You can also click the More Options button P choose View and then choose the swatch type to display To change how swatches are sorted click the More Options button L choose Sort and then choose By Style or By Name By default the swatches are sorted by style To change between small and large thumbnails of the swatches click the More Options button J and choose Small Thumbnails or Large Thumbnails By default small thumbnails are displayed Editing Gradients You can change the colors transition points and transparency of gradients in the Gradient Editor dialog You can edit Paint Shop Pro s default gradients or create your own gradients You can also rename delete import and export gradients The Gradient Editor dialog is shown below Types Blue metallic Blue neon Chrome reflect Duotone bright green Duotone dark blue Duotone green Duotone ivory ee ee eee PT New Copy Rename Delete l Import Export m Gradient Result T i Cancel Help Fore y Location a m E Gradient bar E i Custom m Ez A a m Transparency Opacity Location a iol f A Transparency bar Result shows gradient settings plus transparency settings To specify the colors and transition points of the gradient use settings in the Gradient group box To change the transition points edit the location of markers and midpo
31. Save Preset button and type the Same preset name When you are prompted to replace the current Preset choose Yes Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 387 m Default These are the default program settings for this dialog or tool The default settings can provide a good starting point for your work To choose a preset In the Presets drop down list select the desired Preset from the list To reset values to default settings In the Presets drop down list choose Default or click the Reset button e To reset the dialog to the settings that displayed when you opened the dialog hold down Shift and then click the Reset button To save settings as a preset 1 Modify the dialog or tool settings 2 Click the Save preset button Hl to open the Save Preset dialog 3 Type a name for the Preset Note You cannot use the names Default or Last Used 4 To enter additional Preset information click the Options button and then enter information in the Author Copyright and Description fields The Preset includes group box shows the data saved with this Preset To omit any of these items from the Preset click the Save button associated with the item a red X will appear over it 5 Click OK To delete a preset 1 In the Presets drop down list select the preset you want to delete Note You cannot delete the Last Used or Default presets 2 Click the Delete preset button E 388 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks Processing Mu
32. To lighten the darkest pixels drag the black diamond to the right To darken the lightest pixels drag the clear diamond to the left Click OK 196 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Replacing Colors Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Changing Individual Colors Use the Hue Map command to replace one or more colors throughout a photograph or other complex image For example you can shift all greens to blues You can also use the Hue Map command to change the saturation or the lightness of the image When you adjust these values all colors original and shifted colors are adjusted To use the Hue Map command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 Choose Adjust gt Hue and Saturation gt Hue Map The Hue Map dialog opens In the Hue shift group box the top row of color boxes shows 10 original colors and the bottom row of color boxes represents the shifted colors Each color is represented in degrees around the 360 degree color wheel To reset the colors to their default settings which is no shift in colors in the Presets drop down list choose Default For each color that you want to shift drag its slider to a new color To c
33. cyan magenta yellow and black inks The difference in these two color modes can cause images to appear darker on paper than on the screen As you become familiar with how your printer handles color adjust your images to compensate If the printed image appears too dark use the Brightness Contrast command to adjust it Paper Quality The texture and color of the paper affects the quality of the printed image Porous paper can cause colors to bleed into each other colored paper can alter the image colors off white paper can reduce the contrast and vibrancy of colors For the best results refer to your printer s owner manual for paper recommendations Chapter 16 Printing Images 357 Saving Images for Printing If you are printing your image on a personal printer save it in the PspImage format This gives you the most flexibility Paint Shop Pro prints all the layers in an image so you don t need to flatten it merge all layers If you are using a black and white printer choose the Greyscale option in the Print dialog If you are sending the image to a printing service flatten the image before saving it When you save an image in most formats other than PspImage Paint Shop Pro automatically flattens the image Ask your printer about the requirements for file format resolution and color depth If you need CMYK color separations choose that option in the Print dialog Choosing Printing Setup Options How to access Pri
34. f stop ISO speed and more Information is preserved when you save the images in Paint Shop Pro PspImage JPEG and TIFF file formats Windows Image Architecture WIA Support Easily import images directly from many digital cameras and scanners using the WIA interface available only when using Windows ME or XP Chapter 1 Getting Started 5 Automated Productivity Presets Create and save custom presets for all filters and effects Use the presets to recreate a specific look or to share with others Brush Presets Paint with creative brush effects such as crayon charcoal pencil and more designed to provide realistic painting effects Choose from many artistic presets or create save and share your own Scripts Use the new scripts feature to repeat any series of commands or steps on any image Choose from dozens of preset scripts or record your own custom series of steps to save and replay or share with others Modify your scripts using a text editor Enhanced Batch Processing Save time and maximize your processing power with many new enhancements to Batch Processing such as the ability to rename files and apply a script to a series of images in a folder New File Extensions Many of Paint Shop Pro s native formats have new file extensions that make them easier to recognize Images are PspImage files gradients are PspGradient files masks are PspMask files and so on Paint Shop Pro version 8 also reads file formats fr
35. feathering 4 Click OK To unfeather a selection 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Unfeather 2 Select the threshold value The higher the value the less feathering 3 Click OK Adding or Removing a Color from a selection To add or remove a color from a selection use the Select Color Range command You can choose to add or remove a color from the selection border The color that you choose is either added or removed and the selection border changes If you copy and paste the selection the pasted area has the color added or removed To add or remove a color from a selection area 1 Make a selection in the image 2 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Select Color Range 3 Select either the Add color range or Subtract color range option 4 Move the cursor over the image and click a color The Reference color box displays the selected color You can also click this box to open the Color dialog and choose a color For more information see Choosing Colors on page 86 5 In the Tolerance edit box specify a color tolerance 0 to 200 If the value is 0 no colors are added or removed from the selection area If you specify a higher value shades of the color or related colors are added or removed Color depth These commands work on 16 million color and greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Using matting on a layer You can also use matting to clean up the edges of a lay
36. left click on or near the starting point or right click the image 332 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools Viewing a Preview view your work in a Web browser window URL and Alt text tip The recent information typed in the URL and Alt text fields is remembered by the program To adjust how much information is remembered see Setting Map Preferences on page 333 To change the shape of a map area Select the Pan tool Ryl and then m Click and drag any point on a rectangle or a polygon m Click and drag a circle by the dot at its upper left or lower right To move the entire map area Select the Move tool e click inside the map area and then drag it to a new position To remove a map area from the image Select the Eraser tool la and then click inside the map area To remove all of the map areas Click the Clear button Assigning Map Area Properties After you have created the map areas or cells use the settings in the Cell Properties group box to assign URLs alternate text and targets To assign map area properties 1 Make a map area active by clicking inside it with the Pan or Move tool Its boundaries are displayed in the lower portion of the Cell Properties group box 2 In the URL field type the address of the Web page that you want to link to example http www jasc com or select an recently used address from the drop down list If you do not want to link to a Web page type 3 I
37. limits to how well the image can be restored To remove JPEG artifacts What if my file is not in l JPEG format 1 Make sure the image has no selections If necessary choose Selections gt Select None The JPEG Artifact Removal command You can apply the J PEG Artifact i po is not available if the image contains a selection Removal command to a file in any format For example if you have 2 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt JPEG Artifact Removal saved a PEG file as a Paint Shop l l Pro Psplmage file you can still 3 In the preview window center the area of the image where the apply the command artifacts are most apparent 4 In the Strength group box set the strength of correction to Low Normal High or Maximum For best results try each option and examine all areas of the image to see which strength setting works best 5 Set the Crispness to determine the amount of detail that is restored from O the least to 100 the most Start with 50 and adjust the value until the image looks the most natural This option determines how much fine detail information the artifact removal attempts to create The recreated information can only be a guess since the original information is lost Excessive crispness may produce fine dots in the image 6 Click OK 64 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Removing Undesirable Patterns in Scanned Images Scanning printed images can produce undesirable patterns call
38. s shortcuts you want to assign Choose Browser or Default Paint Shop Pro s main workspace In the Category drop down list select a category Paint Shop Pro groups related commands into categories For example if you pick the File category all the commands in the file menu are displayed To list all commands at once choose All Commands In the Command list select a command name The description of the command and any assigned shortcut keys are displayed Click in the Press New Shortcut Key field Press the new keyboard shortcut you want to assign to the command The shortcut will appear in the Press New Shortcut Key field If the shortcut is already assigned to another command this will display below the field Click Assign to assign the new shortcut to the selected command Assign more shortcut keys or click Close To assign a shortcut key to a script 1 2 3 Choose View gt Customize to open the Customize dialog Click the Keyboard tab In the Set Accelerator for drop down list pick which application s shortcuts you want to assign Choose Browser or Default Paint Shop Pro s main workspace In the Category drop down list select Bound Script For more information on bound scripts refer to Chapter 17 In the Command list select a bound script Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 417 6 Click in the Press New Shortcut Key field 7 Press the new keyboard shortcut you want to assign to the bound
39. t If it displays a null symbol amp you cannot move the selected item to a particular position For example The background layer cannot be moved There can never be a layer below the background layer A vector object cannot be moved into a raster layer Mask and Adjustment layers cannot be at the bottom of an image or a layer group To move multiple vector objects 1 On the Layer palette click the first vector object 2 Press Shift and click each additional vector object or right click and choose Select all 3 Drag the selected objects to a new position A black line shows the position until you release the mouse button 280 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Original image and with one layer moved to the right SEs kk kaz ar Where s the layer If you move a layer off the image canvas you can no longer see it To get the data back press the Shift key while dragging it with the Mover tool Or increase the canvas size enough so that the layer appears move it to where you want then decrease the canvas size again Saving flattened images Many file formats such as J PEG GIF and TIF do not support multi layered images When you save to these formats Paint Shop Pro merges all layers into a single background layer Moving Layers within the Image Canvas Use the Move tool to move the contents of an entire layer anywhere within the image canvas If you move part of a layer off the canvas Pai
40. the alpha channels are not saved Always keep a master copy of your image in PspImage format To save a selection to an alpha channel 1 Make a selection in the image 2 Choose Selections gt Load Save Selections gt Save Selection to Alpha Channel to open the Save Selection to Alpha Channel dialog The Add to document drop down list displays the image name and below it are the alpha channels in the image if any 178 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 3 To save a selection to another image s alpha channel select the image name in the Add to document drop down list The image must be open in Paint Shop Pro 4 To edit the default name for the new alpha channel type a new name in the Name edit box 5 To move the selection to the upper left corner of the image canvas mark the Move to upper left of canvas check box This option is helpful when the selection is larger than the current image and may not otherwise show up on the image 6 Click Save The selection is saved to the alpha channel Loading Selections from Alpha Channels When you save a selection as an alpha channel within a PspImage image you can load that selection from the alpha channel into the same image or into any other image To load a selection from an alpha channel 1 Choose Selections gt Load Save Selection gt Load Selection from Alpha Channel to open the Load Selection from Alpha dialog Note In the Preview group box click the Transp
41. workspace 2 Choose Preferences gt Auto Arrange or click the Auto Arrange button K To rotate an image 1 Click the image to select it To select multiple images press Shift and click each additional image 2 On the toolbar click Rotate 90 or Rotate 90 E Or select the same commands from the Image menu To resize an image 1 Click the image to select it 2 Drag a corner handle until the image is the size you want it The image maintains its aspect ratio To position an image Click and drag the image to a new position on the page You can also temporarily place images in the workspace around the page You can also position an image by clicking one of the command buttons These buttons align the selected image to the layout page Chapter 16 Printing Images 363 Place lower left Place upper left camer nad 7 Position image at X Y i al Ha El A Ay Place lower right Place upper right Position image at X Y Click this button to open the Place Image dialog Enter values to set the position of the image s top left corner Using the Grid in a Layout Use the grid to align images evenly on the page To display or hide the grid Choose Preferences gt Show Grid or click the Show Grid button H To snap images to the grid 1 Display the grid 2 Choose Preferences gt Snap to Grid or click the Snap to Grid button H When you click and drag an image to position it Paint Shop Pro snaps it to the n
42. 11 Working with Layers Editing Layer Properties Alternative way to rename Double click the layer name to display the Layer Properties dialog and enter a new name in the Name edit box Original image and image with all layers but one made invisible Layer properties are everything you see on the Layer palette the name layer grouping and linking layer opacity blending transparency protection and layer icon highlight colors To change properties double click a layer name to display the Layer Properties dialog or make changes in the right panel of the Layer palette For information about editing an adjustment layer see Editing an Adjustment Layer on page 285 Renaming Layers As you add layers to an image you may find it convenient to rename the layers so they are easy to identify on the Layer palette To rename a layer 1 On the Layer palette right click the name of the layer and choose Rename from the context menu 2 Type the name and press Enter Showing and Hiding Layers Groups and Vector Objects Use the Visibility toggles on the Layer palette to make layers layer groups or vector objects visible or invisible in the image These items remain in the image but are hidden When a layer is visible the Visibility toggle displays When a layer is hidden the Visibility toggle displays To show or hide individual layers and layer groups Do one of the following on the Layer palette m Click t
43. 2 In the File Types list choose Python Source Editor 3 On the right side of the dialog enter the path for the editor application you wish to use Click Browse if you need to navigate for the correct path 386 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks Using and Creating Presets Presets are essentially scripts that define the behavior properties or settings of a dialog or tool Many dialogs and tools come with predefined ready to use Presets You can also design and save your own Presets Examples of Presets Shown below are two examples of Presets one from the Crop tool and one from the New Image dialog Presets a Presets 104 16 cm horizontal 10818 em vertical ia 13 418 cm horizontal 13 418 cm vertical 204 30 cm horizontal 204 30 cm vertical 3 54 5 in horizontal 3 54 5 in vertical 426 in horizontal A ou C im arkin l cancel Crop tool Presets in the Tool Options palette Presets As 10 in horizontal as 10 in vertical S00 600 oo s al Micro Button Business Card horizontal Business Card vertical LD Insert New Image dialog Presets Most Paint Shop Pro dialogs and the Tool Options palette have the following default presets m Last Used These are the settings last used in this dialog Each time the dialog opens Paint Shop Pro displays the Last Used preset settings How do edit a preset To edit a Preset select it modify the dialog or tool settings click the
44. 3 Set the options and settings for listed folders Save To Folder Choose one of the listed folders to be the place Paint Shop Pro saves any new files of this type Scan Subfolders 5 Mark this check box to have Paint Shop Pro search the folders inside the folder Subfolders will not be scanned unless the Enable Directory check box is marked Enable Directory Es Mark this check box to have Paint Shop Pro search for files in this folder 4 Set the loading order of the folders in the list Use the arrows to move a folder up or down the list of folders The folder at the top of the list will be searched and loaded first For example the brushes in the first folder on the Brushes list will display first in the Tool Options palette brush tip drop down window Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 405 Adding or Deleting File Locations You can add or delete folders for Paint Shop Pro to store retrieve specific items Deleting a folder means that Paint Shop Pro will no longer look in the folder for any items the folder is not deleted from your computer Note Some of the file types Cache CMYK Profiles can have only one location You can only change the file location from one folder to another For more information on changing file locations see Changing File Locations on page 404 To add file locations 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog 2 From the File types
45. 40 48 Script 378 fill color for vector objects 238 filter soft focus 68 Fisheye distortion 70 Flip command 151 floating selections 166 floating text 305 Flood Fill tool 222 font style text 306 footer 359 foreground color 83 frames see picture frames Free Rotate 140 Freehand 157 Freehand Selection too using 157 Freehand Selection tool about 154 full screen editing in 23 preview 23 function keys 28 G Gamma Correction command 193 Gaussian blur 78 General Program Preferences accessing 394 Auto Action tab 399 Browser tab 397 Display and Caching tab 395 Miscellaneous tab 400 Palettes tab 396 Photo Sharing tab 399 Transparency tab 398 Undo tab 394 Units tab 398 View tab 394 Warnings tab 398 Geometric effects 319 GIF files exporting 342 optimizing 342 saving 342 using the Wizard 346 GIF optimizer settings 343 Gradient Editor 99 gradients 91 changing color 100 changing markers 99 changing midpoints 99 deleting marker 100 editing 98 exporting 102 importing 102 marker color 100 marker transparency 100 new marker 100 new types 101 renaming and deleting 103 saving 101 selecting options 92 graininess reducing 78 Grey World correction 58 greyscale images 198 199 grid snapping to 133 using 130 grouping vector objects 240 guides changing color 131 deleting 132 modifying settings 132 moving 131 placing 131 snappin
46. 400 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Miscellaneous Preferences The Miscellaneous tab controls a variety of preferences Recently used file list Set the maximum number of files that will appear when you choose File gt Recent Files For example if the value is set to four only the last four saved files will appear on the list Note You must restart Paint Shop Pro before the new settings will take effect Tolerance to background color when pasting a transparent selection When you paste data as a transparent selection Paint Shop Pro adds it to the current image defines it as a selection and then deselects all the pixels that match the current background color The tolerance value you enter determines how closely the background color must match the transparent color for it to become transparent The tolerance scale is 0 to 200 Zero percent indicates that only image pixels with a perfect match to the current background color are made transparent 200 percent indicates that all image pixels are made transparent Clipboard Data on Exit Choose how Paint Shop Pro will handle any clipboard data when you exit the program m Ask Whenever you exit Paint Shop Pro will ask you what to do with the clipboard data Delete Clipboard data will be deleted on exit m Leave Data will remain in the clipboard on exit Force full window redraw when positioning image elements Mark this check box to redraw the information in the
47. Brightness and Contrast gt Gamma Correction In the Gamma Correction dialog the graph shows the gamma curves for the three colors If the three colors have the same gamma value there is one white line representing the three colors If the gammas are different values there is a line for each color The left side of the graph represents the shadows of the image the right side represents the highlights 3 Do one of the following To adjust the brightness and contrast in unison mark the Link check box To change the color balance of the image rather than the brightness and contrast clear the Link check box 4 For the Red Green and Blue values drag the sliders or type new numbers in the edit boxes A value of indicates the original gamma If colors are linked increasing the value lightens the image and decreasing the value darkens the image If colors are not linked increasing or decreasing a individual color value increases or decreases the amount of that color in the image 194 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 5 Click OK Note The Gamma Correction command can result in an image looking somewhat flat you may want to increase the contrast after correcting the gamma See Improvi
48. CMYK Profiles on page 371 To print CMYK color separations 1 Choose File gt Print to open the Print dialog 2 Click the Options tab 3 In the Print Output group box choose CMYK Separations 4 Choose other print options as desired For more information see Printing Multiple Images on a Page on page 360 5 Click the Print button Defining CMYK Profiles In a CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black conversion Paint Shop Pro replaces the RGB Red Green and Blue colors you see on the monitor with the CMYK colors used in printing You can then print a separate page for each CMYK color by selecting the CMYK Separations option in the Page Setup dialog box This is useful if you are using a pre press shop and doing high end printing Before printing the separations configure the CMYK preferences to determine how Paint Shop Pro handles the conversion from RGB to CMYK Save these preferences in a file called a profile To set the current profile 1 Choose File gt Preferences CMYK Conversion Preferences to open the CMYK Conversion Preferences dialog 372 Chapter 16 Printing Images 2 3 Choose the name of the profile from the Current Profile drop down list Click OK To create a new profile Note Paint Shop Pro uses the program s default settings until you create a profile 1 To 3 Choose File gt Preferences gt CMYK Conversion Preferences to open the CMYK Conversion Preferences dialog
49. Chapter 13 Drawing and Editing Objects 227 About Objects 425406405 heeagecsenddie aoe tinii kri 228 Drawing ODjeCIS 05 44 lt 44 686 bo pbc ete ce de ede bbdaaee 229 Creating New Preset Shapes 0 0000 e eee 234 Creating Custom Line Styles 0 0 0 000 cee eee 235 Editing Vector Object Properties 0 000000 237 Aligning and Arranging Vector Objects 239 Resizing and Reshaping Vector Objects 243 Editing Paths and Contours 0 0 00 eee eee 245 Adding and Closing Contours 0 0 00 cee eee 246 Editing NOGCS sest cscge giess Beet eee tee ed beatae see 251 Working with Layers 0000 259 About Layers co cc vegeveedeadedsiedbsdbaetevetave 260 Usine the Layer palette ou 4 e26 o4eaeee been eee eee ss 265 Adding New Layers to Images 0 000000 c ee ues 267 Editins Layer Properties co4e6 cc xe dhe eons oeueee eee ee 270 Modityinie Layers i403c4442serev ke Kehoe ee ban eeeeoe ad 279 Using Adjustment Layers 0 0 0 cee eee eee 283 Working with Masks 045 287 POOULINIGSKGus couee goon ta eet Ca ae eee eta Oboe eee es 288 Creating Masks 0 0 eee ens 289 Edie MASKS 0040 3 226 dee40 gt 0b4 Fe eevee ene eet nue 294 Savio Masks 44 4444 eee cepesewenar bene eee heen 297 Loading MASKS 204 00 2434404444 4465 i e E E 298 Deleting Masks nnnnannnna nanana 301 Working
50. Color dialog or right click it to choose a recently used color In the Image size group box m Mark the Use default check box to keep the original image dimension Clear the check box to enter new image dimensions in pixels in the Width and Height edit boxes The resizing is done using HTML and not by Paint Shop Pro m Mark the Lock Aspect Ratio check box to keep the image s current height to width ratio when it is resized Click the Preview button If you selected to preview only the Bitmap format the program launches the Web Browser and displays the image If you selected any other format the program opens the appropriate Optimization dialog see Saving Images for the Web on page 341 Select your choices for optimizing the image and click OK The Web browser or browsers display your image in the selected formats You may need to scroll to see them For each format the browser displays the file size color depth and approximate download times at different modem speeds Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 331 Mapping Images Use the Image Mapper dialog to create image maps for your Web pages An image map is a graphic that contains a mapped areas called cells that link to URLs Cells can be circles rectangles or irregular shapes When user moves the mouse over a cell the cursor changes to a hand indicating that you can click that area to jump to another Web page To map an image first create the map ar
51. Cropping Images Cropping an image Crop Area After Cropping Crop images to create stronger compositions and change the image focus Cropping can reduce the memory needed to edit the image Also by eliminating extraneous areas of color cropping can improve color corrections Use the Crop tool to select the crop area a rectangle with edge and corner handles that defines what part of the image to keep You can also crop based a selection or based on the opaque areas of an image Note Cropping permanently removes the parts of the image outside the crop area To define the crop area 1 On the Tools toolbar click the Crop tool a 2 Select the area by doing any of the following m Click and drag the crop area rectangle over the image On the Tool Options palette enter values for the Height and Width of the crop area Change measurement systems with the Units drop down list On the Tool Options palette enter positions for the Top Bottom Left and Right sides of the crop area 3 To adjust the crop area do any of the following m Click and drag an edge or corner handle m Click and drag within the crop area to move the whole rectangle m Adjust the Height and Width values Adjust the Top Bottom Left and Right sides of the crop area To remove the crop area and start over right click anywhere in the image Note To constrain the crop area to its current proportions mark the Maintain aspect ratio
52. Each group has a label on the layer palette and all the objects in the group are shown as components Click the plus sign in front of the group name to show the group s components Note Even if an object belongs to a group you can still select it on the Layer palette and edit it individually There are two ways to group objects Use the Object Selection tool or use the Layer palette 240 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects How to edit one object within a group When you have a group of objects most Paint Shop Pro commands apply to the entire group However there are several ways to edit one object within the group First click the object name on the Layer palette the name becomes bold then you can m Right click the object name and choose a command from the context menu m Move the object using the arrow keys To group vector objects using the Object Selection tool 1 Use the Object Selection tool to select each object you want in the group 2 On the Tool Options palette click Group or choose Objects gt Group To group objects using the Layer palette 1 On the Layer palette click the name of the first object you want to group 2 Press Shift and click each object you want to add to group 3 Right click one of the object names and choose Group from the context menu Note If you group objects from several layers Paint Shop Pro moves them all to the layer of the first object you selected T
53. GIF Optimizer Colors Tab GIF images have an 8 bit color depth which means they can display up to 256 colors Because these colors are stored in a palette an image containing 256 or fewer colors is called a paletted image To reduce file size you can have fewer than 256 colors Use the options in this tab to select the colors and type of palette used Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 345 1 Choose how many colors you want the saved image to contain As you remove colors the size of the file decreases but so does the quality of the image Use the preview windows to help you determine the best balance between file size and image quality 2 Choose the amount of dithering which refers to the way Paint Shop Pro arranges pixels in an image to compensate for missing colors in the adjacent pixels 3 Choose a method of color selection for the palette that will be used for the image Choose the Existing Palette option if your image is already paletted and you want to use its palette Choose the Standard Web safe option if your image will be used on the Web m Choose the Optimized Median Cut option if you need to reduce the image to only a few colors Choose the Optimized Octree option if your original image contains only a few colors Note Depending on your needs you may want to try both Optimized options and choose the one that gives you the best looking result or the smallest file size 4 In the Options group box
54. In addition use the sample masks stored in the Masks folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder and apply them as is or customize them Mask layers function similar to other types of layers Turn the visibility of the mask layer on or off change the overall opacity of the mask layer or link the mask layer to other layers For more information see Editing Layer Properties on page 270 Mask layers are automatically saved with the image in the PspImage format You can also save a mask to an alpha channel or as a separate image file on a disk For more information see Saving Masks on page 297 How Masks Affect Underlying Layers A mask layer applies to all layers below it that are at the same level as follows m fa mask layer is in a layer group it applies only to layers within the group that are lower in the stacking order m If the mask layer is at the main level rather than in a layer group it applies to all layers below it in the stacking order To change which underlying layers the mask applies to on the Layer palette drag the mask layer to a new position in the stacking order For more information see Arranging the Stacking Order of Layers on page 279 Mask layers can never be the bottom layer in the image or in a layer group Chapter 12 Working with Masks 289 Mask Layers as Greyscale Raster Layers Masks are greyscale raster layers they contain pixels that can See the contents of the
55. Layout window From the Paint Shop Pro workspace open each of the images you want to print and then choose File gt Print Layout From the Paint Shop Pro Browser select the thumbnail of each image you want to print and then choose File gt Print Layout Where did the image go The print layout workspace extends under the thumbnail list Zoom out or use the scroll bars to see if your image Is hidden under the thumbnail list Using the Zoom tools m To zoom In on a Specific area click the Zoom to Rectangle button IQ Then click and drag within the page layout to choose an area to zoom in on make Sure you click on a blank part of the page to begin m To zoom in click Zoom In 10 m To zoom out click Zoom Out 10 m 10 make the page layout fill the workspace click Zoom to Page You can also choose any of these commands from the Zoom menu Save layouts You can save layouts as templates to make page layout easier Paint Shop Pro also includes many templates with common layouts For more information see Saving a Page Layout on page 365 and Printing Images Using a Template on page 366 n Chapter 16 Printing Images 361 Thumbnails of all open images display on the left side The page layout to be printed displays in the center of a gray area the print layout workspace Note To select more images from the Print Layout window choose File gt Open Image or click the Open an Image
56. Note When you save custom templates they will appear under the User Defined category Template Hint You can also open a template by double clicking its thumbnail Quick steps to printing multiple copies of the same image Open a template drag one image into any cell of the template then choose Templates gt Fill Template with Image Paint Shop Pro places the same image in every cell Now choose File gt Print Chapter 16 Printing Images 367 4 Select the thumbnail of the template you want to open 5 Click OK Paint Shop Pro displays the template in the Print Layout window Note If you saved images with the template the images will appear in the template cells and in the thumbnail list Templates that have images missing will display a greyed out cell in the template thumbnail 6 In the Print Layout window choose File gt Open Template or click Open Template to open the Templates dialog 7 Choose a category from the Select a category list 8 Select the thumbnail of the template you want to delete Click Delete 9 Place images into the cells in the template Place multiple images by dragging each thumbnail into a template cell m Fill the template with copies of the same image by dragging one image thumbnail onto any cell and then choosing Templates gt Fill Template with Image or clicking the Fill template with image button 3 Paint Shop Pro fills all cells with the image Note By default P
57. Open the image you want to use 2 To select a part of the image as the pattern make a selection in the image 3 Follow the same steps as above for choosing a pattern and choose the image from the Pattern Type drop down list If the image has a selection the selection rather than the entire image is available as a pattern To create a new pattern 1 Create an image in Paint Shop Pro or another application 2 Save the image as a file in the Patterns folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder Note To change the default location of pattern files on the Material dialog click the Edit Paths button See Editing File Locations on page 404 Choosing Textures You can paint draw or fill with a texture to create interesting effects Textures give your images the effect of having a textured canvas or paper Paint Shop Pro includes many textures such as clouds cracked cement and old paper You can create your own as well You use textures with the current style solid color gradient or pattern for foreground and background strokes or fills You can apply strokes or fills multiple times to gradually darken and fill in the texture Example of painting with a texture The Texture panel of the Material dialog Texture Asphalt 1 TE HaT Texture Type Edit paths Where are texture files stored The Texture Type drop down list lists all the available files in the Textures folder of the Paint Shop P
58. Pro and placed in an image window The software remains open so you can continue to acquire images or close the software 5 Click the Paint Shop Pro icon in the Windows task bar to display Paint Shop Pro and your image 6 Choose File gt Save As to save the image Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 41 Capturing Images from the Computer Screen Add the capture icons to a toolbar If you frequently capture screens you may want to create a new toolbar containing the icons for the screen capture command see Creating a New Toolbar on page 415 You can take a picture called a screen capture of all or part of the computer screen You can then edit and save the screen capture in Paint Shop Pro Before you capture screens you should configure the screen capture options Setting Screen Capture Options Use the Capture Setup dialog to select how you want to capture how you activate the screen capture and to set other options To set screen capture options 1 Choose File gt Import gt Screen Capture gt Setup to open the Capture Setup dialog 2 In the Capture group box select the type of capture Area Captures an area of the screen that you select by clicking once at one corner of the area and clicking again at the opposite corner Full screen Captures the entire computer screen Client area Captures the contents of the active program Window Captures the active window If a dialog is open this
59. Program Using Palettes Use palettes to choose tools and tool options select colors and manage layers Display or hide palettes or arrange them on the workspace Dock a palette to snap it into place at an edge of a workspace or to float it to move it anywhere on the screen Paint Shop Pro contains these palettes Materials palette Select colors and materials for painting drawing filling and retouching See Using the Materials Palette on page 82 Tool Options palette Modify options for the currently selected tool See Setting Tool Options on page 18 Layers palette View organize and edit image layers See About Layers on page 260 Learning Center palette Displays tutorials for common tasks See Using the Quick Guides to Learn Common Tasks on page 7 Histogram palette Displays a graph of the distribution of red green blue greyscale hue saturation and lightness values in an image Analyze the distribution of detail in the shadows midtones and highlights to decide how to make corrections See Using the Histogram to Analyze Images on page 201 Overview palette Displays a thumbnail view of the active image as well as information about the image See Using the Overview Palette on page 19 Script Output palette Displays actions you take and the results of running scripts See About the Script Output Window on page 379 Brush Variance palette Sets additional brush options This
60. PspSelection extension on a hard disk or removable disk see Saving Selections to Disk on page 176 To load this selection file into Paint Shop Pro see Loading Selections from Disk on page 177 m Save the selection as an alpha channel within the image The selection is stored as part of the image not as a separate file See Saving Selections to Alpha Channels on page 177 To load the selection into the same or a different image see Loading Selections from Alpha Channels on page 178 Saving Selections to Disk When you save a Selection to a hard disk or a removable disk Paint Shop Pro saves the selection as a separate file with a PspSelection extension You can then load this selection into the current image or another image To save a selection file 1 Make a selection in the image 2 Choose Selections gt Load Save Selection gt Save Selection to Disk to open the Save Selection to Disk dialog The Selection files group box shows selections files in the default directory for selections To change the default directory or to add another directory click the Edit Paths button 3 In the File name edit box type a name for the selection 4 Click Save Another way to create greyscale images You can open PspMask and PspSelection files in Paint Shop Pro edit them and save them with another file extension Psplmage Jpeg gif etc Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 177 Loading Select
61. Replacer tool 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Color Replacer tool E The tool may be hidden under the Eye Dropper tool 2 Choose the color to replace as the foreground or background color See Basics of Using the Materials palette on page 84 or Choosing Colors from an Image or the Desktop on page 90 3 Choose the color to substitute as the other color foreground or background 224 Chapter 9 Painting Nothing seems to happen when you apply the Color Replacer tool Make sure you have selected a foreground or background color that is in the image If there are no pixels that match then no pixel colors are replaced To pick a foreground or background color directly from the image see Choosing Colors from an Image or the Desktop on page 90 4 To replace colors using brush strokes rather than all colors in the layer on the Tool Options palette choose the brush tip size opacity and other options See Setting Brush and Paint Options on page 211 5 In the Tolerance edit box specify a value that sets how closely the selected pixels must match the initial pixel you click The range is 0 to 200 At lower settings only pixels with very similar colors are replaced At higher settings more pixels are replaced 6 Position the cursor over the area of a selection or layer that contains the color you want to replace and then do one of the following To replace all occurrences of a color doub
62. Select the folder where you want to save the palette It s most convenient to save it in the Palettes folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder where the preset image palettes are saved 3 In the File name field type a name for the palette Paint Shop Pro To automatically adds the PspPalette extension when you save the file In the Save palette as group box select a palette format PSP palette the default or Microsoft palette for use with other applications Click Save load an image palette Choose Image gt Palette gt Load Palette Select the folder which contains the palette you want to load Preset image palettes are stored in the Palettes folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder Select the palette In the Apply palette using group box select an option Nearest color matching Changes each image color to the color in the palette that is the closest match Error diffusion dithering Attempts to maintain the image s appearance by dithering colors that are not in the palette Dithering places pixels of different colors next to each other to simulate missing colors Maintain indexes Assigns each color in the palette a sequential index number and does the same for each color in the image then changes each color in the image to the like numbered color in the palette Click Open The palette is loaded and the image s colors are updated Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 119 Using the
63. Setting File Locations on page 403 To set a default step value select a step value In the Name field type a name for the brush tip Complete the Author Copyright and Description fields Mark the Save Variance check box to save the brush variance settings with the brush tip Click OK You can now use the brush tip with one of the painting tools To delete a custom brush 1 On the Tools toolbar choose a painting tool such as the Paint Brush Airbrush or Color Replacer On the Tool Options palette click the Brush Tip drop down window Current brush tips are displayed In the list of brush tips select the brush tip that you want to delete and then click Delete i Chapter 9 Painting 211 Setting Brush and Paint Options Brush strokes with 75 and 25 densities Brush strokes with 100 and 50 hardness Brush strokes with different thickness Brush strokes with 0 and 45 degree rotation Brush strokes with different steps The brush and paint options help you create hundreds of different brush strokes Play with the options until you get the effect you want Basic Brush Options The following options are available on the Tool Options palette for painting tools Shape The shape of the brush tip Round and Square are the standard brush tips Choose Round to create curved strokes that look more smooth or choose Square to create brush strokes with corners Choose the other shapes to create
64. Shop Pro or another application Save the image as a file in the Textures folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder Note To change the default location of pattern files on the Material dialog click the Edit Paths button See Editing File Locations on page 404 96 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Painting with a pattern a texture a pattern and a texture An alternative way to create a swatch While you are selecting a material on the Material dialog click the Add to Swatches button to create a new swatch of the currently selected material Understanding the Difference Between Patterns and Textures On the Materials palette you can select both a pattern and a texture as part of a material What s the difference between the two A pattern is an opaque repeated image with specific colors and details A pattern is a style just like solid color or gradient Thus patterns do not use the current foreground or background colors Let s say you select the pattern called Bricks and then apply brushstrokes with the Paintbrush tool Each brush stroke paints the brick pattern A texture gives the effect of having textured canvas or paper Textures use the current style such as a solid color Let s say the foreground color is yellow and you select the texture called Crumpled Paper When you apply a brush stroke each brush stroke paints yellow with the texture of crumpled paper Unlike patterns t
65. Swatches tab E3 Double click the swatch you want to edit You can also click the swatch click the More Options button C1 and then choose Edit Swatch The Material dialog opens Edit the style color gradient or pattern or the texture for the material Click OK To delete a swatch 1 2 3 On the Materials palette click the Swatches tab E3 Click the swatch you want to delete Click the Delete Swatch button or click the More Options button CJ and choose Delete Swatch To rename a swatch 1 2 3 On the Materials palette click the Swatches tab E3 Click the swatch you want to rename Click the More Options button C1 and choose Rename Swatch To change how swatches are displayed 1 On the Materials palette click the Swatches tab EJ 98 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Editing the default gradients If you edit and save one of the gradients that comes with Paint Shop Pro you are permanently changing the gradient type For example if you select the Green Neon gradient type change its colors to orange and yellow and save it The next time you select the Green Neon gradient type it is no longer green To maintain Paint Shop Pro s default gradients save changes to a new gradient file See Saving Edited Gradients on page 101 2 Do one of the following To select which swatch types are displayed click the View button and choose All LW Colors Gradients 9 or
66. Working with Text Editing Text Use the Text tool to edit vector text Edit the characters and their appearance Note You cannot edit the characters or formatting of raster text To modify Raster text use the Deform tool To edit vector text 1 To open the Text Entry dialog do one of the following On the Tools toolbar click the Text tool IAI position the cursor over the text in the image until the cursor turns to Fa then click Right click the text and select Edit Text On the Layer palette double click the text object On the Layer palette right click on the text object and select Edit Text from the context menu The Text Entry dialog opens with the text highlighted In this dialog Paint Shop Pro changes only highlighted text If no text is highlighted when you choose options the options affect new text you type at the cursor position 2 Edit the text in any of these ways To format all text keep it all highlighted and choose options on the Tool Options palette or choose new colors or materials on the Materials palette To format one or more characters click and drag to highlight the text you want to change and choose options on the Tool Options or Materials palette To add new text click where you want to insert it and begin typing To delete text highlight the text and press Delete Chapter 13 Working with Text 309 scaling and Transforming Text To scale resize and transform text Fo
67. and close the Print Setup dialog How to change the paper size The paper size such as letter or legal is a printer property At the Print window or the Page Setup window click the Properties button then the Paper tab Template printing is now scriptable The Print command and the Template tab settings can be recorded in a script Chapter 16 Printing Images 359 Select Template Print dialog only Click this button to open the Templates dialog and choose a template For more information on choosing templates see Printing Images Using a Template on page 366 Fill the template with the current image Print dialog only Choose this option to fill the selected template with the current image Print the selected template with saved images Print dialog only If you select a template that contains links to images the current image will be ignored and the template and all its images will be printed Header Print Layout window only Mark the check box to include header text at the top of the page and then type the text in the edit box Footer Print Layout window only Mark the check box to include footer text at the bottom of the page and then type the text in the edit box Printing a Single Image Quick steps for printing Press Ctrl P to open the Print dialog then press Enter To print the active image 1 Choose File gt Print click Print E or press Ctrl P to open the Print dialog 2 Do any
68. and store your images online order high quality prints and greeting cards and share your images online Before you can add share and print pictures at a photo sharing service you must enroll Signing up is free and gives you space to store print and share your images Visit the Web site for the photo sharing to obtain your user name and password Uploading Images a Photo Sharing Service You can use Paint Shop Pro to upload images to a photo sharing service To upload images to a photo sharing service 1 Choose File gt Browse or click the Browse button 8 on the toolbar to open the Paint Shop Pro Browser 2 Select the images that you want to upload to a photo sharing service Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 329 3 To open the PhotoSharing dialog m Click the PhotoSharing button lel on the Browser toolbar m Choose File gt Export gt PhotoSharing Right click to display a context menu and select PhotoSharing 4 The Upload Album field displays the name of the album where the images will be stored on the PhotoSharing site By default the album is named with the current date but you can enter a different name for the album 5 In the Connection Info group box enter the user name e mail address and password for the photo sharing service Note Mark the Remember Password check box if you want the system to remember the login information 6 Click the Upload button to upload the images to the photo sharing si
69. autoproofing on the Histogram Adjustment dialog so you can see changes graphed in the Histogram Window To use the Histogram Adjustment command 1 To limit the adjustment to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Histogram Adjustment to open the Histogram Adjustment dialog 3 For the Edit option choose a channel Luminance Lightness values of the image If you are correcting contrast start with this channel Color Pick a color channel from the drop down list Red Green or Blue 4 In the Presets drop down list choose Default The default values represent no adjustment to the image 5 On the left side of the histogram look for a gap between the left edge and the point where the graph starts to rise If there is a gap it shows that the darkest pixels in the image are not completely black Click and drag the Low slider the black triangle to the point where the graph rises The top Low edit box displays the low position from 0 to 255 The bottom edit box displays the percentage of pixels that are between zero and the low value their contrast will be lost As a general rule keep the percentage below 0 1 6 On the right side of the histogram look for a gap between the right edge of the window and the point where the graph decreases to zero pixels If there is a gap click and drag the High slider the white triangle
70. available only when you select Greyscale or 16 million color option on the Colors tab 2 For the areas of the image to be transparent choose from these options Existing image or layer transparency Uses the current transparency information For paletted transparency and alpha transparency images the alpha channel is used to create transparency m Inside the current selection For images with a selection this option makes transparent everything within the selection Outside the current selection For images with a selection this option makes transparent everything outside the selection Areas that match this color Click the color box to select any color Or to choose a color from the image move the cursor over the image and click the color In the Tolerance edit box set a tolerance factor that indicates how closely colors must match the selected color before they become transparent Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 351 PNG Optimizer Format Tab Use this tab to determine how an image appears as it is downloaded Non interlaced The image downloads one line at a time starting from the top Interlaced The image is displayed incrementally in several passes and detail is added each time Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download PNG Optimizer Download Times Tab This tab displays the size of the compressed file and an estimate of the dow
71. be the background color or any color from the image To set a transparent color the image must have one layer only and must use an image palette which means the image must have a color depth less than 16 million colors 24 bit m Edit the image in 16 million colors saving it in PspImage format then use the GIF or PNG optimizer to export a copy of the image With these optimizers you can set the transparency of the image We recommend this alternative because it does not change the color depth or flatten the layers of your original PspImage file and keeps all Paint Shop Pro effect and commands available For more information see Saving Images for the Web on page 341 If you decide to make one color transparent in your image use the Set Palette Transparency command to select the color and then use the View Palette Transparency command to display the transparent color in your image You can also use the Set Palette Transparency command to change or undo the transparency of a color To make one image color transparent 1 Choose Image gt Palette gt Set Palette Transparency 2 If you are prompted to reduce the color depth and number of layers click Yes to continue and then choose the options for decreasing color depth For more information see Decreasing Color Depth to 256 Colors 8 Bit on page 113 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 121 3 On the Set Palette Transparency dialog select an option To
72. brush modify the brush options and variance settings and then Presets save the brush tip in the Brushes folder of the Paint Shop Pro When you create a brush tip you program folder The next time you want to paint with that brush tip are saving all of the options simply select it from the Brush Tip drop down list selected for the brush including the brush shape step density You can also make a selection and then turn that selection into a thickness size hardness and custom brush with a width and height up to 500 by 500 pixels rotation settings You can also include the variance settings The brush tip settings that you save can be applied to any tool that has 1 a brush tip control in the Tool Options palette When you create a tool Preset you are savings all 2 the settings that you specified fora particular tool including all of the parameters and variance settings The tool Preset is available only when you select that particular 4 tool To create a brush tip On the Tools toolbar choose a painting tool such as the Paint Brush Airbrush or Color Replacer Modify the settings for the brush in the Tool Options and Brush Variance palettes On the Tool Options palette click the Brush Tip drop down window Current brush tips are displayed Click the Create Brush Tip button or choose File gt Export gt Brush Tip to open the Create Brush Tip dialog Note To save the new brush in a folder other th
73. category select the Preset colors option choose a color category from the list and then choose a color from within the category See Choosing Color Categories on page 56 m To choose from the Color dialog left click the Target color box See Choosing Colors on page 86 To choose from recently used colors right click the Target color box To choose from any open image move the cursor over the image until it changes into a dropper and then click the color To choose a color based on its hue saturation and lightness HSL values select the Manual option and then enter the values When you select the color the Target color box displays the target color If you are using the Preset colors option or have selected a source color from the Target color box choose from the following options Preserve Lightness Mark this check box to preserve the lightness of the source color in the corrected image Clear this check box to match the lightness of the corrected image to the target color s lightness Preserve Saturation Mark this check box to preserve the saturation of the source color in the corrected image Clear this check box to match the saturation of the corrected image to the target color s saturation 6 Click OK Choosing Color Categories The preset color categories of the Manual Color Correction dialog consist of a variety of frequently occurring colors Most of these categories are called memor
74. center of the brush where you first click and erases all matching pixels for the duration of the stroke Continuous samples at the center of the brush at every step and erases all matching pixels BackSwatch erases all pixels that match the current background color on the Materials palette rather than sampling from the image ForeSwatch erases all pixels that match the current foreground color on the Materials palette rather than sampling from the image 218 Chapter 9 Painting Sampling advice For the Sampling option choose the Once setting to erase similar colors while avoiding erasing areas you want to keep You can keep clicking and dragging in other words keep restarting the eraser strokes to erase similar areas If the area you want to erase is quite variable try using the Continuous setting and set the step value very low even down to 1 so that the area is sampled frequently as you erase Auto or manual tolerance Start with the Auto Tolerance check box marked Begin erasing If too much or too little is erased clear the Auto Tolerance check box The Tolerance edit box displays the automatically determined tolerance If too much was erased lower the tolerance If too little was erased raise the tolerance In addition you can reduce the Step and increase the brush size To determine the automatic tolerance the Background Eraser Samples a larger area more frequently m Limits Whether erased p
75. centered on that position Right aligned text ends at that position For existing text fit to a path Paint Shop Pro aligns the text using the start and end nodes of the path Left aligned text begins at the start node Center aligned text is placed midway between the start and end nodes Right aligned text ends at the end node The text goes in the direction from the start node to the end node The direction determines whether the text aligns right side up above the path or upside down below the path Reverse the path to change the direction See Reversing the Direction of Contours or Paths on page 248 The leading of the text determines the spacing between the text and the path Set the leading on the Text tool s Tool Options palette Use positive values to position the text above the path and negative values to position the text below the path On open paths text that is longer than the path hangs from the end The angle of the last line segment determines the direction it hangs On closed paths text that is longer than the path wraps around itself Chapter 13 Working with Text 313 Converting Text to Curves To edit vector text as a vector object convert it to curves You can then move or add nodes change the angles of line segments and perform other edits using the Pen tool Regular text and text converted to curves and modified with the Pen tool Convert each letter into its own object or convert
76. check box on the Tool Options palette Chapter 6 Editing Images 135 To crop an image for printing 1 2 On the Tools toolbar click the Crop tool Esl Define the crop area See To define the crop area on page 134 On the Tool Options palette mark the Specify Print Size check box In the Units drop down list select inches or centimeters You cannot use pixels for this method of cropping Enter the desired Height and Width for the final image The program will fit the final crop area into this size reducing or increasing the image resolution as needed To adjust the crop area do any of the following m Click and drag an edge or corner handle m Click and drag within the crop area to move the whole rectangle On the Tool Options palette enter positions for the Top Bottom Left and Right sides of the crop area To crop the image double click the image or click Apply Iv To crop an image for on screen display 1 2 On the Tools toolbar click the Crop tool Es On the Tool Options palette clear the Specify Print Size check box Define and adjust the crop area See To define the crop area on page 134 To crop the image double click the image or click Apply lv 136 Chapter 6 Editing Images Cropping to opaque area After Cropping Cropping with a Selection In Paint Shop Pro you can make a selection and then crop the image using that selection Note If you crop
77. check box to import WMF vector data as objects you can edit with vector tools Clear this check box to convert all vector objects to raster images Apply smoothing Mark this check box to smooth curved polylines vector data only Customizing Toolbars and Menus Paint Shop Pro 8 gives you almost total control over the program s toolbars allowing you to Move commands from toolbar to toolbar m Add almost any command to any toolbar Add your own custom scripts to toolbars Refer to Chapter 17 Create your own custom toolbar Customizing Toolbars When you display the Customize dialog the entire Paint Shop Pro workspace transforms into customize mode You can click and drag almost any menu command or tool to any other menu or toolbar You can add or delete commands from the menus on the Menu Bar All this can be done with the Commands and Toolbars tabs of the Customize dialog Right click access to Customize dialog Another way to access the Customize dialog is to right click in the Menu bar Tool palette or Tool Options palette and then choose Customize from the context menu Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 413 To access the toolbar customize mode 1 To open the Customize dialog choose View gt Customize You can click back and forth between tabs to access the controls you need 2 After making your changes click Close To select which toolbars are displayed 1 Click the Toolbars tab 2 Mar
78. click the drop down list to choose from mask and image files The Preview group box displays the selected mask on the image canvas 4 In the Orientation group box select from the following options Fit to canvas Adjusts the mask to fit the current image canvas stretching or contracting as needed Fit to layer Adjusts the mask to fit the current layer s data stretching or contracting as needed If the layer has not been shifted beyond the edges of the canvas this option is identical to the Fit to Canvas option As is Places the mask starting in the top left corner of the current layer this option does not change the mask proportions If the mask image is smaller than the current layer Paint Shop Pro by default masks all pixels outside of the mask image boundaries 5 In the Options group box choose whether Paint Shop Pro shows or hides pixels surrounding the loaded mask data if there are any These options affect the mask only if the Orientation option is As Is and the loaded mask is smaller than the current image canvas Invert transparency To invert the transparency of the mask image Hide all mask Makes surrounding pixels black to hide underlying pixels Show all mask Makes surrounding pixels white to show underlying pixels Use image value Makes surrounding pixels white or black depending upon whether the original mask was a show all mask or a hide all mask 6 Click Load Paint Shop Pro adds the mask layer a
79. clockwise To rotate with the Deform tool 1 Select a layer on the Layer palette 2 On the Tools toolbar choose the Deform tool E 3 To change the center of rotation drag the rotation pivot point the circle at the image s center 4 Click and drag the rotation handle the square connected by a line to the rotation pivot point to a new position Keep adjusting the rotation as needed Note Paint Shop Pro hides the image data that is rotated off the canvas You can view the data by increasing the size of the image canvas See Changing Canvas Size on page 139 142 Chapter 6 Editing Images Straightening an image After straighten and crop To rotate with the Straighten tool 1 To straighten a layer rather than the whole image click the layer name on the Layer palette On the Tools toolbar click the Straighten tool 9 A straightening bar with end handles appears on the image Click and drag each handle of the straightening bar to align it with the part of the image that you want to be straight On the Tool Options palette choose from these options Auto Paint Shop Pro automatically straightens the image based on the position of the straightening bar Make vertical Rotates the image to make the straightening bar vertical Make horizontal Rotates the image to make the straightening bar horizontal Angle To choose a specific angle for the straightening bar enter a value with the numeric edit
80. color or right click to choose the color as the background color To choose a color from an image or the desktop 1 Make sure the color you want to choose is displayed on the screen 2 Position the cursor over a Color or Material box on the Materials palette or in a dialog Note On the Materials palette you must assign the foreground and background color separately Position the cursor over one or the other follow the steps and then start over for the other color 3 Hold down the Ctrl key and continue to hold it down until you ve completed the following steps Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 91 4 Move the cursor over the area of the desktop that has the color you want to choose The cursor is a dropper over any area that you can choose from For Windows 2000 or later systems the cursor remains a dropper when you move off Paint Shop Pro onto another application 5 Left click to select the color The Color box or Material box updates with the color 6 To change the color selection continue to hold the Ctrl key and click on different parts of the desktop 7 Release the Ctrl key Choosing Gradients Gradients are gradual blends between two or more colors You can Color depth paint draw or fill with gradients to create interesting effects or Gradients are available for helpful color transitions Use gradients to create Web buttons with greyscale and 16 million color shadows and highlights to make object
81. contrast limits The difference in contrast between a scratch and its background Use a value that sets the limits to where they achieve the best results Start with the Lower limit at 0 and the Upper limit at 50 If scratches remain the Automatic Small Scratch Removal command is unable to remove them If scratches disappear then adjust the limits to minimize loss of image detail Adjust the Lower limit up to the setting just below where scratches reappear Adjust the Upper limit down to the setting just above where the scratches reappear Strength The strength of the scratch removal Mild Normal or Aggressive Select the lowest setting that removes scratches Look at all areas of the image to make sure important details are not lost 5 Click OK 78 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Applying the Motion Blur effect Blurring Images Use Blur to soften a selection or an image Blur images for photo retouching or to remove noise in the image The Blur commands smooth transitions and decrease contrast by averaging the pixels near edges and areas of significant color transitions To increase the effect of any of the Blur effects apply them multiple times to the same image Note These commands work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples all the blur commands refer to the Help system Select from the following blu
82. current masks in the default Masks directory The New mask group box displays the current mask 3 To change the folder where the mask file is saved click the Edit Paths button By default mask files are stored in the Masks folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder For more information see Setting File Locations on page 403 4 In the File name edit box type a name for the mask file 5 Click Save saving Masks to Alpha Channels Save a mask to an alpha channel within the current image or within another image An alpha channel is a data storage area in an image which stores masks and selections Alpha channels are like secret compartments within a suitcase use them to store things you may need later Masks and selections stored in alpha channels have no effect on the look of an image To use the stored masks or selections load them into the same image or another image 298 Chapter 12 Working with Masks Selections in alpha channels For information on saving or loading selections in alpha channels see Saving Selections to Alpha Channels on page 177 Loading Masks Paint Shop Pro masks The Masks folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder contains Sample masks such as gradients and several types of circles and Squares that frame images When you save the image to a file format other than PspImage format the alpha channels are not saved Always keep a master copy of your image in PspImage format
83. cursor Mark this check box to include the cursor in screen captures This check box is not available for area captures Multiple captures Mark this check box when you want to take multiple captures one after the other Start the screen capture and then press the hot key to activate it multiple times Clear this check box to have Paint Shop Pro display after you take one screen capture 5 Do one of the following To start the screen capture feature immediately click Capture Now Screen capture settings are saved and Paint Shop Pro minimizes to the task bar Use the hot key to activate the screen capture See Capturing Images from the Computer Screen on page 41 m To save the settings click OK Capturing a Screen Once you have configured the screen capture settings you can begin capturing screens When you are finished you can edit the screen captures as needed and save the image in Paint Shop Pro For information about saving images see Saving Image Files on page 47 To capture a screen 1 Open or display Paint Shop Pro 2 To start the screen capture feature do one of the following Choose File gt Import gt Screen Capture gt Start m Press Shift C Paint Shop Pro minimizes to the Windows task bar 3 Open or display the image or window that you want to capture Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 43 4 To activate the screen capture right click or press the hot key such as F10 you c
84. custom installation to reinstall 2 Click the Delete button the gradients from the Paint Shop Pro program disk For more Note If you accidentally delete a gradient you want to keep information see Installing the click the Cancel button to undo the deletion and any changes Software on page 6 you made to gradients 1 Display the gradient you want to delete in the Gradient Editor dialog See To display the Gradient Editor dialog on page 99 3 Click Save to close the Gradient Editor dialog and delete the gradient Understanding Color and Color Models We usually think of color as a quality inherent in an object a red car or a green frog But color is really what we see as a result of three factors interacting light the object and the observer As rays of light hit the object the object absorbs some light and reflects some light We see the reflected light and perceive it as color Different colors reflect light of different wavelengths Human eyes are able to perceive thousands of colors in the visible spectrum of light When you apply ink to paper the colors we see result from the light that the ink reflects Computer monitors use emitted light rather than reflected light the colors we see result from light emitted from the screen Selecting the color model RGB is the default color model To change your color model preference see Display and Caching Preferences on page 395 Paint Shop Pro uses
85. decrease the color depth of an image to 16 colors 4 bit This color depth is especially useful for simple graphics on Web pages that you want to load quickly To decrease the color depth to 16 colors 1 To emphasize the importance of certain colors in the conversion select an area of your image optional 2 Choose Image gt Decrease Color Depth gt 16 Colors 4 bit 3 In the Palette group box choose a palette option See About Palette Options on page 116 4 In the Reduction Method group box choose a color reduction method See About Color Reduction Methods on page 115 Note The Ordered Dither option is available only for the Windows color palette 5 In the Options group box mark or clear these check boxes Boost marked colors by If you selected an area of your image you can mark this check box to make the colors in the selection more important by a factor of the value you enter The selected colors will stand out from the rest of the image Reduce color bleeding If you chose the Optimized Median Cut or the Optimized Octree palette and the Error Diffusion reduction method you can mark this check box to make the left to right bleed effect of colors less noticeable 6 Click OK Greyscale versus 256 color images Greyscale images can have 256 Shades of grey 256 color images can have 256 colors Both types of images are 8 bit depth However the Color Depth commands apply to color images only If y
86. dependent way Expand d pushes pixels away from the center of the brush in a time dependent way Right Twirl 4 rotates pixels clockwise around the center of the brush in a time dependent way Left Twirl amp 4 rotates pixels counter clockwise around the center of the brush in a time dependent way Noise t4 causes random movements of pixels under the brush in a time dependent way Iron Out 4 removes unapplied warps in a time independent way Unwarp 4 removes unapplied warps in a time dependent way 5 Select an Edge mode a Draft mode quality and Final apply Another way to warp mode quality See Warping Images on page 146 images You can also use the Mesh Warp tool to warp images See Warping m Click and drag in the image Images on page 146 6 Do one or both of the following to warp the image For the time dependent modes place the cursor at one position and hold down the mouse button to repeat the effect at one area 216 Chapter 9 Painting 7 To unwarp an area choose the Iron Out or Unwarp option under Warp Mode and then click over the area you want to restore Continue clicking or holding the mouse button down until the original pixel position is restored Erasing Use the Eraser tool to erase areas of a layer to transparency or to the background color Use the Background Eraser tool to selectively erase to transparency with options that determine which pixels are erased Before and after
87. disappear After you align text to a vector object you can make the object invisible On the Layer palette click the Visibility toggle of the object Chapter 13 Working with Text 311 To create new text on a path 1 Use the Pen or Preset Shapes tool to create a vector line or vector shape Click the Text tool A On the Tool Options palette in the Create as drop down list choose Vector Select other options font size alignment and so on as desired Move the cursor over the line or shape until the cursor changes to y and then click The Text Entry dialog displays Enter the text and click OK To fit existing text to a path A Gd N e Choose the Object Selection tool fel Click the text to select it Press Shift and click the vector object to select it also Choose Objects gt Fit Text to Path 312 Chapter 13 Working with Text Aligning Text on a path Text is aligned based on the insertion point Aligning and Spacing Text on Object Paths When you create text along a path the text placement depends upon features of the text and the path Feature Text alignment left center or right Direction of path Spacing between text and path Open or closed path How it affects text on a path For new text on a path Paint Shop Pro aligns the text using the position where you clicked to insert the text Left aligned text begins at that position Center aligned text is
88. display 256 shades of grey Rather than applying grey paint to the mask layer image however the levels of grey correspond to levels of opacity To see what the mask layer looks or masking White pixels show underlying layers black pixels hide like position the cursor over the underlying layers and grey pixels show varying amounts of layer name on the Layer palette A thumbnail displays the greyscale mask layer underlying layers The darker the grey the more the underlying pixels are masked Even though masks are raster layers you can create masks that hide or show portions of vector layers When you select a mask layer the Materials palette displays black white and 254 shades of grey as available colors Paint on the mask layer to change the visibility of underlying pixels All tools and commands that work on greyscale raster layers work on masks For the Pen Preset Shapes and Text tools which can create raster or vector objects create raster objects on mask layers Creating Masks There are several ways to add a mask to an image You can create a new mask layer completely showing or hiding the underlying layers You can also create a mask from an image or a Selection Note Because background layers do not support transparency you cannot apply a mask to them When the background layer is selected when you create a new mask you are prompted to promote the background to a full layer 290 Chapter 12 Working with Ma
89. double click on the CD ROM icon When the window opens displaying the contents of the CD ROM double click Setup exe 2 Follow the prompts to install the program Chapter 1 Getting Started 7 Learning Paint Shop Pro Learn Paint Shop Pro in a variety of ways follow the Quick Guides view the Product Tour or use the Help system Using the Quick Guides to Learn Common Tasks Quick Guides are short fast tutorials that guide you through new tasks and projects using your own image Perform each step yourself or have the program show you where to find the tools needed to complete the task To use Quick Guides 1 Choose View gt Palettes gt Learning Center or press F10 to open the Learning Center window 2 Click the title of a Quick Guide to view the selected topic Viewing the Product Tour Watch the movies in the Product Tour to see the new tools and features in action The product tour even links to the Help file and the Quick Guides To view the Product Tour 1 In the Windows desktop click the Start button and choose Programs The Programs pop out menu appears to the right 2 Choose Jasc Software Jasc Paint Shop Pro to open Paint Shop Pro 3 Choose Help gt Product Tour When you are finished viewing the Product Tour click Start Using Paint Shop Pro to return to the main program window 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started Getting Help Using the Jasc Software Learning Center The Jasc Software Learnin
90. eee eee 166 Modifying Selections 0 00 cee ee ene 167 Moving Selections within an Image 174 Converting a Selection into a Layer 0 175 Creating Custom Patterns from Selections 175 Saving and Loading Selections 0 00000 e ee 176 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 181 Key Points to Know Before Making Corrections 182 How Corrections Relate to Color Depth 183 Adjusting the Color Balance 00 00 0000 184 Adjusting Brightness and Contrast 04 190 Replacing Colm icn eduwaw ddaheee dG eeut ee ea weee ES 196 Reducing or Removing Colors 00000 eee 198 Using the Histogram to Analyze Images 201 Chapter 9 Painting 0 cee eee es 207 Painting with the Paint Brush or Airbrush 208 Creating Brush Tips 2 20 0 0 eee eee ees 209 Setting Brush and Paint Options 0 0005 211 Warping IMaG6S o4 20 30ces do a EE S ce 5 215 BIASING joo eed 6S4 be oak bE Ee eee eeonnsn Ce ee eee eas 216 Cloning Parts of Images 0 0 0 cece eens 219 Retouching Miases 1c2 355 62 54 pasren HES bees 220 Filling Areas with Colors Gradients Patterns or Textures 222 Replacing Colors 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 223 Painting with Picture Tubes 0 0 0000s 224 iv Contents Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12
91. eee hap awe 381 About Protected Script Mode ccc ee 382 BQO SCP Sea eu carb ee kata ded eee dee Geer ede rs 384 Using and Creating Presets ccc eee ees 386 Processing Multiple Files nunana ccc ee eee ees 388 Renaming Multiple Files cece ee 391 378 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks Scripting Basics What is Scripting One of the more powerful new features in Paint Shop Pro 8 is Scripting Paint Shop Pro 8 has a full featured scripting engine based on the Python programming language see http www python org for more information on this language Although you can write your own scripts using Python syntax Paint Shop Pro s built in script recorder can do this work for you allowing you to script almost any action within the application If however you choose to write a script in the Python language note that Python uses indentation to determine scoping thus you must be very careful about mixing spaces and tabs We recommend that you use a Python aware editor such as PythonWin or Idle if you choose to write your own scripts Displaying the Script Toolbar You will find it much easier and faster working with scripts via the Script toolbar If it is not already displayed choose View gt Toolbars gt Script The Script toolbar looks like this OneStepPhotoFix gt e ol x About the Script Toolbar Buttons Note Most of the Script toolbar buttons have equivalent menu commands accessed by choos
92. ellipses stars and more To create your own custom preset shapes see Creating New Preset Shapes on page 234 To draw a preset shape 1 On the Layer palette click the layer on which you want to draw 2 On the Tools toolbar choose the Preset Shape tool amp Note Choose the line foreground and fill background colors and materials To draw shapes with no line or no fill set the color to transparent For instructions on setting colors see Using the Materials Palette on page 82 Note The color settings are ignored if you mark the Retain Style check box on the Toolbar Options palette 3 On the Tool Options palette click the preset shapes drop down window and choose a shape 4 Choose to draw a raster or vector object Create as vector Mark this check box to draw a vector object Clear the check box to draw a raster object 5 Choose other line options For more information see Drawing Objects on page 229 6 Click and drag to draw the shape When the shape outline is the size you want release the mouse button The final shape appears on the image Raster objects become part of the current raster layer A vector object will appear on the canvas and on the Layer palette as an object within the current layer Each vector preset shape you draw is a Separate vector object 232 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Switch segment styles as you draw In the Tool Options palette click the Line Se
93. file formats such as GIF See Decreasing Color Depth to a Selected Number of Colors on page 114 Note When you change the color depth you permanently change the colors of the image s pixels Before decreasing the color depth do as much editing as possible in your original image and save a backup copy of the image that includes all layers Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 111 Decreasing Color Depth to 2 Colors 1 bit To create a black and white image you can decrease an image s Another way to create a color depth to 2 colors If your image is already black and white black and white image perhaps it is a line drawing or a photograph to which you applied You can use the Threshold the Threshold command decreasing the color depth to 2 colors can command to select the lightness drastically reduce the file size value threshold from 1 to 255 at which color pixels are changed to When you decrease color depth to 2 colors choosing from the black or white With this command variety of options is not an exact science Try out several different the color depth does not change combinations and see which produces your desired result For more information see Creating Black and White Images on ne i To decrease the color depth to 2 colors 1 Choose Image gt Decrease Color Depth gt 2 Colors 1 bit Ordered Dither reduction method and Error Diffusion 2 In the Palette component group box choose the
94. from the following options Custom Text When you choose this option the program displays a Custom text field below the Included list Type the name you want applied to the converted files Date The current date is added to the name Document Name Includes the original name in the new name but also allows for case changes upper lower m Sequence The position of a file in the renaming process is added to each file Time The current time is added to the name A preview of the new file naming scheme appears at the bottom of the dialog Click OK to go back to the Batch Rename dialog To stop the rename process if Paint Shop Pro encounters an error mark the Stop on error check box If you do not mark it the program processes all the images without stopping If you have already selected files to rename click Start If you have not already selected the files to rename do one of the following To rename specific files press Shift while selecting contiguous files or Ctrl while selecting non contiguous files and then click Start m To rename all files displayed click Select All 392 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks CHAPTER Qk Customizing Paint Shop Pro Contents By setting up Paint Shop Pro to appear and respond in ways that best suit your work you ll not only create a better user experience but you ll likely find yourself working faster and more efficiently This chapter describes the various ways
95. from zero pixels to the highest number of pixels in the graph The horizontal axis represents the value from zero to 255 of the selected channel When you change the histogram the graph displays the adjusted histogram as red and the original histogram as grey To turn off the red overlay clear the Overlay result histogram check box For detailed information on the graph see Understanding Histogram Values on page 203 and Guidelines for Analyzing the Histogram on page 203 In the Histogram Adjustment dialog you can edit the luminance lightness and the red green and blue color channels The Histogram Window opened by choosing View gt Palettes gt Histogram also graphs the hue saturation and greyscale values but these cannot be edited by adjusting the histogram Quick histogram adjustments To correct contrast using histogram functions you can use the Equalize or Stretch commands See Using the Histogram to Fix Contrast Problems on page 190 Zoom in or out Click to magnify the histogram or click a to reduce the view of the histogram Click 1 1 to display the histogram at its original size Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 205 Note The Histogram Adjustment dialog graphs one color channel at a time unlike the Histogram Window which can display all color channels at once You may want to first display the Histogram Window choose View gt Palettes gt Histogram then use
96. go to the right and vice versa Applied to a single node the control arms 1f any will mirror Rotate Rotates the selected nodes by the current rotation setting Applied to a single node the control arms if any will rotate Skew X Moves selected nodes to the left or right along the horizontal axis using the current skew setting Skew Y Moves selected nodes to the left or right along the vertical axis using the current skew setting Contract F8 Moves the selected nodes closer to each other by the current contraction setting Cannot be applied to a single node Expand F9 Moves the selected nodes away from each other by the current expansion setting Cannot be applied to a single node Note To adjust the transform settings see Using the Tool Options Palette to Transform Nodes on page 258 258 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Using the Tool Options Palette to Transform Nodes You can set and apply transformations to selected nodes from the Pen tool s Tool Options palette To adjust and apply transformation settings 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Edit Mode Is Note You may need to click the More button to view all the options in the Tool Options palette 3 Select the node s to transform 4 From the Tool Options palette select a transform function Expand Sets the number of pixels to expand nodes Contract Sets the number of pi
97. holes and specks in the selection are removed Use the Smooth command to smooth the edges of a selection 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Smooth to open the Smooth Selection dialog 2 For Smoothing amount enter a number for the level of smoothing for the corners of the selection Note In the dialog you can click the Toggle Selection button to change between showing only the selection or showing the selection and the rest of the image 3 For Corner scale enter the number of pixels at the corners of the selection to smooth 4 Anti alias mark this check box to smooth the edges of the selection Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 173 5 Preserve Corners mark this check box if you want the corners preserved Clear this check box if you want the corners to be smoothed 6 Click OK The corners of the selection are smoothed Recovering the Anti alias Use the Recover Anti alias command when you want to restore the original anti aliasing of an object that was pasted into an image This command is useful if you made the selection without anti aliasing and now want the edges of the selection to be smooth To recover the anti alias 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Recover Anti alias to open the Recover Anti alias dialog The selection with the anti alias added in the right preview window To apply the anti alias to all layers of the selection mark the Sample merged check box To apply the anti alias and cop
98. important to understand the differences between the two data types Raster Images Raster images are composed of individual elements called pixels arranged in a grid Each pixel has a specific location and color If you magnify raster data you can see the individual pixels as squares of colors An object in a raster image is defined by its pixels For example the front door in an image of a house is made up of a mosaic of pixels at certain locations in the image In bitmap images you edit pixels rather than objects or shapes Raster images can display subtle changes in tones and colors so they are most often used for images like photographs and digital artwork Raster images contain a fixed number of pixels so when you magnify the image you are magnifying the display size of the pixels As a result raster images can display jagged rather than smooth edges if magnified on screen or printed at a large magnification Vector Graphics Vector graphics or images use geometric characteristics lines curves and their locations to define objects For example a door in a graphic of a house is made up of a rectangle with a certain width and height at a specific location and filled with a certain color In vector images you edit objects or shapes rather than pixels Vector graphics do not lose clarity or detail when scaled to any size or printed at any resolution They work well for technical illustrations or corporate logos Chapter
99. include such settings as brush size and shape for painting tools and line width for drawing tools By default the palette is underneath the standard toolbar The palette displays options grouped into bands which you can minimize and drag within the palette To display a minimized band click its handle or right facing arrow Here is an example of an un docked Tool Options palette for the Paint Brush tool Tool Options Paint Brush Presets A Size EE Step UEF Thickness m Opacity Blend Mode Stroke Normal F D Continuons D Wet Look Faint Set the options before you use the tool You cannot edit settings in the Tool Options palette for brush strokes or objects you have already created The Overview palette Overview a Preview E Info A context menu on the Layer palette ayer baiecie Layer re fo Se EO ee Oe ee s biru p i k Ade Lip F j e Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 19 Although the items in the Tool Options palette depend upon the active tool here are the common features Presets Scripts that save specific settings for a tool For more information see Using and Creating Presets on page 386 Down Arrow button y Shows or hides additional options for the tool For information on moving hiding and displaying the Tool Options palette see Using Palettes on page 16 Using the Overview Palette Display the Overview palette to preview the
100. indicator Drag one node away to separate them 250 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects To break a contour with the Pen tool Breaking contours with ie tool 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool l 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Knife Mode 4 3 Select the contour you want to break ren 4 Click and drag across the contour where you want it to break Knife Mode Note The Knife Mode of the Pen tool will cut through all selected contours in an object Breaking multiple contours with the Pen tool After removing cut sections Editing Nodes Components of a Node Selected Node Control Control Handle arm S Direction Deselected Node Symmetrical Node pa E ia Asymmetrical Node N Cusp Node Smooth Node oN Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 251 The Anatomy of a Node A node is a point on a contour that define the contour s shape at that point The Nodes have zero one or two control arms extending from them The length and direction of the control arms determines the shape of the contour at the node Click on the control handles to adjust control arms The straight or curved line between two nodes is a line segment Node Types Symmetrical Choose this type to create a smooth flowing curve from one side of the node to the other Any adjustments to one control arm are mirrored by the other Asymmetrical Choose this type to obtain a different amount
101. interesting effects For information on creating your own brush tips see Creating Brush Tips on page 209 Size The size of the brush from 1 to 500 pixels If the brush is asymmetrical such as when the Thickness is set to 50 the size is the brush height Hardness The sharpness of the brush edges The harder the brush the more defined the edges of paint are At 100 the brush stroke has sharply defined edges As the hardness decreases the brush edge softens Step The spacing of paint impressions or how frequently the brush touches the image during a stroke The step value is a percentage of the brush size At a step of 100 a size 30 brush makes an impression once every 30 pixels and the brush tip is clearly defined At a step of 50 each impression touches the middle of the previous impression As the step decreases the brush makes more impressions its shape becomes less noticeable and its strokes appear smoother and more dense Density The amount of paint applied with each stroke At 100 paint covers the surface completely As the density decreases the amount of paint applied with each stroke decreases At 1 only a few pixels of paint appear Thickness The width of the brush in relation to the brush size or height The value is a percentage At 100 thickness the brush width is the same as the brush height At 50 thickness the brush width is half the brush height Rotation The degrees of rotation of the br
102. irs 00 oe aa due dow ew ox ede ted 325 316 Chapter 14 Applying Effects Choosing Effects About effects presets To display the thumbnail previews that you see in the Effect Browser Paint Shop Pro applies an effect s default preset and any presets you have saved to the image This preset is a script file P spS cript Choose Paint Shop Pro s effects in one of two ways through a menu command or through the Effect Browser Use the Effect Browser when you want to try out multiple effects before applying them to your image The Effect Browser displays presets both the defaults and any that you create To choose an effect through a menu From the main menu choose Effects choose a sub menu and then choose an effect For example choose Effects gt Distortion Effects gt Twirl For most effects a dialog with preview windows opens Modify the settings and click OK To choose an effect using the Effect Browser 1 Choose Effects gt Effect Browser to open the Effect Browser The left panel shows the Effects Presets folders which are located in the Presets folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder Paint Shop Pro scans the folders and creates thumbnails of your image with each effect applied to it 2 To preview all effects on the image click the Presets folder 3 To preview types of effects click one of the Effect folders such as 3D Effects Artistic Effects or Blur 4 To select an effect preset click the
103. is anything you create with the Pen or Preset Shape tool Use the Preset Shape tool to create standard shapes circles squares and stars Or create your own custom shapes using the Pen tool Both tools can create raster or vector objects Note The Text tool can also create vector objects For more information see About Vector Floating and Selection Text on page 305 Raster Objects When you use the Preset Shapes or Pen tool to draw raster objects you are really painting on a raster layer Even though you create a raster object in the same way as a vector object your finished shape is not a vector object Once the shape is complete it becomes pixels on a layer You can only edit the pixels with raster editing tools Note You can only draw raster objects on raster layers If you try to draw a raster object on a vector layer Paint Shop Pro will create a new raster layer for your object Vector Objects When you use the Preset Shapes or Pen tool to draw vector objects you are creating objects that can be edited later A vector object s properties outline color fill color size location and more can all be easily changed over and over You can also edit the paths contours line segments and nodes that make up vector objects Note You can only draw vector objects on vector layers If you try to draw a vector object on a raster layer Paint Shop Pro will create a new vector layer for your object Chapter 10 Drawi
104. is available only for the Edge Seeker selection type Smoothing The amount of smoothing from 0 to 40 for the selection border This smooths sharp edges or jagged lines Anti alias Mark this check box to use anti aliasing which produces a smooth edged selection by partially filling in pixels along the edge making them semi transparent Clear the check box to keep the original edges 158 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images Using the Point to Point selection type Sample Merged If the check box is marked the tool searches for an edge in all layers of the area you select If the check box is cleared the tool searches for edges only in the current layer If using the Edge Seeker and Smart Edge selection types this option can only be used on single layered images 5 Make the selection m For the Edge Seeker and Smart Edge selection types click in the image where you want to start the selection then click points around the area you want to select After you click each point a line indicates the selection border To delete a previous point press Delete To complete the selection double click or right click m For the Freehand selection type click and drag an outline of the area you want to select When the line encloses the selection release the mouse button If you release too soon start again or add to the selection as described in Modifying Selections on page 167 For the Point to Point selection
105. layer For simple retouches and corrections you do not have to add any layers However if you want to add new elements to your image use layers to make changes and artistic effects easier Each layer that you add begins as a transparent sheet over the background As you add brush strokes objects or text you cover up parts of the Background layer Transparent parts allow you to see through to underlying layers Stack up multiple layers to create whatever effect you d like such as artistic compositions photo collages or complex illustrations In the following illustration each image is on a separate layer The background layer is transparent Creating image compositions with layers Layer Palette Text BE oh SS Ta Oi 7 GO My Be Ga Gi Gy beg oy Canyon i E Background Raster and vector data For more information on raster and vector data see About Raster and Vector Graphics on page 32 How many layers Paint Shop Pro supports up to 500 layers The actual number of layers allowed in an image may be limited by the amount of memory in your computer Saving multi layer images When you create multi layer images you must save them Psplmage format Paint Shop Pro s native format to maintain all layer information When you save to most other formats all layers are merged into one background layer When you Save to PSD PhotoShop format the image maintains r
106. method drag the center rotation handle to rotate the selection You can also reshape the eye from a circle to an ellipse by dragging its side handles Fine tune the eye correction by adjusting the pupil size and lightness glint iris size and feathering and blurring of the iris Refer to the fine tuning steps later in this section To correct other red eyes repeat the previous steps The settings from the first eye are retained so the subsequent corrections should be much quicker Click OK To fine tune the eye correction on the Red Eye Removal dialog 1 For a human eye look at the corrected eye to see if you need to adjust the iris area around the pupil An animal eye usually does not show an iris Sometimes the red eye area covers the iris If needed adjust the iris with the following options Iris Size The size of the iris Increasing the iris size decreases the pupil size Hue The color of the iris such as blue brown or green This option is not available for the Freehand Pupil Outline and Point to Point Pupil Outline methods because these methods select the pupil rather than the pupil and iris Color The color variation of the iris such as light blue or deep blue For Pupil lightness adjust the value so that the corrected eye appears the appropriate shade and matches your perception of the natural color Examine the glint in the eye A glint makes the eye look natural and lively without it the eye loo
107. of curve on each side of the node but still keep a smooth flow through the node You can independently adjust the length of each control arm but the not the direction Cusp Choose this type for nodes that have extreme changes in direction You can adjust the length and direction of each control arm independently Smooth Choose this type of node to have create a smooth transition between straight and curved line segments Selecting Nodes To select one or more nodes 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode e 3 Click a vector object The object becomes an outline with nodes 4 Do any of the following To select one node click the node To deselect a node press shift click the node To select multiple nodes press Shift and click each node Or click and drag a rectangle over the nodes 252 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Node moving tips While you drag a node you can constrain its line segments to 45 degree increments Hold down Shift to constrain the previous segment Hold down Shif Alt to constrain the next segment To select all nodes on a contour double click one node If the object has only one contour this selects all nodes in the path To select all nodes in a path all nodes in the object press Ctrl A or right click and choose Edit gt Select All from the context menu m To select the next or previous node on a contour pres
108. of the spectrum You can also do this manually with the Histogram Adjustment command Make your own adjustment layer Although there are no adjustment layers for the Equalize and Stretch commands you can still apply the commands without changing the Original image pixels Make a copy of the layer to which you are applying the commands and paste itas a new layer Apply the commands to the copied layer and on the Layer palette turn off the visibility of the original layer You can use this trick with all Paint Shop Pro correction commands that don t have an adjustment layer Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit color or greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Using automatic corrections To adjust the contrast with several easy to use options Such as choosing an appearance that is flat natural or bold use the Automatic Contrast Enhancement command See Automatically Enhancing Contrast on page 60 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 191 To use the Equalize command 1 To limit the adjustment to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Equalize The image
109. only and a transparent background has no fill the objects or letters are outlined only This button is unavailable for tools that require a foreground or background color All Tools If the check box is marked the selected foreground and background materials apply to all tools If the check box is cleared the selected materials apply only to the active tool such as the Paintbrush tool or the Preset Shapes tool Note The All Tools check box does not apply to the Edit Text command 84 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials The Material dialog o She Cor Grete Paen Basics of Using the Materials palette The Materials palette offers a variety of ways to choose colors styles and materials To display or hide the Materials palette Choose View gt Materials palette or press F6 To close the palette you can click the Close button LE To choose a foreground or background solid color 1 On the Materials palette do one of the following To choose a foreground color click the Foreground Color box To choose a background color click the Background Color box The Color dialog opens Note You can also click the Foreground Material box or the Background Material box to display the Material dialog and then click the Color tab 2 Choose a color from the Jasc Color Picker or the image palette See Choosing Colors on page 86 To choose a foreground or background material color grad
110. open the Toolbar name dialog 4 Type a name for the new toolbar and click OK A small empty toolbar will open in the middle of the workspace To add commands to it choose the Commands tab and then drag command icons into the new toolbar For more information see Customizing Toolbars on page 412 5 When you re done adding commands click Close To delete a custom toolbar 1 Choose View gt Customize to open the Customize dialog 2 Click the Toolbars tab 3 In the Toolbars list select the name of the custom toolbar you want to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click Close Customizing Context Menus Context menus open when you right click with a certain tool or right click over a certain area of the workspace To customize a context menu 1 Choose View gt Customize to open the Customize dialog 2 Click the Menu tab 3 From the Select context menu drop down list choose a context menu The context menu will display in the workspace Edit the menu just like any other toolbar For instructions see Customizing Toolbars on page 412 416 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro setting Other View Options Assigning Shortcut Keys You can assign a keyboard shortcut to menu commands tools and even scripts To assign shortcut keys to commands and tools 1 2 3 Choose View gt Customize to open the Customize dialog Click the Keyboard tab In the Set Accelerator for drop down list pick which application
111. palette is particularly useful if you have a 4D mouse or a pressure sensitive tablet For example you can vary the opacity of a brush stroke by applying pressure with the stylus You can use some options with a mouse Flyout menu displaying pallets eee Piped peeps Fle bidea Hele Overview palette rolled up Overview Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 17 To display or hide a palette Do one of the following Choose View gt Palette and choose the palette name Type the palette s shortcut key listed to the right of the name Right click any palette and choose the palette name from the context menu To set palette roll up options On a palette Click to allow the palette to automatically roll up Click J to lock the palette open For information about setting palette locking preferences see Palettes Preferences on page 396 To set the docking preference of palettes Choose File gt Preferences gt General Program Preferences and click the Palettes tab of the dialog In the Allow docking of group box mark the check boxes of the palettes you want Paint Shop Pro to dock automatically when you drag them to the edge of the workspace Note You can also open the Palettes tab of the Paint Shop Pro 8 Preferences dialog by right clicking any toolbar or palette and choose Docking Options or by choosing View gt Docking Options To resize a palette Click and drag a corner or an edge o
112. pixels in a layer or an image 1 If the image has more than one layer on the Layer palette click the name of the layer you want to select 2 Choose Selections gt Select All or press Ctrl A A marquee appears around the layer on the canvas 164 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images Creating Raster Selections from Vector Objects You can select a vector object convert it to a raster selection and then copy and paste this selection into another layer or another image Do this when you want to apply raster only tools and commands to vector objects To create a raster selection from a vector object 1 Use the Object Selection tool to select one or more vector objects 2 Choose Selections gt From Vector Object The selection marquee surrounds each vector object You can now copy and paste the selection as needed The original vector objects remain unchanged Using Edit Selection Use the Edit Selection command to create a selection from a brush stroke or to apply an effect to only the selection marquee To create a selection 1 Choose Selection gt Edit Selection or click the Edit Selection button on the Layer palette A selection layer is added to the Layer palette Select a painting tool from the Tools toolbar For more information see Chapter 9 Painting Set the options for the painting tool in the Tool Options palette and the Variance palette Paint on the image with black white or shades of gre
113. position value and click OK To change the color and position of a guide 1 Double click or right click the guide handle to display the Guide Properties dialog 2 Select from these options Color choice tip Right click the color box to pick from the Recent Colors dialog Guide color Click the color box to choose a new color for the guides Guide position Type values in this field to control the guide s position in pixels 3 Click OK 132 Chapter 6 Editing Images To modify settings for guides 1 To open the Grid Guide and Snap Properties dialog do any of the following Choose View gt Change Grid Guide and Snap Properties Right click the image title bar to display a context menu and choose Change Grid Guide and Snap Properties Double click the ruler 2 Click the Guides tab The Default settings group box shows settings for all the guides you place in the future The Current image settings group box shows settings for the guides in the current image 3 For either the default or current image settings select from these options Color Click in the color box to choose a new guide color Snap influence Controls how many pixels away an item must be to snap to a guide or grid The Snap to Grid option must be selected in the View menu 4 Click OK To delete one guide Do either of the following Drag the guide handle in the ruler off the image window Double click the guide handle
114. revert to the last saved version of an image To undo the last action Click the Undo button e choose Edit gt Undo or press Ctrl Z If the action can t be undone the Undo button and menu command are inactive To redo the last action Click the Redo button choose Edit gt Redo or press Ctrl Alt Z To revert to the last saved version of an image Choose File gt Revert 128 Chapter 6 Editing Images The Command History dialog To free memory used by the Undo Redo commands Use this command only when the stored information is so large it noticeably slows down Paint Shop Pro s performance This action permanently clears from memory all information stored in the Command History It cannot be undone 1 Choose Edit gt Command History 2 Click the Clear button in the Command History dialog Using the Command History to Undo Actions Revert to a previous state of an image using the Command History dialog This dialog displays all the actions you have performed since you opened the image The number of actions you can undo depends on the settings in the Undo tab in the General Program Preferences dialog See Undo Redo Preferences on page 394 The Command History dialog lists the action number amount of time since you performed the action and the command performed Note To undo or redo one command from the list you must undo redo all commands above it When you select a command to undo or r
115. run Paint Shop Pro With Paint Shop Pro you can access and manage your images while they are in your digital camera You can also load the images directly into Paint Shop Pro Before you can view and download images from a digital camera card reader or scanner you must install the special software called drivers that enables your computer to connect to the camera card reader or scanner You must install this software before connecting the camera card reader or scanner to the computer Refer to the documentation supplied with your camera card reader or scanner for more information about this software Determine which type of connection your camera card reader or scanner uses m WIA The default for WIA compatible computers running the Windows XP and ME operating systems Your camera card reader or scanner must support WIA Mounted Drive The default for non WIA computers and the most common type of connection Some cameras and scanners and most card readers are viewed as an additional disk drive when they are connected to the USB port of your computer TWAIN Most cameras and scanners are TWAIN compliant Use this setting if your camera scanner or card reader is TWAIN compliant Viewing EXIF Data EXIF stands for Exchangeable Image File Format If your camera Supports this standard it will record the time amp date the image was taken exposure information ISO shutter aperture and other camera details in t
116. script The shortcut will appear in the Press New Shortcut Key field If the shortcut is already assigned to another command this will display below the field 8 Click Assign to assign the new shortcut to the selected bound script 9 Assign more shortcut keys or click Close To view all shortcut keys 1 Choose Help gt Keyboard Map to open the Help Keyboard dialog 2 In the Show Accelerator for drop down list pick which application s shortcuts you want to view Choose Browser or Default Paint Shop Pro s main workspace 3 In the Category drop down list select a category Paint Shop Pro groups related commands into categories For example if you pick the File category all the commands in the file menu are displayed To list all commands at once choose All Commands The commands and their shortcut keys are displayed in the list sorted by command name Click any column heading Command Keys or Description to sort alphabetically by that column Note To print the list of the current category of shortcut keys click Print in the dialog s toolbar To select commands and copy their information to the clipboard click Copy EI 4 When you are finished viewing keys click the Close Window button in the upper right corner Adjusting General View Options The Menu and Options tabs of the Customize dialog control a variety of general menu and toolbar features Menu Tab Menu animations Choose an animation style for
117. selection You cannot exit raster text so use this type when you know that the words and formatting will not change Use raster text when you want to apply raster only tools such as the Paint Brush or commands such as applying a 3D effect It s best to create raster text on a new raster layer That way you can easily select the text and make changes such as stretching it with the Deform tool When Paint Shop Pro defloats the raster text selection such as when you click another tool the raster text is merged with the underlying raster layer If a vector layer is active Paint Shop Pro creates a new raster layer 306 Chapter 13 Working with Text Formatting Text When you enter or edit text with the Text tool select from the Text with several formatting following formatting options on the Tool Options palette options Font A set of characters letters numbers and symbols that share a common look Click the Font drop down list to see the font family name such as Arial or Times New Roman displayed in the font itself Jasc Software Jasc Software Size The point size of the text How small or large a font looks in the image depends upon the image s resolution 72 point text is approximately 1 inch high in a 72 dpi image but will be smaller in images with higher resolution Jasc Software Jay ete a F Stroke Width The text outline pixel width Choose 0 pixels to have no outline Anti alias Anti aliasing s
118. such as red or yellow Saturation is the vividness of the color Lightness is the intensity of light in the color Make adjustments in this order For most photos first adjust the color and then adjust the contrast Contrast adjustment can result in a loss of image information that is needed for color adjustments For images that are extremely dark or light first adjust the contrast to make the colors more visible then adjust the color If necessary adjust the contrast again Always adjust the saturation last Each color contrast and saturation adjustment can be made automatically or manually For automatic adjustments you choose a few settings and Paint Shop Pro does the rest For manual adjustments you analyze the photo and decide what adjustments it needs Note When correcting color photographs start with the automatic adjustments and see if you like the result If the photo still isn t right use the manual adjustments Fixing Photos in One Step Use the One Step Photo Fix command to automatically adjust the color balance contrast clarity saturation smooth edges and sharpen an image To fix a photo in one step On the Photo toolbar choose One Step Quick Fix to automatically fix a photo Note Note To view the Photo toolbar choose View gt Toolbars gt Photo 54 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Improving Colors To improve your photographs start by adjusting the colors Differen
119. the Add Noise effect to reduce the detail in an image and add a Adding noise to an image grainy texture This effect can also be used for image correction By adding a small percentage of noise to an image you can reduce the appearance of small imperfections and scratches To use the Add Noise effect 1 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Add Noise to open the Add Noise dialog 2 Choose the pattern of the noise Random Uniform or Gaussian With Uniform noise the color of the noise resembles the original pixels With Gaussian noise the majority of the noise values are even closer to the original 3 In the Add Noise edit box select the percentage of noise to add 4 To use black and white noise pixels mark the Monochrome check box To use colored pixels clear the check box 5 Click OK 322 Chapter 14 Applying Effects Adding Picture Frames Adding a picture frame Picture frames with transparency If you apply a picture frame with transparent areas to a background layer and place the frame outside the image the transparent areas are the current background color rather than transparent The background layer does not support transparency Loading picture frames To change the folder to load picture frames from click the Edit paths button By default picture frames are stored in the Frames folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder For more information see Setting File Locations on page 4
120. the Transfer and Components tab Black Generation Transfer and Components ink Calibration m Transfer curves Grey component kion Quarter tone 25 Mid tone jo z Three quarter tone 75 m Color component Quarter tone jao i i 63 i 0 fos foo fs ho Mid tone 3 Three quarter tone 80 Default Cancel Help The left panel of the Transfer and Components tab displays a graph of the transfer curves for cyan magenta yellow and black The right panels display parameters for grey and color components In the Transfer Curves group box adjust the transfer curves by highlighting the name of a curve in the Transfer Curves drop down list and then dragging the points of the curve up or down Each transfer curve contains five adjustable points that define the curve based on its zero tone quarter tone mid tone three quarter tone and full tone percentages The default curve is a straight line from 0 to 100 A curve that slopes above this 45 line produces darker tones In the Grey Component group box set the percentages by typing values into the corresponding fields Values can range from 0 to 100 4 In the Color Component group box set the percentages by typing values into the corresponding fields Values can range from O to 100 Chapter 16 Printing Images 375 To configure the Ink Calibration tab 1 In the CMYK Profile dialog click the Ink Calibratio
121. the current selection or layer is placed on the clipboard Choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Image A new image window opens in the work space The layer you copied is now the background of the new image create a new image from a layered image On the Layer palette click a layer Choose Edit gt Copy Merged Note All layers are merged into one layer and placed on the clipboard Choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Image A new image window opens in the work space The new image contains all layers merged into one raster layer create a new image from clipboard data Cut or copy a selection or layer of an image or an item from another program Choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Image The clipboard data is pasted as a new image If this command is greyed out then the data you have copied to the clipboard cannot be pasted as a Paint Shop Pro image Note A dialog may appear requesting additional information such as width and height of the new image window You can change your preferences so that Paint Shop Pro does not prompt for size and options when you paste data See Setting File Format Preferences on page 410 38 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Importing Images from Digital Cameras and Scanners Running scanning software In addition to running the scanning software from Paint Shop Pro you can also run the software from the Windows Start menu After you perform the scan you then need to
122. the edit box use the Delete or Backspace key to delete the number as needed and then type a new value You can also double click the number to highlight it and then type a new value Meter bar Note If you type a value in the edit box that is out of range for the control the box turns red To increase or decrease the number by one click the up or down Brightness To choose an approximate value click once at a position on the meter bar To choose from the range of possible settings click and hold the mouse button down on the meter bar or the slider button drag to select a desired setting and release the mouse Using Color Boxes In some dialogs a color box displays the currently selected color The color box in the New Image When you move the cursor over the color box the cursor changes to dialog a dropper and displays the RGB values Click the color box to select another color Left click the color box to select from the Color dialog O Transparent Right click the color box to select from recently used colors For more information see Choosing Colors on page 86 28 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Randomizing Parameters Many correction and effect dialogs have a Randomize parameters button Click this button to update all dialog settings with random values To try out a variety of settings click the button multiple times To randomize settings within a dialog Click the Rand
123. the lower left of the chart both values are zero black At the upper right both values are 255 white To add a point to the graph move the cursor over the dotted red line until the cursor changes to an arrowhead and displays ADD then click the line To move the line drag a point or enter values in the Input or Output edit box To remove a point drag it off the graph 6 Click OK Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 193 Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast in Unison Use the Gamma Correction command to adjust the brightness and contrast of an image in unison The gamma of an image is a standard measure of its contrast and brightness The gamma curve has three components the red green and blue of the image In addition to adjusting the brightness and contrast of the image with the Gamma Correction command you can adjust the color balance of an image by unlinking the three components and changing them separately For example if the image has a red cast to it you can reduce its red value To use the Gamma Correction command 1 To limit the adjustment to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt
124. the mesh warp double click the image or click Apply v To cancel the mesh warp click Cancel x 148 Chapter 6 Editing Images What is an Edge Mode setting The Edge Mode Setting determines what happens if there is a gap between the border of the image and the edge of the image Saving and Loading Deformation Maps You can save the deformations you have created to warp other images Paint Shop Pro creates a Deformation Map file that contains the positions of the nodes and the number of mesh lines Save the mesh during the warping process or after you have applied the deformation To save a deformation map 1 2 3 To On the Mesh Warp Tool Options palette in the Deformation map group box click Save to open the Save Deformation Map dialog In the New deformation map group box type a name for the map file In the Checkerboard size drop down list choose a checkerboard size that helps you preview the deformation effect This information is not saved with the map file Click Save to add the file to the default Deformation Maps folder Click the Edit Paths button to choose a different folder for saving the deformation maps load a deformation map On the Mesh Warp Tool Options palette select an option under Edge mode Background or transparency fill The areas between the edge of the image and the edge of the warp are filled with the current background color if the areas are on a background transparenc
125. the settings use the default values Click OK to return to the Save As dialog 6 Click Save to save a copy of the file Note For information about saving several images in a new file format see Processing Multiple Files on page 388 For information about optimizing images for the Web see Saving Images for the Web on page 341 51 PUA Jg jar ae p gt a CHAPTER E Improving Photographs Once you have photos in Paint Shop Pro the next step is to correct any problems with the images Sometimes the problems are obvious such as when the subject is too dark Sometimes you know that the picture could look better but you don t know what to fix This chapter will help you determine what needs improvement in a photo and show you how to improve it Note All commands mentioned in this chapter work on 16 million color and greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Contents Basic Steps in Improving Photographs o iooi m How to Approach Color Contrast and Saturation Adjustments 53 IMPrOving COINS iu 24 bit oe deen were EEEREN 54 Improving Contrast weccaw adawe es deewe bee eer bee eae 60 Improving Sat ralon zing ata ne eae She ooo eae ee 61 REMOVING Source Defects dct ecw naan deem CX eae bees 62 Removing Image Defects and NoiSe anaana aaa aaa 65 Correcting Image Distortions eee ee 69 RE
126. the top Other resize options You can also change the image size by resizing cropping or printing ata different size Fora comparison of these options see the sidebar Other ways to change an image s size on page 137 Color choice tip Right click the color box to pick from the Recent Colors dialog The image canvas is the work area of the image and defines the image s dimensions for example 200 by 300 pixels Sometimes you need more canvas to add elements to an image other times you want to make the canvas size smaller Use the Canvas Size command to add or remove pixels at the edges of the image Note Reducing the canvas size is not always the same as cropping an image For images with layers reducing the canvas size does not delete the pixels outside the new canvas area it just shows less of the layer Background layer information will always be deleted even when there are other layers in the image To change the image s canvas size 1 Choose Image gt Canvas Size to open the Canvas Size dialog 2 Choose settings from the New Dimensions group box Width Height Enter values for the new canvas size Units Use this drop down list to change the measurement system Lock aspect ratio Mark this check box to constrain the new canvas size to the current image proportions The numeric edit control below the check box indicates the image s current width to height ratio Change this value to create a different
127. this check box to stop saving an image cache of the merged image for each group Merged Below Active Layer Clear this check box to stop saving an image cache of all the group layers below the active one Palettes Preferences The Palettes tab controls behaviors of the materials palette as well as how palettes dock Materials Palette Options Display colors in RGB format or Display colors in HSL format This option controls the color information that appears in the materials palette and with the dropper tool Decimal display or Hexadecimal display This option controls how color values will display throughout the program Show rainbow picker or Show document palette For images with limited palettes 8 bit 256 color the document palette shows only colors that are actually in the image Docking Options Clear the check box beside each palette to prevent the palette from docking This will allow you to drag the palette anywhere in the workspace Color choice tip Right click the Selection color box to pick from the Recent Colors dialog Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 397 Browser Preferences The Browser tab controls the appearance and operation of the Browser Thumbnail Size Enter values in pixels for the thumbnail size the Browser displays The size range is from 50 to 150 pixels Clear the Symmetric check box to adjust thumbnail width and height independently Appearance Choose Use Windows colors to hi
128. to ADD 5 Click and drag the cursor across the contour where you want to add nodes To add a new start or end node 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Drawing Mode and the Segment Type you want to use 3 Select the start or end node of the contour 4 Click to draw another node the contour automatically connects to the new node 5 Do one of the following Continue drawing new nodes To edit the nodes or contour click the Edit Mode DS To finish the changes choose another tool 256 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Deleting vs Merging Deleted Node Merged Deleting or Merging Nodes Merging nodes on a contour removes the nodes from the contour but retains the line segments on each side The line segments are combined into one line segment between remaining nodes If the contour is curved at the node Paint Shop Pro attempts to retain the curve Deleting a node on a contour removes the node and line segments on each side If you delete a node in the middle of an open contour the vector object becomes two separate contours If you delete a node in a closed contour the contour opens To merge one or more nodes 1 Select the node you want to merge 2 Merge the node in one of these ways Choose Objects gt Edit gt Merge Ctrl M m Right click on the node and choose Edit gt Merge from the context menu Press Ctrl mo
129. to another layer Chapter 13 Working with Text 307 Kerning The horizontal space between characters measured in em s A value of 0 uses the font s automatic kerning Use a positive value to increase the spacing or a negative value to decrease the spacing Paint Shop Pro uses the Kerning value only when you clear the Auto Kern check box Leading The vertical space between lines of text measured in em s Use a positive value to increase the spacing or a negative value to decrease the spacing Note When creating text on a path or a shape use positive values to position the text below the path and negative values to position the text above the path To move or position vector text on a layer use the Object Selection tool To move raster text use a selection tool like the Magic Wand tool to select and move it To move vector text 1 On the Tools toolbar click the Object Selection tool fell 2 Select the text you want to move A bounding box surrounds the text 3 Move the cursor inside the bounding box the cursor changes to iaa 4 Click and drag the text anywhere within the image To move raster text 1 On the Tools toolbar select one of the Selection tools For details see Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Select the text you want to move 3 Move the cursor inside the selection marquee the cursor changes to A 4 Click and drag the text anywhere within the image 308 Chapter 13
130. to change an image s size In addition to resizing an image you can also change the image size by changing the canvas size cropping the image or printing ata different size m Resizing the image removes pixels to make it smaller or adds pixels to make it larger m Increasing the canvas size adds pixels at the edge of the image Decreasing the canvas size hides pixels at the edges of the image full layer information is kept m Cropping an image deletes the pixels outside the selected crop area m Printing through Print Layout resizes the image for printing but the image file remains unchanged This is the best option if you want to print the image at various sizes Chapter 6 Editing Images 137 After scanning or importing an image you can adjust its size using Image gt Resize Pixels have no set physical size Each pixel just represents one area of a single color Resizing can reduce or increase the number of pixels in the image resampling the image This reduces or increases the file size For instructions see To increase or decrease the pixels in an image on page 137 Resolution is the number of pixels printed per inch More pixels per inch ppi will create smaller printed pixels and a smaller printed image Fewer ppi will create larger printed pixels and a larger printed image Resizing can also change the image s resolution leaving the number of pixels in an image and the file size unchang
131. tree to a child s hand to the jagged edge of a leaf To use the Freehand Selection tool 1 If the image has more than one layer click the layer on which you want to make a selection from the Layer palette 2 On the Tools toolbar choose the Freehand Selection tool F from the Selection tool flyout 3 On the Tool Options palette choose the Selection Type to determine how Paint Shop Pro makes the selection Edge Seeker Click on the edges of irregularly shaped areas and Paint Shop Pro finds the edges between two areas with subtle color or light changes between them Freehand Click and drag to select the area like making a freehand drawing Use this type for irregular shapes when you want to make a selection quickly Point to Point Click from point to point and Paint Shop Pro draws a straight border between the points Use this when you want a selection with straight edges Smart Edge Click along the edges of irregularly shaped areas and Paint Shop Pro finds the edges Use this selection to create a border between two areas of highly contrasting color or light 4 On the Tool Options palette choose from these additional options Feather A width in pixels 0 to 200 that the selection is faded along the edges Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection s edges For a detailed description see page 155 Range Specifies the distance 0 to 15 from the point you click that Paint Shop Pro searches for an edge This option
132. type click where you want the selection border to start and then continue clicking until you return near the starting point To complete the selection double click or right click To delete a previous point press Delete For all selection types the line becomes a marquee indicating the selection border 6 To modify the selection area do either of the following To add to the selection from the Mode drop down list choose Add or hold down the Shift key and click and drag another selection area To subtract from the selection from the Mode drop down list choose Remove or hold down the Ctrl key and click and drag within the original selection Note You can also switch to another selection tool before adding to or subtracting from the selection You can now edit the contents of the selection move it copy it paint in it correct colors apply effects etc The selection remains active until you make another selection or right click to deselect it or choose Selections gt Select None Select what you don t want Sometimes the easiest way to select a complicated part of an image is to select the part of the image that you don t want and then invert the selection For example if you have a picture of a tree silhouetted against a blue sky use the Magic Wand tool to select the sky and then invert the selection to Select the tree For more information see Selecting Everything Outside the Selection on p
133. undo the transparency of a color select No Transparency To make the background color transparent select Set the transparency value to the current background color m To assign a specific color to be transparent click the color on the image itself enter a value in the edit box of the Set the transparency value to a palette entry option or click the color box to select from the current color picker 4 To view the transparency on the image click the Proof button 5 Click OK The color is now transparent however it may still be displayed until you hide it To view or hide the transparency of a color Choose Image gt Palette gt View Palette Transparency 122 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials CHAPTER fi Editing Images Contents Edit your images in many ways copy from one image to another crop or resize an image flip mirror or rotate an image or change an image s scale or perspective Cutting COPYING and Pasting cs caaae ate eeee em adad eaters 124 Deleting IMAGES 4 oee aa rbed bees OHS EE hed eee EE oes 127 Usma UNG OR OOO sacrer rirsirerire ti tidi rihi pa ENKY 127 Repeating CommandS saaana aaa 129 Using Rulers Grids and Guides ce es 129 Cropping IMAC CS sa vy 48 oe ee re ee A PS 134 Resizing IMageS o 5 k ow wwe bbe eee aoe once oo ee ee Bee 137 Changing Canvas SiZ e aces 5 ead oh eS ae oe ric 139 Rotating IMAGES os cba aed eG4o ceed ceeds eee ee deed des 140 Scaling an
134. with Text 000 303 Creaine Text 2 405 25b04cdceees ec OE kee woes E 304 Formatting TORE 4 ne4s eee dosage cee ee es Be es eee eGo Se 306 Novine Terrane amea eea er oe ob eee eee oe 307 Edie Vex tac eben tereedtacettaeeekebe ante cuaceans 308 Scaling and Transforming Text 0 0 0 000 000 ee 309 Applying Effects to Text o2 6 466200400044 c4 i eicevds 309 Creating Text with Image Patterns 310 Creating Text on Object Paths 0 0 2 0005 310 Converting Text to Curves 0 0 0 eens 313 Contents V Chapter 14 Applying Effects 058 315 Choosing BCS 2s 2063 64 40nd 426566 68m eed oe e sb ces 316 Adding Noise s 6444446445468 66 06 865464 06486464444 85 321 Adding Picture Frames 2 0 0 00 0 eens 322 Mathematically Combining Two Images 323 Creating Your Own Effects 2 0 000 cee eee ees 325 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 327 Sending Images via E Mail 0 0 00 e eee 328 Uploading Images to a Photo Sharing Service 328 Previewing Images in a Web Browser 330 Mapping Images 0 eee eens 331 Creating Image Rollovers 0 0 000 cee eee ees 336 Slicing Images 6 i4 ee b Shou bud odo b4RES RS ORES eee SHS ES 337 Saving Images for the Web 0 00 eee eee 341 Using Digital Watermarks nannan anaana anae 351 Chapter 16 Print
135. you are prompted to promote it to a full layer Drag on the layer around the edges of the subject to erase the background area as follows To erase pixels drag with the left mouse button To erase a straight line click once at the beginning point then press Shift and click the end point To continue the straight line move to the next point and press Shift and click To restore erased pixels drag with the right mouse button Chapter 9 Painting 219 Cloning Parts of Images Original image and image after cloning Why does nothing happen when I apply the Clone Brush If nothing appears to be happening when you apply the Clone Brush make sure you selected a source area with data If the selected layer has no data at the source point but another layer does have data there it may appear that you selected a source area On the Layer palette click the name ofa raster layer before you define the source area Also make Sure the layer doesn t have a selection or if it does make sure you right click within the selection The Clone Brush tool is a fun and powerful way to edit your images by using parts of an image as a paint source You can remove elements within your image by painting over them with another part of the image The paint source can be part of the same layer another layer in the image a merged image or a layer from another image To use the Clone Brush 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the C
136. 03 Add any of Paint Shop Pro s many picture frames as a separate layer on your image Choose from square or oval frames modern or classic styles stained glass or metal or a variety of other styles Note m This effect works on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 To add a picture frame 1 Choose Image gt Picture Frame to open the Picture Frame dialog 2 Select a frame from the drop down list 3 If the frame has transparent areas for example round or oval frames in the Transparency color group box choose your options To have the transparent areas remain transparent mark the Keep Transparent check box To use acolor for transparency areas clear the Keep Transparent check box and click the color box to select a color 4 In the Orientation group box select the frame placement Frame inside of the image or Frame outside of the image If you select an inside frame Paint Shop Pro resizes the frame to fit within the image canvas If you select an outside frame Paint Shop Pro increases the canvas size to accommodate the frame The added canvas uses the current background color However the area will be transparent if it is a layer and you mark the Keep Transparent check box 5 Choose an orientation option Flip frame reverse the frame along its horizontal axis Mirror frame reverse the frame along its vertical axis or Rotate frame 90 CW
137. 2 A new rectangular selection surrounds the current selection 5 To modify the selection borders do any of the following To add to the selection from the Mode drop down list choose Add or hold down the Shift key and click and drag another selection area it does not need to be part of the original selection To subtract from the selection from the Mode drop down list choose Remove or hold down the Ctrl key and click and drag within the original selection To move the selection marque choose the Mover tool and right click and drag within the selection Note You can also switch to another selection tool before adding to or subtracting from the selection You can now edit the contents of the selection move it copy it paint it correct colors apply effects and so on The selection remains active until you make another selection or right click to deselect it while one of the selection tools is active or choose Selections gt Select None Select the layer first Before you make a selection display the Layer palette and click the name of the layer that contains the data you want to select Using the Edge Seeker selection type Using the Freehand selection type Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 157 Making Selections with the Freehand Selection Tool With the Freehand Selection tool you can select objects with irregular borders Use this tool to select everything from the outline of a
138. 25 Tube name Enter the file name of the tube The extension PspTube is automatically added to the file name Note By default picture tube files are stored in the Picture Tubes folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder For information on changing this location see Setting File Locations on page 403 Click OK The picture tube is saved Close the image file To edit it later save it as a PspImage or other format file CHAPTER Wi Drawing and Editing Objects Contents Use Paint Shop Pro drawing tools to create objects in a variety of styles Draw anything from simple lines and shapes to complex illustrations POOULOD CC 244 caaeeadae de rE REEE EEE oe ane ees 228 Drawing Objects oa dcr pe bed ort hnos hed waen eeeeareeds 229 Creating New PresetShapes ccc cee cee eee 234 Creating Custom Line Styles 0 ccc ee 235 Editing Vector Object Properties cc cee ees 237 Aligning and Arranging Vector Objects 0 0 cee 239 Resizing and Reshaping Vector Objects cc eee 243 Editing Paths and Contours 24 5 cea wade hw ere eee eee cas 245 Adding and Closing Contours ce cee ee ee ee 246 PGIUNG NOGCS oe eetan iEn sana oe ara eee aa eee 251 227 228 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects About Objects For more about Raster vs Vector Objects For overview information on vector and raster data see About Raster and Vector Graphics on page 32 An object
139. 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 33 Choosing Raster or Vector In Paint Shop Pro you create and edit raster and vector data on separate layers With some tools you create raster data like brush strokes with the Paint tool and with other tools like the Text and Preset Shapes tools you can choose whether you want to create raster or vector data In general use vector objects when you ll need to edit the object as an element separate from other parts of the image For example if you add a star to an image you may want to change its size color or location This is easier if the star is a vector object You can create raster data on separate layers so you can easily edit or move them To apply tools or commands to vector objects that work only on raster data such as the painting tools or the effects commands you can create a raster selection of a vector object Then paste the selection to a new raster layer About Image Size Resolution and Color Depth Before you create a new image think about how you will use it For example will you display the image on a Web site send it asan e mail attachment or print it How you use the image helps you determine the image s size resolution and color depth All three elements also contribute to the file size of the image Image Size The physical dimensions of the image In Paint Shop Pro you define image height and width in pixels inches or centimeters For printed image
140. 3 Click OK Using Custom Workspaces The Paint Shop Pro workspace is made up of all the program s palettes toolbars and open images You may find that the way you arrange the workspace while editing photos may differ from your arrangement for using the Web tools Fortunately Paint Shop Pro allows you to save any number of workspace arrangements allowing you to load the specific workspace that best suits the work you intend to do Paint Shop Pro also contains sample workspaces such as one that duplicates the Paint Shop Pro 7 workspace 402 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Saving Workspaces When you save a workspace Paint Shop Pro saves the information in a PspWorkspace file The following information is stored Ruler grid and guide information Menu palette and toolbar settings locations and docking status Browser window position if open Full screen edit mode status Open images including the images zoom levels and scroll bar locations Note Workspace files do not include an actual copy of any open images Workspace files only reference the name and location of an image If you delete an image from your computer it will not display in a workspace To save the current workspace 1 2 Choose File gt Workspace gt Save or press Shift Alt S to open the Save Workspace dialog To save the workspace in a folder other than the program default folder click Edit Paths For information on editing
141. 7 and then re name the files with the TUB extension To paint with a picture tube 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Picture Tube tool K Changing default values for picture tubes To change default values for a picture tube including the placement mode step size and selection mode click the Settings icon on the Tool Options palette You can also change the number of cells in the picture tube After you change values mark the Save as Default for this Picture Tube check box and click OK Color depth and layers This tool works only on raster layers in greyscale and 16 million color images To convert a vector layer to a raster layer choose Layers gt Convert to Raster Layer To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Chapter 9 Painting 225 2 On the Tool Options palette click the Picture Tube drop down window and select a picture tube Note Most picture tube previews show one image rather than all images in the picture tube To view all images paint with the picture tube or open the PspTube file with the Browser 3 If necessary adjust the following options Scale The percentage 10 to 250 to reduce or enlarge each image in the picture tube and scale the step Step The distance in pixels 1 to 500 between the centers of each picture tube image that you paint Placement mode The way images are placed Continuous evenly spaced by step size or Random random spacing between pixel and t
142. After Ctrl F To curve the segment before or after a node choose Curve Before Ctrl 1 or Curve After Ctrl 2 m Right click the node and choose a Node Type from the context menu 3 Make a selection Note You can also access these commands by choosing Objects gt Node Type To straighten a curve between two nodes 1 Select two consecutive nodes 2 Right click one node and choose Node Type gt Convert to Line from the context menu Adding or Removing Nodes on a Contour To create more options for editing the shape of a vector object add delete or merge nodes anywhere along the path of a vector object Adding Nodes You can add nodes in all three modes of the Pen tool To add nodes on a contour Drawing and Edit Modes 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode e 3 Click the contour you want modify 4 Press and hold Ctrl as you move the cursor over the contour to where you want to add a node The cursor displays ADD Adding nodes in Knife Mode Click and drag to add nodes After Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 255 5 While continuing to press Ctrl click the line A symmetric node is added To add nodes on a contour Knife Mode 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select Knife Mode 2 3 Click the contour you want modify 4 Press and hold Ctrl The cursor changes from CUT
143. Color Picker 395 Windows palette 116 Index 437 WMF file format preferences 411 Workspaces about 401 deleting 403 loading 403 saving 402 Z Zoom tool 22 438 Index
144. DMa Sesio nnns keea Pods das a ood coos 20 Viewing Image Information 0 0 00 c eee eee 24 Working with Dialogs 0 0 0 eens 25 Using Shortcut and Function Keys 2008 28 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 29 Opening Existing Images 0 0 00 30 Creating Mapes 6 64 60254045 640 bet otab ede dedent soe chs 32 Importing Images from Digital Cameras and Scanners 38 Capturing Images from the Computer Screen 41 Using the Paint Shop Pro Browser 0 0000 43 Saving Image Piles s24 lt 4 coecue Suge dened en ee ea eed ds 47 ii Contents Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Improving Photographs 51 Basic Steps in Improving Photographs 32 How to Approach Color Contrast and Saturation Adjustments 53 Improving Colors 0 0 0c ee eee eee 54 Improving Contrast 0 20 cee eee eee 60 Improving Saturation 0 0 cece eee eee 61 Removing Source Defects 0 0 0 0 cee eee 62 Removing Image Defects and Noise 05 65 Correcting Image Distortions 0 0 0 0 eee eee 69 Retouching Photographs 0 0 0 cece eee eens l2 Improving Image Clarity 2 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 79 Working with Colors and Materials 81 Using the Materials Palette 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee 82 Understanding Color and Color Models 103 How Monitor and Print Color
145. Do one of the following m Choose the name of a profile from the Current Profile drop down list and click New This will base the new profile on the settings of the selected profile m Click New This will base the new profile on the program s defaults The New CMYK Profile dialog will open Type a name for the new profile in the Enter profile name field Choose the initial setting Reset to defaults Base the new profile on the program s defaults Use current settings Base the new profile on the settings in the current profile Click OK remove a profile Choose File gt Preferences gt CMYK Conversion Preferences to open the CMYK Conversion Preferences dialog Choose the name of the profile from the Current Profile drop down list Click OK Chapter 16 Printing Images 373 Modifying a CMYK Profile Use the tabs on the CMYK Profile dialog to configure the CMYK black generation transfer and components and to adjust the for color shifts To open the CMYK Profile dialog 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt CMYK Conversion Preferences to open the CMYK Conversion Preferences dialog 2 Choose the name of the profile from the Current Profile drop down list 3 Click Modify to open the CMYK Profile dialog Note Clicking Default in any of the profile tabs will reset the tab to the program s default settings To configure the Black Generation tab 1 In the CMYK Profile dialog click the Black Generation tab
146. EG images 63 images automatically arranging in layouts 361 combining 151 323 mapping 331 positioning in layouts 362 slicing 337 importing images from a digital camera or scanner 38 using TWAIN 40 installing 6 Invert command 200 inverting masks 295 selections 167 J Jasc Color Picker 86 Basic Colors panel 87 color wheel 87 displaying the 87 joining contours 248 joining types of corners for vector objects 230 JPEG images removing artifacts in 63 JPEG optimizer settings 346 K Kerning 307 Keyboard Map command 417 L Layer palette displaying 266 highlighting icons 278 using 265 viewing layer content 266 Layers about 260 adding new 267 Adjustment layers 261 283 Background layers 262 Blend modes 274 Blend ranges 277 changing opacity 274 copying to another image 269 creating from selections 269 deleting 282 duplicating 268 editing properties 270 grouping 271 highlight colors 278 layer groups 266 Layer palette using 265 linking layers and groups 272 Load Save Mask Load Mask From Alpha Channel 300 Lock Transparency setting 278 Mask layers 261 Matting commands 282 merging 280 modifying 279 moving vector objects 279 promoting Background layers 268 Raster layers 261 renaming 270 selecting 266 stacking order 279 unlinking layers and groups 273 using Move tool 280 using with illustrations 264 using with photos 263 Vector layers 262 vi
147. Given all the factors that go into producing colors how do you go about making colors accurate and consistent Try these options Calibrate your monitor every few months See Calibrating Your Monitor on page 418 Get to know the typical differences between your monitor s colors and your printer s colors so that you can adjust your images as needed Print out several photographs or other images and compare them to the screen Are there typical results For example your printer may always print colors darker than your monitor displays them Knowing this you can modify the lightness of your images accordingly Consider using Windows Color Management which helps to improve color consistency across devices See Adjusting Monitor Display Options on page 418 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 107 Working with Color Channels Does it matter what color model is selected No You can split images into RGB HSL or CMYK color channels regardless of the type of color model RGB or HSL you chose as a display preference Color channels are planes of color This RGB image has three channels red green and blue Creative ideas for color channels Here are a few of the things you can do with color channels m Create a color shift by splitting an image into HSL channels modifying the Hue channel then combining the channels m Use a channel greyscale to create a selection Image files stor
148. Image Effects and select an effect Note m These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Applying Reflection Effects The reflection effects include such effects as creating a kaleidoscope or an intricate pattern To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Reflection Effects and select an effect Note These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Chapter 14 Applying Effects 321 Applying Texture Effects The texture effects turn images into a variety of textures such as Example of a Texture effect leather mosaic tiles and polished stone To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Texture Effects and select an effect Note m These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Adding Noise Use
149. NG files 350 TWAIN 38 U Undo command 127 unfeathering selections 170 ungroup 240 Unsharp Mask command 80 user colors defining 56 user defined effects 325 using Autosave 47 Help 8 Web resources 10 V vector objects align 241 anatomy 229 arrange 242 converting to raster 164 deleting 237 distort 243 distribute 241 distribute on canvas 242 editing 237 grouping 240 make same size 244 perspective 243 position on canvas 242 properties fill 238 name 238 stroke 238 visibility 238 resize and reshape 243 rotate 244 selecting 161 shear 243 ungroup 240 vector text 305 moving 307 video images fixing line problems 62 viewing creator information 24 EXIF information 24 image information 24 viewing images 20 arranging multiple 20 closing image 21 fit to window 21 moving an image window 20 multiple images 20 panning 21 resizing an image window 20 zooming 22 W Warning messages 398 Warp brush 215 warp modes 215 warping images 147 Watermarks embedding 352 reading 354 Web Learning Center 8 news groups 8 resources 10 Web browser adding a browser 407 deleting or editing a browser 407 previewing an image in 330 Web image Mapping 331 previewing in browsers 330 slicing 337 Web safe color palette 119 Web safe colors 88 WIA 38 Window menu Duplicate 36 Windows Color Management Interaction with monitor gamma 419 Windows
150. Opaque Chooses only areas containing pixels No transparent areas are selected Opacity Chooses pixels based on their opacity 4 On the Tool Options palette choose from these additional options Tolerance Controls how closely the selected pixels must match the initial pixel you click At low settings the values must be close At higher settings the Magic Wand tool selects a wider range of pixels 160 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images Feather A width in pixels 0 to 200 that the selection is faded along the edges Feathering controls the sharpness of a selection s edges For a detailed description see page 155 Sample Merged Mark this check box to have the Magic Wand tool search for matching pixels in the merged image Clear this check box to limit the selection to the active layer Anti alias Mark this check box and then choose whether you want to anti alias inside or outside of the selection marquee 5 Click the part of the image that has pixels you want to match The selection marquee surrounds all matching pixels If the Magic Wand tool selected more pixels or fewer pixels than you wanted adjust the Tolerance value and make a new selection 6 To modify the selection from the Mode drop down list choose m Replace to replace an existing selection with a new selection m Add to add to the selection click another area of the image Remove to subtract from the selection click within the original selection to r
151. Preferences Paint Shop Pro can read PostScript files including multi page files through level 2 and open them as raster images When converting Paint Shop Pro can anti alias objects and retain transparency information To set PostScript file import preferences 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Format Preferences to open the File Format Preferences dialog 2 Click the PostScript tab 3 Choose a prompt setting Prompt for size and options each time a PostScript file is opened When you mark this check box Paint Shop Pro will ask you to choose settings for each PostScript file you open Clear this check box to use the Size and Options when not prompting settings for all opened PostScript files Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 411 4 If necessary choose non prompting options Resolution Set the resolution for the converted raster image Image mode Select a mode from the drop down list Page Size Select a page size from the drop down list By default if a PostScript file has a bounding box the program will match the canvas size to the bounding box Landscape Mark this check box to switch the page orientation to landscape The default is portrait This option does not rotate your images only use this option for landscape PostScript files Anti aliasing Mark this box to anti alias PostScript objects as they are converted to raster images Render transparency Clear this check box to use a white background inste
152. Pro s colors gradients patterns and textures To choose a color from the Available Colors panel 1 On the Materials palette click the Colors tab E 2 Move the cursor over the Available Colors panel A ToolTip displays the color value 3 Do one of the following To choose the foreground color left click in the Available Colors panel To choose the background color right click in the Available Colors panel The Foreground or Background Color box displays the selected color If the Style button is set to Gradient 9 or Pattern P change it to Color so that the material is updated with the color To apply the current materials to all tools On the Materials palette mark the All tools check box If you clear this check box the current materials are applied to the active tool only To reverse the foreground and background colors Click the Swap Colors icon gt To reverse the foreground and background materials Click the Swap Materials icon E 86 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials The Jasc Color Picker 7 R G B Li 20 ae nk colors d Color D Gradient 4 Pattern P a HTML Color wheel S aturation Lightness box Basic Colors panel Choosing Colors When you edit images in Paint Shop Pro you often need to choose a color before you paint when making manual color corrections or when choosing a background for a new image You choose
153. Reducing or Removing Colors cee ee ees 198 Using the Histogram to Analyze Images 0000 201 1181 182 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Key Points to Know Before Making Corrections All the Paint Shop Pro correction command dialogs have common ways of adjusting color and lightness Keep the following key things in mind Lightness levels are specified in a scale from zero no light black to 255 100 light white Image files store their color information in channels or planes of color A color channel specifies the amount of a certain color in each pixel of the image Many correction dialogs let you to edit the red green and blue channels The histogram also displays the hue saturation lightness and greyscale channels Colors are specified on a scale from zero no color to 255 100 of the color Hue settings are displayed on a color wheel or they use values that represent positions on the color wheel For a visual representation look at the Jasc Color Picker Although actual hue values range from 0 to 255 some correction dialogs use degrees to represent hues on the color wheel from 0 to 359 degrees counter clockwise starting at the top When you first open a correction dialog reset the settings by choosing Default in the Presets drop down list Otherwise the dialog uses the settings from the previous correction If there s an adjustment layer available for a correction comma
154. Saturation Limit Choose which option you want to limit for the Dodge and Burn tools None Shadows Midtones or Highlights 4 Drag in the image to apply the brush If the brush has two functions such as Hue Up Down drag with the left mouse to apply the first function and drag with the right mouse button to apply the second function 222 Chapter 9 Painting Filling Areas with Colors Gradients Patterns or Textures What are contiguous pixels Contiguous means near next or adjacent Contiguous pixels are like continuous chains of matching pixels radiating from the initial pixel you click When the Flood Fill tool finds a pixel that doesn t match it breaks the chain Even if a pixel is just one pixel away from a matching pixel it is discontiguous Flood Fill versus Color Replacer Because the Flood Fill tool can fill pixels that match certain criteria such as RGB value its effect is similar to the Color Replacer tool Here are the differences m The Flood Fill tool fills matching pixels that are contiguous to the initial pixel you click The Color Replacer changes pixels either within its brush stroke or in the entire layer m The Color Replacer tool changes colors based on their RGB value The Flood Fill tool changes pixels based on RGB hue brightness or opacity values Use the Flood Fill tool to fill a selection or a layer with the foreground or background color and material You can fill a
155. TOUCHING Photographs a 26d wae aa Pad oe we So oh ee He 72 Improving Image ChAT ox ee edook non We eae a wea ee ee owe 4 19 52 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Basic Steps in Improving Photographs Paint Shop Pro contains many features you can use to enhance your photos Whenever you work on photos you should follow the same basic steps in a specific order to get the best results This is necessary because some later actions remove image data that is needed to successfully complete earlier steps Analyzing images using the histogram For image editing professionals the histogram and its accompanying adjustment features are powerful tools for understanding and correcting images especially those with contrast or brightness problems For casual users getting familiar with the histogram may not be necessary because Paint Shop Pro offers many simpler ways to adjust images For information about using the histogram to analyze your photos see Using the Histogram to Analyze Images on page 201 To improve photographs 1 Calibrate your monitor to ensure that screen and print images match as closely as possible and that colors are consistent from image to image For more information see Calibrating Your Monitor on page 418 Improve colors contrast and saturation Use Paint Shop Pro s automatic adjustment commands or use the manual adjustments to make initial corrections to your images See How to Appr
156. The view reduces to the previous preset percentage with each click down to a minimum magnification of 1 Choose the Zoom tool or the Pan tool and then in the Tool Options palette select a zoom percentage or click the Zoom Out By 1 Step or Zoom Out by 5 Steps buttons Choose View gt Zoom Out By 1 Step to reduce the view to the next preset percentage Choose View gt Zoom Out by 5 Steps to reduce the view by five preset percentages Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 23 To magnify a specific area 1 Choose View gt Magnifier or press Ctrl Alt M to display the magnifier 2 Click and drag over the part of the image you want to magnify The selected area is displayed at the highest percentage that will fit within the window Previewing and Editing Using the Full Screen a Use the Full Screen Preview command to preview an image without Previewing on the full screen any of the menus toolbars or palettes visible Use the Full Screen Edit command to expand the entire workspace giving you the largest possible space for displaying and editing images The palettes and toolbars are visible but the menus Paint Shop Pro title bar and Status bar are hidden To preview an image on the full screen 1 Choose View gt Full Screen Preview or press Ctrl Shift A The workspace disappears and the image displays at its current magnification 2 To return to the Paint Shop Pro workspace press any key To edit using th
157. To save a mask to an alpha channel 1 On the Layer palette click the name of the mask layer 2 Choose Layers gt Load Save Mask gt Save Mask To Alpha Channel to open the Save Mask to Alpha dialog The Add to document drop down list displays all open documents and below it are the alpha channels in the image if any 3 To save a mask to an image s alpha channel select the image name in the Add to document drop down list The image must be open in Paint Shop Pro 4 To edit the default name for the new alpha channel type a new name in the Name field 5 Click Save Once you have saved a mask to a hard disk or a removable disk you can load the mask into images without opening the original image Loading Masks from Disk Load a mask file that you have saved or load one of the sample masks that come with Paint Shop Pro Mask files have a PspMask extension Use the Layers gt Load Mask gt From Disk command to load mask files or load image files as masks To load a mask from disk 1 On the Layer palette click the layer you want to mask 2 Choose Layers gt Load Save Masks gt Load Mask From Disk to open the Load Mask From Disk dialog The Mask group box shows all masks in all directories listed in your file locations for masks To change the default directory click the Edit Paths button For more information see Setting File Locations on page 403 Chapter 12 Working with Masks 299 3 In the Mask group box
158. Web Safe Color Palette Paint Shop Pro includes a Safety palette with 256 colors that are Web safe your images can be viewed without color distortion on most computer monitors There are three ways to use this palette on an image To Aa Gd poe e 5 Load the Safety palette into your image For 16 million color 24 bit images this flattens the layers reduces the image s color depth to 256 colors 8 bit and makes many of Paint Shop Pro s effect and correction commands unavailable Decrease the image s color depth to 256 colors and select the Standard Web Safe Palette option Decreasing the color depth also flattens layers and makes some Paint Shop Pro commands unavailable For more information see Decreasing Color Depth to 256 Colors 8 Bit on page 113 Edit the image in 16 million colors saving it in PspImage format then use the GIF or PNG optimizer to export a copy of the image These optimizers use the Web safe palette by default and decrease the color depth in the saved image We recommend this alternative because it does not change the color depth or flatten the layers of your original PspImage file and keeps all Paint Shop Pro effect and commands available For more information see Saving Images for the Web on page 341 load the Web safe color palette Choose Image gt Palette gt Load Palette Select the Palettes folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder Select the palette Safety pal In
159. a command To display all default shortcut keys choose Help gt Keyboard Map oz CHAPTER Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Contents You can get images into Paint Shop Pro in a variety of ways import images from a digital camera card reader or scanner capture images from the computer screen duplicate an existing image or layer or create a new raster or vector image Opening Existing Images ccc ns 30 Credting IMG0CS s aack frauds obs Obes Cae Ade oe ae 32 Importing Images from Digital Cameras and Scanners 38 Capturing Images from the Computer Screen 00 00s 41 Using the Paint Shop Pro BrowSer 0c aaa 43 Saving Image Files uuaa aaa 4 29 30 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Opening Existing Images From open to browse While opening a file from the Open dialog you may decide you want to preview all files in a folder Click the Browse button to open the Browser You can open images in a variety of file formats The list of formats you can open in Paint Shop Pro appears in the Open dialog You can select which formats Paint Shop Pro displays as available to open See Setting File Format Associations on page 407 You can open a file using the Open dialog or the Browser or by choosing a recently used file from the File gt Recent Files menu With the Open dialog you can view a preview of each image file that you select With the Browser yo
160. ablet being used 4 Set the Jitter for each available option The higher the value the more randomly the option is applied 5 For the Fade rate pixels select the number of pixels over which the fade in and fade out will occur Lower values produce a faster fade while higher values produce a slower fade 6 For the Position Jitter select a percentage for randomly adjusting the brush impression location Mark the Scale check box if you want the jitter to scale with the brush size 7 For Impressions per step indicate how many brush impressions are made per step of the brush stroke Using Brush Presets Use the tool Presets to save creative brush effects You can choose from many artistic presets or create save and share your own Brush Presets work just like other tool Presets To reset brush options to their default values on the Tool Options palette click the Presets drop down window and click the Reset to Default button 2 For more information on presets see Using and Creating Presets on page 386 Saving and Sharing Brush Presets Once you create a Preset for a brush you can save it in the Brushes folder in the Paint Shop Pro program folder You can then share your brush Presets with others by sending them the brush file If the brush uses a custom shape you will have to share both the brush file and the custom shape file for that brush 214 Chapter 9 Painting Brush tips versus tool Presets When yo
161. active window whenever you move objects in the image Show splash screen when application starts Clear this option to hide the Jasc Software Inc splash screen which appears at program startup Disable pressure support for puck type pointing devices Mark this check box to turn off the pressure sensitive features of puck type pointing devices included with graphics tablets Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 401 Resetting Application Preferences Various program preferences can be reverted back to their defaults To reset application preferences 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt Reset Preferences to open the Reset the Application dialog 2 Select from these choices Reset file locations Mark this check box to reset all file location settings to the program defaults Reset workspace to default configuration Mark this check box to reset the current workspace to the program defaults Reset dialog positions and last used settings When you mark this check box any dialogs that open will appear in their default locations Also Paint Shop Pro will forget the last settings you used in all dialogs Delete all cache files Mark this check box to delete reset all existing cache files Paint Shop Pro saves cache files on your computer to improve program performance Cache files can become corrupted by computer errors Make all toolbars palettes visible and on screen Mark this check box to view all toolbars and palettes
162. ad of the default transparent background Setting RAW File Preferences Paint Shop Pro can read and save RAW image formats To set RAW file preferences 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Format Preferences to open the File Format Preferences dialog Click the RAW tab Set the Save options Header size Sets header size of the file Flip top and bottom Mark this box to flip the image upside down Set the 24 bit options RGB order or BGR order Choose the color order Planar mode Clear this box to turn off planar mode Setting Metafile Preferences Windows Meta File WMF is the Microsoft Windows native vector format 1 To set WMF image preferences Choose File gt Preferences gt File Format Preferences to open the File Format Preferences dialog 412 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 2 Click the Metafile Import tab 3 Choose from the two Load options Prompt for size and options each time a file is opened When you choose this option Paint Shop Pro will ask you to choose settings for each WME image you open Use file header information when available Some WMF files have a file header containing default size information Choose this option to use the file header default size if available If you open a file without a header the size defaults to the values you type in the Default size when file header is not available group box 4 Choose the following options Import vector data Mark this
163. age Deleting Saved Workspaces To delete a saved workspace 1 Choose File gt Workspace gt Delete or press Shift Alt D to open the Workspace dialog 2 Select the workspace file you want to delete 3 Click Delete Setting File Locations Paint Shop Pro saves and searches for items in several default folders on your computer By changing File Locations preferences you can change where Paint Shop Pro looks for and saves important items You can also control how plug ins are used and which Web browsers are used to preview your images 404 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Edit Paths another way to view file locations You can open the File Locations dialog by clicking the Edit Paths button which appears in many Paint Shop Pro dialogs Note By default all new files you create are saved in the appropriate folder of the My Paint Shop Pro 8 Files folder in your My Documents folder Most default program files are stored in the appropriate folder in the Paint Shop Pro 8 program folder Editing File Locations The File Locations dialog controls where Paint Shop Pro looks for and saves important files Changing File Locations You can change where Paint Shop Pro to stores and retrieves specific items To change file locations 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog 2 From the File types list select the file type that you want to change file locations for
164. age 154 Painting with the Paint Brush or Airbrush 0 0 eee 208 Creating Brush T10S 6s a0 edou teense oneedeb ee rderneks 209 Setting Brush and Paint Options cece ee 211 Warping MAGGS v2 4 4402 oaae oe Gale bo owed ene thes 215 SC ea rE ee ee ee 216 Cloning Parts of IMAGES aia tow a ewe ate wwe ch ee ea 219 Retouching IMageS o c 540604040 eek Coad Oe ee 220 Filling Areas with Colors Gradients Patterns or Textures 222 Replacing COIS 4 ce kieee ded teen eyes eee eee ees 223 Painting with FPict re TUDES c4 acz gate on amp eee eae em aoc ane ak 224 207 208 Chapter 9 Painting Painting with the Paint Brush or Airbrush Transparent painting If you want a transparent paint brush use the Eraser or Background Eraser tool These tools erase pixels to transparency on raster layers For more information see Erasing on page 216 Painting with the Paint Brush and the Airbrush Y Default brush options To reset brush options to their default values on the Tool Options palette click the Presets drop down window and click the Reset to Defaults button The Paint Brush and the Airbrush tools work in similar ways Both create strokes of color in a selection or an image and have a variety of options for changing the brush stroke The Paint Brush tool creates strokes of color that simulates an artist s paint brush Brush strokes can have hard or soft edges The Airbrush simulates
165. age 167 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 159 Making Selections with the Magic Wand Tool Use the Magic Wand tool to select content rather than defining edges in the image It works well for selecting a complex part of an image that has distinctly different pixels from other parts for example a pink rose surrounded by green leaves The tool uses four types of values for making selections color RGB value hue brightness or opacity With the Magic Wand you select the type of match you want such as hue choose a tolerance that determines how closely pixels must match and then click once in the image to select the pixel that the other pixels are compared to To use the Magic Wand tool 1 If the image has more than one layer on the Layer palette click the layer name which contains the part of the image you want to select 2 On the Tools toolbar choose the Magic Wand tool from the Selection tool flyout 3 On the Tool Options palette choose the Match mode to determine how Paint Shop Pro creates the selection None Chooses all pixels RGB Value Chooses pixels that match the red green and blue value of the color that you select in the image Color Chooses pixels of the same color that you select in the image Hue Chooses pixels based on the position in the color wheel of the hues you select within the image Brightness Chooses pixels based on the brightness of the color you select within the image All
166. aint Shop Pro centers the image within the cell and scales the image to fit the cell To change the default placement method see In the Template options group box on page 364 10 Choose a cell placement method from the Print Layout window toolbar or from Image gt Placement Note You can select the image placement method of a cell before or after you place an image Free format Allows you to freely resize and position the image in the cell Size and Center G The image size is not changed to match the cell You can resize the image and the image will always stay centered in the cell Fill Cell with the image G Centers the image in the cell and scales the image to fill the cell The image aspect ratio is maintained but parts of the image may not be visible 368 Chapter 16 Printing Images Placing images from the thumbnail list To control how Paint Shop Pro places an image when you drag it from the thumbnail list change the template options For more information see In the Template options group box on page 364 Fit and center Scales the image to fit entirely inside the cell and centers the image in the cell The image aspect ratio is maintained Fit and adjust left Ol Scales the image to fit entirely inside the cell and aligns the image to the left side of the cell The image aspect ratio 1s maintained Fit and adjust right O Scales the image to fit entirely inside the cell and aligns the image
167. all the color channels in both images This will produce a 24 bit image Select a specific color channel for each image to produce a greyscale image 324 Chapter 14 Applying Effects 6 Set the Modifiers The modifiers are applied to the color values produced by the Formula and the Channel selections The Divisor number is used to divide the color values It can reduce the effects of the other selections The Bias number shifts each color value by a fixed amount The number is added to the color value produced by the Formula Channel and Divisor selections 7 Mark or clear the Clip color values check box to determine how Paint Shop Pro handles final color values greater than 255 and less than Q Check box If value is less If Value is more Setting than 0 than 0 Selected value 0 value 255 Cleared value 256 value value value 256 8 Click OK Chapter 14 Applying Effects 325 Creating Your Own Effects To create your own effects also called filters use the User Defined command To create your own effects An easy way to create your own effects 1 Choose Effects gt User Defined to open the User Defined Filter On the User Defined Filter dialog eee click the Randomize button fa to The edit boxes in the Filter matrix group box show coefficients automatically adjust the that process pixels to create the effect coefficients and create unusual effects ust keep clicking the 2 In the Presets drop d
168. alue or drag the slider The default setting is 6500K which gives the effect of a photo taken in typical daylight Photos taken indoors tend to look more orange while photos taken in bright sunlight tend to look more blue Adjust the value to achieve the desired effect or until the colors look natural If colors do not improve you may not need to make this adjustment 6 Click OK Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 55 Using Source and Target Colors to Correct Colors Manually When it is particularly important to get a certain color right use the Manual Color Correction command Select a color in the image that needs to be corrected the source color and then select the color you want it to be the target color For the target color choose from preset color options a specific color or a color from another image Paint Shop Pro then adjusts all colors in the selection or image based on the shift from the source color to the target color Use this command when the image has skin tones that need to be corrected or when you want to get a specific color exactly right This adjustment also works well for images with grossly incorrect colors You can apply the command to a selection or an entire image To use the Manual Color Correction dialog 1 Choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Manual Color Correction 2 In the right preview window center the area with the source color Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview wind
169. an airbrush or spray can and is time dependent meaning the longer you hold the brush over an area the more the brush produces the effect To use the Paint Brush or Air Brush On the Tools toolbar choose the tool Paint Brush A or Airbrush EA One tool may be hidden under the other Choose the foreground and background colors and materials See Basics of Using the Materials palette on page 84 On the Tool Options palette choose a shape round e or square m For information on creating your own brush tips see Creating Brush Tips on page 209 Note To create rectangular elliptical or angled brush tips start with the round or square shape and modify it using the Thickness and Rotation options Specify the brush options such as size opacity hardness thickness and rotation See Setting Brush and Paint Options on page 211 5 For the Airbrush in the Rate edit box select the rate at which the brush applies paint from 0 to 50 Use a value of 0 if want to apply a consistent amount of paint Use higher values if you want more paint applied when you drag the mouse slowly or pause the mouse For the Paint Brush set the following options Continuous Stroke Specifies whether paint builds up as you apply multiple strokes of less than 100 opacity over the same area If this check box is marked paint maintains a continuous color and repainting an area has no effect If this check box is cleared the de
170. an the default Brushes folder click the Edit Paths button For more information on changing file locations see Setting File Locations on page 403 In the Name field type a name for the brush tip 210 Chapter 9 Painting Importing Brush Tips To import custom brush tips choose File gt Import gt Custom Brush to open the Open dialog Select the location of the brush tip and click OK to import the custom brush tip To co N OQO OI Complete the Author Copyright and Description fields Mark the Save Variance check box to save the brush variance settings with the brush tip Click OK You can now use the brush tip with one of the painting tools create a brush tip from a selection Make a selection of the area you want to convert into a custom brush The selection must be on a raster layer For more information on selections see Using the Selection Tools on page 154 On the Tools toolbar choose a painting tool such as the Paint Brush Airbrush or Color Replacer On the Tool Options palette click the Brush Tip drop down window Current brush tips are displayed Click the Create Brush Tip from Selection button 4 or choose File gt Export gt Brush Tip A preview of the new brush appears in the Create Brush Tip dialog Note To save the new brush in a folder other than the default Brushes folder click the Edit Paths button For more information on changing file locations see
171. aneously choose Master To edit a specific color range choose Reds Yellows Greens Cyans Blues or Magentas The color rings represent the colors in the image The outer ring represents the original values and the inner ring represents the adjusted values If you choose a specific color range to edit a control ring is added between the inner and outer rings where you can change the color range that you adjust To turn the image into a duotone two color image mark the Colorize check box The image turns into a greyscale image if you have previews or proofing on You can now select a hue and adjust the saturation and lightness values to colorize the image Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 187 5 If you are editing a specific color range rather than the Master mode you can change the color range that you adjust using the control ring To set the range width drag the two outer points on the control ring which mark the beginning and end of the adjustment area To change where the adjustment builds to full effect drag the two inner bars In the area between the two inner bars the adjustment is in full effect To move the adjustment area drag the white circle 6 To change the hue drag the Hue slider until the colors appear as you want them You can also type a value in the Hue edit box The hue value is not on the typical hue scale of 0 to 255 Instead the value is the number of degrees of rotation
172. ange associations at any time by choosing the File gt Preferences gt File Format Associations menu commands For more information see Setting File Format Associations on page 407 To exit paint Shop Pro Click the close button in the upper right hand corner of the program window Click the Paint Shop Pro icon in the upper left hand corner of the title bar and choose Close Note If you have any images that need to be saved Paint Shop Pro displays a messages asking if you want to save the images before closing the program Exploring the User Interface When you open Paint Shop Pro it displays the main program window This window is your work area It contains the commands and tools used to create edit print and export your images The Paint Shop Pro workspace includes the following components Menu bar The menu bar displays commands for performing tasks Menus are organized by topic For example the Effects menu contains commands for applying effects to images Save time by saving workspaces Did you know that you can save entire workspaces not just images The workspace includes open images and their magnifications and screen positions as well as positions and preferences of palettes toolbars dialogs and windows For more information see Using Custom Workspaces on page 401 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 13 Toolbars The toolbars display buttons for common commands See Us
173. annels check box to use all the color channels in both images This will produce a 24 bit image In the Modifiers group box choose modifier options The modifiers are applied to the color values produced by the Function and the Channel selections Divisor This number is used to divide the color values It can reduce the effects of the other selections Bias This number shifts each color value by a fixed amount The number is added to the color value produced by the Function Channel and Divisor selections Clip color values This check box determines how Paint Shop Pro handles final color values greater than 255 and less than 0 Clip Color p Value less than 0 Value more than 255 Values Marked Value 0 Value 255 Cleared Value Value 256 Value Value 256 8 Click OK 153 r r CHAPTER i Making Selections in Images Selecting the parts of images to edit 1s an important step in modifying images After you create a selection you can edit it while leaving the rest of the image unchanged You can use tools such as painting or drawing or apply commands such as flipping copying or cropping to the selection The border of a selection is identified by black and white dashes called a marquee This chapter shows you how to make many types of selections Contents Using the Selection Tools 0 cccccecececcceveveee o Using Edit Selection cee ee 164 Working with Standard and Floating Selections
174. apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Artistic Effects and select an effect Note These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Applying Edge Effects Use Edge effects to clarify your image and to accentuate the edges and contrast areas in your image To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Edge Effects and select an effect Note These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Example of an Distortion effect Example of a Geometric effect Example of an Illumination effect Chapter 14 Applying Effects 319 Applying Distortion Effects Apply distortion effects to distort an image To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Distortion Effects and select an effect Note These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Applyin
175. applying the Eraser tool Using the Eraser Tool When you use the Eraser tool to erase on a raster layer all pixels in the tool s path become transparent When you erase on the background which does not support transparency the Eraser tool acts like a paintbrush all pixels in the tool s path become the current foreground or background color or material To use the Eraser tool 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Eraser tool It may be hidden Undoing versus erasing When should you undo paint strokes and when should you erase in the image Undo paint strokes when you made a mistake with a stroke Undoing a paint stroke restores the image detail under the stroke Erase paint when you want to change certain pixels to transparent or a color if the background is selected Erase to create an effect such as one layer showing through another layer Erasing does not restore the image detail under the stroke under the Background Eraser tool On the Tool Options palette choose the brush tip size opacity and other options See Setting Brush and Paint Options on page 211 For the opacity setting 100 erases pixels to complete transparency and a lower opacity erases pixels to partial transparency Drag in the image to erase as follows m To erase pixels drag with the left mouse button To restore erased pixels drag with the right mouse button Toerase a straight line click once at the beginning
176. ar select the Deform tool E Asymmetric Symmetric Perspective Perspective A bounding box with handles appears on the selection or the layer 3 To deform the image by clicking and dragging in the image do Color depth and layers one or more of the following The Deform tool works on greyscale To resize click and drag one of the corner or edge handles and 16 million color images only To increase the color depth of an To resize while keeping the current proportions right click image see page 109 and drag a corner handle To use the Deform tool the image data must be on a regular raster layer If necessary promote the To move the entire image within the canvas click and drag anywhere within the bounding box background by choosing To change the center of rotation drag the rotation pivot point Layers gt Promote Background Layer To rotate drag the rotation handle To change perspective symmetrically press Ctrl and drag a corner handle horizontally or vertically 144 Chapter 6 Editing Images Deform Tool Tip To make the deform handles ona layer easier to see drag the corner of the image window to make it larger than the image How do I resize and reshape vector objects and text Use the Object Selection Tool For instructions see Using the Selection Tools on page 154 Quick steps for proportional scaling To resize a floating selection or layer and keep the same proportions select
177. arency button to show the area around the selection as either transparent or black E 2 In the Load from Document drop down list select the image that contains the alpha channel you want to load To load from another image s alpha channel the image must be open in Paint Shop Pro 3 In the drop down list below the document name choose the alpha channel that contains the selection you want to load 4 In the Operation group box choose whether the selection you load replaces adds to or subtracts from the active selection in the image if there is one 5 A message in the Operations group box indicates how the original alpha channel rectangle which is the saved selection intersects the canvas of the current image completely intersects does not completely intersect part of the selection is off the canvas or does not intersect at all If it partially intersects or does not intersect mark the Move to Upper Left of Canvas check box to move the selection onto the image canvas Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 179 6 In the Options group box choose from these options m Mark the Move to upper left of canvas check box to place the loaded selection in the upper left If the check box is cleared the selection remains in the same position it was on the original image m Mark the Clip to canvas check box to clip the selection at the places where it goes beyond the image canvas m Mark the Invert image check box to s
178. arks are easier to detect and harder to remove they are also more visible in the image You can make two copies of the image and apply a stronger watermark to the copy you are printing and a weaker one to the copy you are displaying electronically To set the watermark durability 1 From the Target Output drop down list choose how the image will be displayed Monitor or Print If you select the Print option for an image with a resolution under 300 dpi Paint Shop Pro displays a message recommending that you increase the image resolution before embedding the watermark 2 To set the watermark strength in the Watermark Durability field type a number from 1 to 16 drag the slider below it or use the default values The default Monitor option is 8 the default Print option is 12 3 To verify that the watermark information is embedded correctly mark the Verify check box The program checks that the watermark has been applied and displays its attributes and durability Personalizing the Creator ID Initially Paint Shop Pro s watermark Creator ID is set to Jasc Watermark Demo Customizing the watermark with your own identification number is a two step process First register with Digimarc to obtain your own ID number m Second enter the information in the Personalize Creator ID dialog To personalize the Creator ID 1 Display the Embed Watermark dialog See Embedding a Digital Watermark on page 352 2 Click th
179. around the 360 degree color wheel from the pixel s original color A positive values indicates a clock wise rotation and a negative value indicates a counter clockwise rotation For example when the Hue value is at 180 blue becomes yellow and green becomes magenta 7 Drag the Saturation slider up to increase the saturation or drag it down to decrease the saturation Values can range from 100 to 100 at zero the saturation is unchanged 8 Drag the Lightness slider up to increase the lightness or drag it down to decrease the lightness Values can range from 100 to 100 at zero the lightness is unchanged 9 Click OK 188 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Correcting Colors by Setting Black and White Points If an image has a color cast an effective way to correct it is to select those points that you know are supposed to be black or white and shift all colors based on resetting these points to true black and true white You can do this with the Black and White Points command You can also define the grey point too After you select the points all colors are shifted To use the Black and White Points command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Us
180. aspect ratio Background Click in the color box and pick a color for any added canvas Or mark the Transparent check box to have any added canvas be transparent Note You must choose a color for any canvas added to the background layer 3 Set the placement of the image in the new canvas In the Placement group box click a placement button The fields to the right of the placement buttons will show the amount of canvas added or subtracted from each edge Note You can also enter values in the fields to control image placement 4 Click OK 140 Chapter 6 Editing Images Rotating Images Rotating an image turns it around its pivot point Rotating can straighten an image that was scanned at a slight angle Use the Rotate command the Deform tool or the Straighten tool as shown in the table Command or Tool Free Rotate command Rotate 90 degree commands Deform tool Straighten tool How to Use Choose the rotation angle from a dialog and then apply the rotation See To Free Rotate on page 140 Rotate image 90 degrees clockwise or counter clockwise See To rotate all layers 90 degrees on page 141 Drag the rotation handle to see the effect of the rotation immediately See To rotate with the Deform tool on page 141 Specify a line along an image feature that is supposed to be straight Paint Shop Pro aligns the image with this rotation line Use this tool when the image has a
181. aste Into Selection 125 Repeat 129 Select All 43 edit mode 245 Edit Selection command 164 editing contours 245 gradients 98 masks 294 nodes 251 paths 245 scripts 384 template cells 369 text 308 vector objects 237 Effect Browser 316 effects adding to text 309 choosing 316 creating your own 325 Effect Browser 316 using dialogs 317 Effects menu 3D Effects 317 Artistic Effects Posterize 199 Solarize 201 Distortion Effects 319 Edge Effects 318 Geometric Effects 319 Illumination Effects 319 Image Effects 320 Seamless Tiling 175 Reflection Effects 320 Texture Effects 321 User Defined 325 Em definition of 307 embedding watermarks 352 Emboss brush 220 426 Index end cap styles 236 Equalize command 191 Eraser tool 216 erasing image background 217 parts of images 216 EXIF 24 exporting GIF files 342 JPEG files 346 PNG files 348 F feathering selections 170 File Format Associations about 407 adding or removing 408 changing 408 File Format Preferences PCD tab 410 PostScript tab 410 RAW tab 411 WMF tab 411 File Locations about 403 adding 405 deleting 405 editing 404 Web browsers 407 File menu Browse 30 Export Shape 234 Import From Scanner or Camera 39 Screen Capture 41 TWAIN 40 New 35 Open 30 Print 359 Print Layout print layout window 360 Recent Files 31 Revert 127 Save 48 Save As
182. aster and adjustment layers but vector layers are converted to raster layers Chapter 11 Working with Layers 261 Types of Layers There are five types of layers background raster vector mask and adjustment The icon before the layer name on the Layer palette shows the type of layer In addition you can create layer groups and promote selections to layers Raster Layers Raster layers jj are layers with raster data only Raster data is composed of individual elements called pixels arranged in a grid Each pixel has a specific location and color Photographic images are composed of raster data If you magnify raster data you can see the individual pixels as squares of colors Use raster layers for displaying subtle changes in tones and colors Or use raster layers for objects and raster text on which you want to apply raster only commands and tools The effects commands the painting tools and many other tools apply only to raster layers Raster data must be on raster layers a regular raster layer or the background layer If you try to use a raster tool while a vector layer is selected Paint Shop Pro prompts you to convert the vector layer into a raster layer Adjustment Layers Adjustment layers are correction layers that adjust the color or tone of underlying layers Each adjustment layer makes the same correction as an equivalent command on the Colors gt Adjust menu but does not change image pixels like the co
183. aster text selection a selection marquee shaped like text that you can use to create interesting effects For example create a text selection on a solid colored layer and then delete the selection so the letters become transparent and are outlined in the solid color To select vector text 1 2 3 On the Layer palette click the layer name that contains the text On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool E Click the text A bounding box with editing handles surrounds the text You can now move or resize the text Double click to edit the vector properties such as the color or texture To edit the words themselves click the Text tool and then double click the text To create a text selection with the Text tool 1 2 Select the Text tool A On the Tool Options palette in the Create as group box choose Selection which creates a selection shaped like the text rather than text as a painted object Click where you want to start the text selection to open the Text Entry dialog Select the text options and type the text Click Apply Creating a mask from a selection You can also use a selection to create a mask For more information see Creating Masks from Selections on page 292 Selecting a layer As long as there are no selections on the image when you click a layer s name on the Layer palette Paint Shop Pro automatically selects all contents of the active layer though without a se
184. ating Image Rollovers nanana 336 Slicing IMa ges naaa 337 Saving Images forthe Web 0 cece ee ees 341 Using Digital Watermarks 0 ce es 351 328 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools sending Images via E Mail Use Paint Shop Pro to e mail any open image to friends family or colleague using an e mail program The image is in its current file format whenever possible Note In order to send images via e mail your computer must have a default e mail application that supports the MAPI standard such as Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express To send the image via e mail Choose File gt Send or click the Send Mail button on the toolbar Your current mail program opens with the file attached Enter the recipient type a message and then send it Uploading Images to a Photo Sharing Service Using other photo sharing services As Paint Shop Pro is updated Support for additional photo Sharing services may be included To find out if Support for additional photo sharing services is available be sure your computer is connected to the Internet and then choose Help gt asc Software Online gt Check for Updates To change your service choose File gt Preferences gt General Program Preferences click the PhotoSharing tab and then choose the photo sharing service from the list of available services Use Paint Shop Pro to easily upload your images to a photo sharing service Photo sharing services allow you to upload
185. ayer on page 268 If you create a new image with a transparent background it does not have a background layer and its bottom layer is a raster layer named Raster Layer 1 You may move this layer anywhere within the stacking order or change its opacity or blend mode Chapter 11 Working with Layers 263 Using Layers with Photographic Images When you open a digital photograph or scanned image in Paint Shop Original photographs and the Pro the image is on the background layer For most photographic resulting photo collage enhancements such as cropping correcting colors or retouching you can work on this background layer without ever adding another layer However there are many ways to use layers with your photographic images to make changes easier and create interesting effects Task How to Do It with Layers Preserve the original Make a duplicate copy of the background layer image before choose Layers gt Duplicate Turn off the visibility making changes of the background layer click the layer s Visibility button and make all changes to the duplicate layer Make color and Use adjustment layers instead of changing the image tonal corrections directly For more information see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 Add text or Add them as vector objects to a new vector layer If graphics you add them to the raster layer with the image you must add them as raster data and they ll be diffi
186. b Tools 347 JPEG Optimizer Quality Tab Use this tab to set a compression value and chroma subsampling for the file The compression value reduces the file size by deleting image information This means that as you increase the compression you lower the quality of the image Use the image preview window to help you find the best balance between the two m With Chroma subsampling the file size of the JPEG is reduced by averaging the color information for every 2 x 2 square of pixels You can change this setting to have a larger area of color information averaged JPEG Optimizer Format Tab The options on this tab determine how an image appears as it is being loaded Standard The image downloads one line a time starting from the top Progressive The image is displayed incrementally in several passes and detail is added each time Use this option with larger images so that the viewer can get an idea of how the image looks while waiting for it to download JPEG Optimizer Download Times Tab This tab displays the size of the compressed file and an estimate of the download time at four modem speeds To change the file size click the Quality tab and increase or reduce the compression value Saving the JPEG File After you have selected the options click OK to open the Save As dialog Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the new image and type a name for the file When you click Save Paint Shop Pro saves the ima
187. before placing it on your Web page its appearance will be more consistent 342 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools Lossy vs Lossless compression Lossy compression is a compression method that eliminates data to reduce the file size while lossless compression retains all of the original image data and reduces the file size by Storing patterns of pixels in the image File Size File size affects the majority of users accessing a Web page As the size of an image file increases it takes more time to download so viewers have a longer wait Use a file format that reduces the image size most efficiently while keeping the quality as high as possible Web File Formats Choose from the following file formats when saving image for use on the Web m GIF Use this format to compress line art and images with areas of similar colors It supports 8 bit 256 color There are two versions of GIF 89a which can save transparency and animation information and 87a which cannot Both are recognized by most browsers and use lossless compression m JPEG Use this format to compress photographic images It supports 24 bit 16 million color uses lossy compression and is recognized by most browsers PNG This format compresses most images efficiently It supports up to 24 bit 16 million color and uses lossless compression It is recognized by most browsers however many features of this format are not available Wireless Bitmap WBMP T
188. button 2 Drag the thumbnails of the images you want to print into the print layout If an image is larger than the page Paint Shop Pro asks whether you want to scale the image Click Yes to scale the image to fit or click No to place the image at its current size Note To locate an image that is out of view in the Print Layout window use the scrollbars to scroll through the workspace and locate the image or choose Preferences gt Auto Arrange Paint Shop Pro arranges all images in the workspace onto the page If the image is still out of view choose Zoom gt Zoom to Page 3 Choose File gt Print or press Ctrl P to open the Print dialog or click Print to print the page with the current print settings Note To adjust print settings choose File gt Print Setup or click the Print Setup For more details see Choosing Printing Setup Options on page 357 4 To close the Print Layout window choose File gt Close or click the Close button E Note To remove an image from a print layout click the image to select it and then press Delete or choose Image gt Remove Arranging and Sizing Images in a Layout Once you have images open in the Print Layout window you can automatically or manually arrange images in a layout Automatically Arranging Images in a Layout Use the Auto Arrange command to automatically size and position images on the page of the Print Layout window Paint Shop Pro divides the page
189. button to mark all the check boxes in the list Click the Disable All button to clear all the check boxes in the list Photo Sharing Preferences The current photo sharing service provider is shown in the Select a photo sharing service list When you choose File gt Export gt PhotoSharing that provider s site will be accessed via your Web browser Auto Action Preferences Common actions that need to be performed in order to further edit an image can be automated For example you can only apply effects to 24 bit images However most of the Effects menu items are active even 1f the active image is 8 bit When you select an effect in an 8 bit image the Auto Actions dialog opens telling you Paint Shop Pro must convert the image to 24 bit to proceed with the effect To set the preferences for an Auto Action 1 Select an Auto Action from the Auto Action Prompt list 2 Choose one of these options for each action Never Prevents the action from happening Choosing Never will make certain menu commands inactive if an Auto Action is required to complete the command Note that some items in the list do not have this option available Always Performs the action silently without prompting you Prompt Asks if you want perform the action Set all the actions in the list to a certain option by clicking Always All Never All or Prompt All Reset all the actions in the list to the program s default settings by clicking Reset
190. calibrate your monitor you need an on screen aid that helps you adjust the monitor s brightness and contrast The Jasc Web site provides an on screen aid as well as detailed instructions for calibration Go to the Product Support section of www jasc com Note about Color Management If you enable Windows Color Management Paint Shop Pro ignores the monitor gamma preference setting Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 419 Adjusting the Monitor Gamma Setting Paint Shop Pro s monitor gamma setting adjusts how colors display in Paint Shop Pro This setting does not affect how your monitor displays colors in other applications Most users should not adjust the monitor gamma setting If you make color corrections after you change the monitor gamma the colors may look distorted on other monitors or in applications other than Paint Shop Pro To adjust the monitor gamma 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt Monitor Gamma to open the Monitor Gamma Adjustment dialog Lean away from your monitor and look at the red green blue and grey rectangles Each color contains an inner solid color rectangle and outer patterned rectangles On a correctly adjusted monitor the inner rectangles are difficult to distinguish from the outer rectangles Do one of the following To adjust the red green and blue values in unison mark the Link channels check box To adjust the values individually clear the Link channels check box
191. click OK save the slice settings 3 Open the HTML file place the cursor where you want to insert the HTML slice code and press Ctrl P Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 341 Saving Slices Save slices to a directory on your hard drive so you can use or edit them To save slices 1 In the Image Slicer dialog click the Save or Save as button to open the HTML Save As dialog 2 Navigate to the folder where you want to save the HTML code and click OK saving Images for the Web Because the majority of Web browsers recognize GIF and JPEG images these two formats are used most often for saving Web images Newer versions of the Web browsers can also recognize the more recent PNG format and many Web browsers also support Windows Wireless Bitmap WBMP and iMode formats which are popular to display when using wireless devices When you save images for the Web there are three major issues to consider layers color depth and file size Layers Because none of the current Web browsers can display layered images you need to flatten an image before saving it for the Web Flatten it by choosing Layers gt Merge gt Merge All Flatten Color Depth Some computers are only capable of displaying up to 256 colors If an image on a Web page contains more colors the Web browser uses its own dithering method to display the image This can produce color distortion If you reduce the color depth of the image to 8 bits 256 colors
192. clicking Chapter 9 Painting 221 Brush Effect Change to Target Changes pixels based on a characteristic of the current foreground color on the Materials palette color hue saturation or lightness If you choose the color as the target the tool applies the foreground color without affecting the luminance If you choose the hue saturation or lightness as the target it applies the foreground color s hue saturation or lightness value without changing the other values To use a retouch brush 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the retouch brush Dodge HJ Burn 4 Smudge Push Soften J Sharpen Emboss E Lighten Darken L Saturation D Hue A or Change to Target amp 2 On the Tool Options palette choose the brush tip size opacity and other options See Setting Brush and Paint Options on page 211 3 Depending upon the tool select from the following options Swap mouse buttons Mark this check box to swap the functions of the left up and right down mouse buttons Sample merged Smudge Push Soften Sharpen Emboss Mark this check box to retouch data from all layers merged together Clear this check box to retouch data on the current layer only Mode Lighten Darken Choose what is lightened or darkened RGB values or Lightness values Mode Change to Target Choose the characteristic of the foreground color to target Color RGB value luminance is not changed Hue Lightness or
193. color channel to reduction method use for the final image Grey the lightness values Red Green or Blue Choosing Grey produces the best results in most cases However if the image consists mostly of a single color selecting that color channel may produce the best results 3 In the Reduction method group box choose a color reduction Original color image and method See About Color Reduction Methods on page 115 Nearest Color reduction method Note With the Error Diffusion method you must also select the Floyd Steinberg Burkes or Stucki option which are algorithms for the dithering pattern Try them out to see what result you like best 4 In the Palette weight group box select an option Weighted A weighted palette produces less dithering and produces sharper edges Non weighted A non weighted palette produces more dithering and softer edges Note Dithering places pixels of different colors or grey levels next to each other to simulate missing colors or greys 5 Click OK 112 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Edit the palette When you decrease color depth to 16 colors the resulting image has an image palette that contains 16 Specific colors You can change any of those colors and create interesting effects by editing the image palette See Working with Image Palettes on page 117 Decreasing Color Depth to 16 Colors 4 Bit To reduce the file size of images with few colors
194. colors as follows For images with 16 million colors choose from the Jasc Color Picker See Choosing Colors from the Jasc Color Picker on page 86 With images with 2 to 256 colors choose from the image palette See Choosing Colors from the Image Palette on page 89 For all images you can choose a color from an open image or from any displayed color See Choosing Colors from an Image or the Desktop on page 90 Choose a color from the Available Colors panel of the Materials palette left click to choose the foreground color or right click to choose the background color Choosing Colors from the Jasc Color Picker The Jasc Color Picker displays when you click a Color or Material box on the Materials palette You also choose from this color picker when you click a Color box in some Paint Shop Pro dialogs The Jasc Color Picker offers a variety of ways to select colors Select from the Color wheel and Saturation Lightness box which offer a visual way to select a color based on its hue saturation and lightness Select from the Basic Colors panel which displays commonly used colors Select RGB or HSL values to choose a color based on its red green and blue values or its hue saturation and lightness values Enter an HTML color code Select a color from the active image Note If the active image has a color depth less than 24 bit 16 million colors you must select colors from a palette rather than t
195. colors or create interesting color effects Images with a color depth of 16 million colors do not have an image palette because they can contain all the colors your computer can display For these images you can load an image palette to decrease the image s color depth to 256 colors or 8 bit Loading a palette produces the same result as using the Decrease Color Depth command except that you are controlling which colors are used in the converted image For more information on color depth see Understanding Color Depth on page 108 Paint Shop Pro also includes a Safety palette for creating Web images that can be viewed without color distortion on most monitors Using this palette produces the same result as using the Decrease Color Depth gt 256 Colors 8 bit command and selecting the Standard Web safe palette option For more information see Using the Web Safe Color Palette on page 119 You can also create and save your own palettes Preset palettes are located in the Palettes folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder You can store your custom palettes there as well To edit an image palette of 16 to 256 color images 1 Choose Image gt Palette gt Edit Palette Note This command is not available for 16 million color images 2 To change the sort order or arrangement of colors select an option from the Sort Order drop down list Palette Order in order by the way the palette stores the colors By Luminance in orde
196. control Crop image To crop the edges of the image to make it rectangular after straightening mark the check box Clear this check box to fill edge areas with the background color Rotate all layers To straighten all layers in the image mark this check box 5 g the command double click the image or click Apply v Chapter 6 Editing Images 143 Scaling and Transforming Images The Deform tool gives you the power to transform images Deforming an image interactively Use the tool to scale shear distort apply perspective or rotate a layer as follows Scaling resizes the selection or layer horizontally vertically or proportionally m Shearing skews a selection or layer vertically or horizontally Distorting stretches or contracts a selection or layer in any direction Applying perspective corrects the perspective or applies a false perspective on a selection or layer For specific directions see te ee c6 rs 55 Bounding box Correcting Image Perspective on page 145 Rotating moves a selection or a layer around a pivot point For specific directions see Rotating Images on page 140 The Deform tool works on raster layers only To deform vector objects or text in similar ways see Resizing and Reshaping Vector Objects on page 243 or Scaling and Transforming Text on page 309 To deform an image 1 Choose a layer by clicking its name on the Layer palette 2 On the Tools toolb
197. crease the color depth of an image see page 109 Using matting ona selection To clean up the edges of a selection before you promote or copy it use the Selections gt Matting commands See Cleaning Up the Edges of a Selection on page 171 Cleaning up the Edges of Layers Created from Selections When you promote or paste a selection to create a layer some of the pixels surrounding the selection border are included especially when the selection is anti aliased or feathered The Layers gt Matting commands clean up the border by removing these pixels There are three Matting commands Remove Black Matte Remove White Matte and Defringe Use the Remove Black Matte or Remove White Matte command when the selection came from an image with a black or white background These commands remove the black or white pixels at the layer edges Use the Defringe command when the selection came from an image with a colored background Defringing bleeds non feathered pixels in the layer edges outward and over the jaggies in the feathered part of the layer To use a Matting command 1 On the Layer palette click the name of the layer that was created from a selection 2 Do one of the following To remove the black matte choose Layers gt Matting gt Remove Black Matte To remove the white matte choose Layers gt Matting gt Remove White Matte To remove a colored matte choose Layers gt Matting gt Defrin
198. cted layer are added to a new layer group The mask layer applies to the selected layer only To apply it to all underlying layers drag it from the layer group to the main level For information on editing the mask see Editing Masks on page 294 To view the mask on the image on the Layer palette click the Mask Overlay toggle E Using the greyscale channel as a mask Chapter 12 Working with Masks 293 Creating Masks from Channels When you split an image into its RGB HSL or CMYK channels Paint Shop Pro creates a greyscale image for each channel Use one of these channel images to create a mask for the original image or another image To create a mask from a channel 1 Split the image into channels using one of the Image gt Split Channel commands and leave the resulting greyscale images open in the workspace For more information see Working with Color Channels on page 107 2 Select the image where you want to create the mask layer 3 Choose Layers gt New Mask Layer gt From Image to open the Add Mask From Image dialog 4 In the Source window drop down list select which channel image to use for the mask 5 In the Create mask from group box select the Source opacity option 6 To reverse the transparency of the mask data mark the Invert mask data check box 7 Click OK The mask layer and the selected layer are added to a new layer group The mask layer applies to the selected laye
199. cult to edit Create interesting Duplicate the background layer apply an effect to effects the duplicate and then change the opacity or blend range of the modified layer to blend the two layers Create a photo Place each photograph on a separate layer For each collage image choose Edit gt Copy to copy the image select the collage image and choose Edit gt Paste as New Layer Position each layer with the Move tool Use each layer s opacity setting and blend mode to control how much of each layer shows through Use a mask to hide parts of a layer or create soft edges around a layer 264 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Individual layers and the final illustration Task Create a panoramic photograph How to Do It with Layers Take a series of photographs with overlapping subject matter then stitch the photographs together using layers Create an image with a canvas large enough to display the panorama then copy each photograph onto a separate layer Decrease the opacity of one layer to see though it as you use the Move tool to match up the edges of the other photograph Do this with each layer then return the layers to 100 percent opacity Using Layers with Illustrations Layers are invaluable for illustrations Here are some of the many ways to use layers Task Make changes easier Move multiple layers together on the image canvas Edit graphical elements Apply raster only co
200. cursor over the end node END displays If the object has an closed path CLOSE displays For vector objects you can reverse an entire path all the contours in the object or reverse one contour within a path The direction of a contour or a path affects two important things Text flow along a contour Reverse direction to change how text aligns on a contour Fill properties of overlapping contours When contours with different directions overlap the resulting fill is transparent Reverse one contour overlapping another contour to create cutout objects To reverse a path or contour 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool l 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Edit Mode e 3 Click on a contour or path then select on one node on the contour Note To reverse multiple contours select one node from each contour 4 Right click on the path or contour choose Edit from the context menu and choose Reverse Path Ctrl Shit R or Reverse Contour Ctrl R Note You can also access these commands by choosing Objects gt Edit Joining Contours You can join two contours by connecting their end points You can manually drag nodes together to join them or you can have Paint Shop Pro automatically join two nodes To join two contours 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool f 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Edit Mode e 3 Select one of the contours to show all nodes in the objec
201. d Transforming ImagesS 00 eee enue 143 Correcting Image Perspective cc ee es 145 Wampinda MAGES str crau otanncnas Gana cen eeae adnan ee 146 Adding Borders to ImageS cece eee eee ees 150 Flipping and Mirroring Images cece ee ee 151 Combining Two Images cee ee ee ees 151 1123 124 Chapter 6 Editing Images Cutting Copying and Pasting What is the clipboard The Windows clipboard is an area of computer memory used for temporary storage Cut or copied image data is stored in it Cutting vs deleting The Cut command places your data in the Windows clipboard so that you can paste it The Clear command throws away the data You can cut or copy a selection or an entire layer to the Windows clipboard and then paste the contents of the clipboard into the same image or another image The basic commands are Cut Removes a selection or a layer to the clipboard and replaces it with the selected background color or transparency Copy Copies a selection or a layer to the clipboard Copy Merged Copies a flattened merged version of all the layers in a selection to the clipboard Paste Pastes a cut or copied selection or layer as a new image a selection a new layer or into the current layer To cut a selection or a layer 1 Select the area or layer you want to cut For information about making selections see Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 2 Choose Edit gt Cut or pres
202. d feature rectangular See To use the Perspective Correction tool to correct perspective on page 146 To use the Deform tool to correct perspective 1 Select the layer to correct in the Layer palette 2 Use grid lines to help you correct lines in your photograph that should be vertical or horizontal To turn on the grid choose View gt Grid 3 On the Tools toolbar select the Deform tool E 4 Press Ctrl and click and drag a corner handle The image updates when you release the mouse button Continue adjusting the perspective until the image looks correct 146 Chapter 6 Editing Images Note If the correction causes some image data to fall outside the image canvas you can restore that data by increasing the size of the canvas See Changing Canvas Size on page 139 To use the Perspective Correction tool to correct perspective Correcting perspective i Bounding box After Correction Warping Images On the Tools toolbar select the Perspective Correction tool ca A bounding box with corner handles appears on the image On the Tool Options palette select from these options Grid lines To display grid lines in the box enter the number of lines to display m Crop image Mark this check box to crop the image back to its original size after the perspective is applied Areas of the image that fall outside the original image size are deleted Drag each handle to the corner of a feature that is sup
203. d press Ctrl P Saving Image Maps Save image maps to a directory on your hard drive so you can use or edit them To save image maps 1 In the Image Mapper dialog click the Save or Save as button to open the HTML Save As dialog 2 Navigate to the folder where you want to save the HTML code and click OK 336 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools Creating Image Rollovers A rollover is an image or section of an image that changes appearance when the user activates it Web designers frequently create rollovers for the buttons of a navigation bar When a user clicks a button the browser displays the linked Web page or file and the rollover area displays a different button Viewing a Preview Click the Preview button 4 to view your work in a Web browser window You can assign a rollover to both sliced and mapped images by choosing a file for the slice or area to display when the user performs a specific mouse action To create image rollovers 1 Choose File gt Export gt Image Mapper or Image Slicer to open the Image Mapper or Image Slicer dialog Select the Pan tool Ral and then click the cell where you want to add a rollover Click the Rollover Creator button to open the Rollover Creator dialog Select the check box of the action you want used to activate the rollover Mouse over Mouse out Mouse click Mouse double click Mouse up Mouse down and then click the Open button to open the Select Roll
204. default Mark the Apply to current template check box to apply the new default placement option to all the cells of the open template In the Grid settings group box set the following options m Show Grid Mark the check box to show the grid or clear it to hide the grid m Dot Grid Mark the check box to use a dotted line grid or clear it to use a solid line grid Grid Color Click the color box to choose another color for grid lines Horizontal Spacing Sets spacing between horizontal grid lines Vertical Spacing Sets spacing between vertical grid lines Chapter 16 Printing Images 365 m Snap to Grid Mark the check box to snap images to grid lines when you position them Clear the check box to position images freely on the page Saving a Page Layout After you set up a page layout you can save it to print later You can also save just the formatting of your layout to use with other images Paint Shop Pro saves the layout as a template By default templates you save are stored in the Print Templates folder of the My PSP8 Files folder in your My Documents folder You can save your layouts in two ways as a template or as a template with images Templates By default Paint Shop Pro saves your layout as a template When you save your layout Paint Shop Pro uses the size and position of the images in your layout to create blank cells for new images to be placed in When you open the template later you must p
205. depth of your image You can change any brightness value on the 0 255 To apply this command to a scale For example you can change all pixels that have a brightness selection the image must be a value of 128 to a value of 150 The Curves command gives you 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit 1 To limit the adjustment to a specific area make a selection in the color or greyscale images only image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 enormous flexibility in changing the brightness of your image To use the Curves command To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 2 Do one of the following To modify the image pixels directly choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Curves m To create an adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Curves For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 3 To reset the settings in the Presets drop down list choose Default 4 In the Channel drop down list select a color channel to edit Choose RGB to edit the red green and blue channels together Choose Red Green or Blue to edit the individual color channels 5 Use the points on the graph to adjust the relationship between the input levels the brightness of the original pixels and output levels the brightness of corrected pixels At
206. der is the black circle within a grey square To darken the image s whites click and drag the Max slider down To lighten the image s blacks click and drag the Min slider up Note Even though you are dragging sliders along the vertical axis the Max and Min values actually affect the horizontal axis They indicate the maximum and minimum value from 0 to 255 in the image All pixels outside those values are converted so that they fall within the maximum and minimum To adjust another channel choose it in the Edit drop down list and follow these steps again Click OK CHAPTER amp Painting Contents Painting changes the pixels in your images Dragging a painting tool across an image changes the pixels under the brush stroke These tools give you endless options to get creative with your images Apply soft or hard edged brush strokes of any color or material paint with another image as a source retouch images to correct colors or contrast replace colors or paint with picture tubes You can also erase pixels to transparency All painting tools work on raster layers only The painting tools are fully effective on greyscale or 16 million color images but can be applied with limited results to images of other color depths You can also make a selection in an image and then use the painting tool to change only the pixels within the selection For more information on selections see Using the Selection Tools on p
207. drastically choose a color from the Preset colors list that is quite different from the current color Preserve Lightness Mark this check box to preserve the lightness of the source color in the corrected image Clear this check box to match the lightness of the corrected image to the target color s lightness Preserve Saturation Mark this check box to preserve the saturation of the source color in the corrected image Clear this check box to match the saturation of the corrected image to the target color s saturation 58 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs When not to use Grey World color correction This color correction may not work well for m Very simple scenes with few colors m Images with a limited range of hues Such as mostly blues m Simple computer generated graphics Using Grey World to Adjust Colors Like the Automatic Color Balance command the Grey World Color Balance command corrects image colors but it uses a different mathematical algorithm If you average all the colors in a complex outdoor photograph the average color turns out to be grey Grey World color correction uses this fact to determine what a photograph needs to have better looking colors As with any of Paint Shop Pro s color correction commands the best approach is to try the Grey World command and see if you like its results You can apply this command to a selection or an entire image To correct colors using the Grey World d
208. ds see Clarifying Images on page 79 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 65 Removing Image Defects and Noise Sometimes images have defects that are called noise black white or colored specks ranging in size from very tiny to relatively large or all over noise that gives surfaces a grainy look You can use Paint Shop Pro s Noise commands to remove noise from images Before you decide which command to use determine the type of noise that your image contains Note All Noise commands work on 16 million color and greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Removing Single Pixel Specks Use the Despeckle command to remove single pixel specks that are mostly white or black This command analyzes the brightness of each pixel and compares it to the surrounding pixels to determine if it should be removed To remove single pixel specks in an image 1 Select the area that contains the specks See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Despeckle The selection is despeckled Removing Multiple Pixel Black or White Specks Use the Salt and Pepper Filter command to remove multiple pixel black or white specks such as those caused by dust on film or video This command compares an area of pixels to the surrounding pixels and adjusts an area that is a speck to match those surrounding pixels To remov
209. duce color If you do not have custom monitor and printer profiles using Color Management is not recommend For more information on Color Management please refer to your Windows documentation To use Color Management 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt Color Management 2 Mark the Enable Color Management check box 3 Choose an option Basic color management Adjusts how the monitor displays colors and how the printer produces colors Most users should choose this option Proofing Previews on the monitor how colors will appear on a particular device This option is best at representing the limitations of a particular output device such as a printer 4 Select the printer and monitor profiles for your devices in the drop down lists 5 For Rendering Intent select the approach used to map image colors to the color gamut of your monitor or printer The available options depend upon your Windows system For detailed descriptions see your Windows documentation 6 If you selected the Proofing option select the Emulated device profile the profile of the output device and the Rendering Intent 7 Click OK 2 ree sir ao 2i ton 1 a Index Symbols in title bar 20 Numerics 3D effects 317 A about Bound Scripts 381 color channels 107 color depth 108 color models 103 dialogs 25 image resolution 34 image size 33 making color and tonal corrections 182 raster images 32 vector graphics 32 ac
210. e each pixel can display only one of two colors black or white In a 24 bit image each pixel can display one of 16 million colors Images with a color depth of 16 million colors look best because they contain the most colors but they also require the most memory to store and edit Not all computer monitors can display 16 million colors so some file formats limit the number of supported colors For example GIF images a popular format for the Web contain up to 256 colors 8 bit depth Many of Paint Shop Pro s effect and correction commands work on 16 million color images only Therefore its best to create most images using 16 million colors When you have finished working on the image you can decrease its color depth and save it in another format For more information see Understanding Color Depth on page 108 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 35 Creating an Image You can create a new image by creating a blank image or by using another image as a Starting point For information on using other images see Creating New Images from Existing Images on page 36 When you create a new blank image you select the image size and resolution along with the color depth and background color and material It s important to choose a size and resolution that fits with your desired output type and output quality For more information see About Image Size Resolution and Color Depth on page 33 To crea
211. e on the Layer palette click the Mask Overlay toggle For more information on editing the mask see Editing Masks on page 294 Using an image as a mask Chapter 12 Working with Masks 291 Creating Masks from Images Use any image as a mask for another image Paint Shop Pro converts the image into greyscale raster data and uses it for the mask The original or source image is not altered Note Another way to create a mask from an image 1s to load the image file from disk see Loading Masks from Disk on page 298 To create a mask from an image 1 Open the image that you want to use for the mask 2 Select the image in which you want to create the mask layer 3 On the Layer palette click the layer you want to mask 4 Choose Layers gt New Mask Layer gt From Image to open the Add Mask From Image dialog 5 In the Source window drop down list select the image to use for the mask 6 In the Create mask from group box select an option Source luminance The luminance value of the pixel color determines the degree of masking Lighter colors produce less masking darker colors produce more masking Transparent areas completely mask the layer Any non zero value Transparent areas completely mask the layer There is no gradation to the masking Pixels with data opacity of 1 255 become white pixels in the mask transparent pixels become black in the mask Source opacity The opacity of the image determines
212. e 366 Printing Images from the BrowSer 0 cee eee ees 369 Printing with CMYK ColorSeparations 000 cae 371 356 Chapter 16 Printing Images Before Printing Before you print you should understand how image resolution color and lightness paper quality and the file type of the image effect the quality of the printed image Image Resolution Laser and ink jet printers work by applying dots of black or colored ink to paper While the image resolution is measured in pixels per inch ppi the printer resolution is measured in dots per inch dpi To determine the printed image size in inches the printer divides the image size in pixels by the pixels per inch An image with a high resolution appears smaller when printed at its original size than an image with a low resolution You can scale images when you use Print Layout to print multiple images However this can lower the quality of the print as it enlarges each pixel You will get better results if you create the image using a resolution that is appropriate for the printer Use the following guidelines to determine the image size for printing For a 300 dpi printer use a 72 to 120 ppi image For a 600 dpi printer use a 125 to 170 ppi image For a 1200 dpi printer use a 150 to 200 ppi image Image Color and Lightness Computer monitors display color by combining red green and blue light on the screen Color printers however use a combination of
213. e Focus the image and improve its clarity by increasing the contrast between adjacent pixels where there are significant color contrasts usually at the edges of objects The Sharpen More command sharpens with a stronger effect than the Sharpen command Both commands are automatically applied to the image Unsharp Mask Sharpens the mid to high contrast edges in the image without enhancing noise This command locates adjacent pixels that have a difference in lightness values that you specify and increases their contrast by an amount you specify This command is typically used in professional color corrections To use the Sharpen or Sharpen More command Choose Adjust gt Sharpness gt Sharpen or Adjust gt Sharpness gt Sharpen More To use the Unsharp Mask dialog 1 Choose Adjust gt Sharpness gt Unsharp Mask 2 In the preview window center an important part of the image such as a face Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary 3 Sharpen the image with the following options Radius The number of pixels to adjust around each edge A value between 0 5 and 2 works best depending on the image A lower value sharpens only the edge pixels while a higher value sharpens a wider band of pixels The effect is much less noticeable in print than on screen because a small radius for example pixel represents a smaller area in a high resolution printed image Therefore use lower val
214. e Personalize button to open the Personalize Creator ID dialog 354 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 3 To register with Digimarc do one of the following If your computer has Web access click Register Your Web browser opens and navigates to the Digimarc Web page Follow the on screen instructions to receive a Creator ID number a PIN number and a password You should write them down for later use Close the browser to return to the Personalize Creator ID dialog If your computer does not have Web access phone Digimarc using the toll free number to register and receive your Creator ID number a PIN number and a password 4 Type the PIN and Creator ID numbers in the appropriate fields 5 Click OK The Embed Watermark dialog opens 6 Click OK If the Verify check box is selected the Embed Watermark Verify dialog opens It lets you know that the watermark has been embedded and displays the creator copyright image attribute and durability information from the Embed Watermark dialog Reading a Digital Watermark Whenever Paint Shop Pro opens an image it automatically checks for a digital watermark If one is detected the program displays a copyright symbol in front of the filename on the title bar View the watermark information by choosing Image gt Image Information and then clicking the Watermark Information tab While most watermarks are detected some may be too weak to read To do a more thorough search u
215. e View gt Palettes gt Brush Variance or press F11 To use the Brush Variance palette 1 Choose a brush or eraser tool from the Tools toolbar 2 Configure the brush options in the Tool Options palette 3 On the Brush Variance palette set the brush variance for each available option Normal No variance applied Pressure The pressure applied from a tablet stylus Altitude The angle between the stylus and tablet Azimuth Determines the rotation angle of the tip Twist The rotation angle around the stylus for 4D mouse only m Fingerwheel Applies to the wheel on an airbrush stylus m Z Wheel Used with a 4D mouse wheel with the wheel configuration set to application defined behavior Direction The angle between consecutive mouse points on a path m Fade In Fades in the brush impression For the Size option the brush size fades from small to large Chapter 9 Painting 213 m Repeating Fade In Repeatedly fades in the brush impression For the Size option the brush size fades from small to large m Fade Out Fades out the brush impression For the Size option the brush size fades from large to small Oscillating Fade Repeatedly fades the brush impression in and out For the Size option the brush size fades from small to large to small Note Options in the Variance palette marked with an asterisk apply only to users with a pressure sensitive tablet The options available will depend on the type of t
216. e color box next to the check box Choose a color and click OK Chapter 11 Working with Layers 279 To choose from recently used colors right click the color box and click a color 4 At the Layer Properties dialog click OK The icon now displays the highlight color Modifying Layers Moving the background layer The background layer is always the bottom layer it cannot be moved To change its position promote it to a raster layer first See Promoting a Background Layer to a Regular Raster Layer on page 268 Modify layers to change the look of your image Arrange the stacking order move layers within the image canvas merge layers clean up edges of layers created from selections or delete layers Arranging the Stacking Order of Layers The arrangement of layers within your image is critical to what the image looks like If one layer is above another one that layer s data can cover data below it To change the stacking order of layers which changes the resulting image move layers on the Layer palette If a layer or a layer group has components such as vector objects or grouped layers all the components move with it To move one layer layer group or vector object On the Layer palette click the name of the layer layer group or vector object and drag it to a new position A black line shows the position until you release the mouse button When you drag an item the cursor changes into a hand
217. e full screen Editing using the full screen 1 Choose View gt Full Screen Edit or press Shift A The menu bar and status bar disappear E To select from a menu when using the full screen move the cursor to the top of the screen and left click The menus appear as you move the mouse along the top 2 To return the window to its previous size press Shift A 24 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Viewing Image Information As you work with an image you may want to view information about it To view general image information Look at the Status bar at the bottom of the Paint Shop Pro workspace to see the cursor position image height and width in pixels and the color depth 6 6 gt 16 24 8 x 18 0 444 Image 15x 13 x 16 million Display the Info tab of the Overview palette to view information about the image Choose View gt Palettes gt Overview and then click the Info tab The information displayed depends on what tool is selected To view image color information Choose Image gt Count Image Colors to display the number of unique colors in the image To view detailed image information 1 Choose Image gt Image Information or press Shift I 2 Do one of the following Click the Image Information tab to view the file name and format image dimensions resolution and color depth modification status number of layers and alpha channels and the amount of RAM and disk s
218. e has a pincushion distortion it looks pushed in at the center Lines that should be straight are curved To correct a pincushion distortion 1 Choose Adjust gt Lens Correction gt Pincushion Distortion Correction 2 Adjust the image using the following options Strength of the correction Adjust this value until the distortion disappears Look for lines in the image that are curved and adjust the Strength value until they become straight The image is resized as you adjust this value Preserve central scale Whether the scale of the center of the picture remains the same or is adjusted If you mark this check box pixels are either added to or removed from the image Clear this check box if you do not want to change the size of the image or layer Note If the Preserve central scale check box is marked the size changes to the original image display in the Result size group box 3 Click OK 72 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Retouching Photographs Paint Shop Pro offers many options for retouching your photos You can remove red eyes from people or the green eyes of animals using the Red Eye Removal command If there are scratches cracks and other unwanted defects on a relatively smooth background use the Scratch Remover tool If there are many small scratches or creases use the Automatic Small Scratch Remover command If there are elements you want to remove use the Clone Brush tool Use the retouch tools to lighte
219. e in a new format select the format from the Save As Type list 5 If the file format has save options click the Options button to open the Save Options dialog Select new settings if appropriate If you are unsure of the settings use the default values Click OK to return to the Save As dialog 6 Click Save to close the dialog and save the file You can have Paint Shop Pro display the last used file type when opening this dialog Select this option in the Dialogs and Palettes Preferences tab of the General Program Preferences dialog Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 49 Saving an Image File in its Original Format When you save an image and then edit it the image title bar displays a Modified tag an asterisk after the file s name to indicate the file has been modified This tag disappears each time you save the file it reappears when you again edit the image Saving an Image in a New File Format If you want to save a file in another format use the Save As command To save a file 1 Choose File gt Save As or press F12 to open the Save As dialog 2 Navigate to and open the folder in which you want to save the image file 3 To rename the image file type a new name in the File name field 4 In the Save as type drop down list select a new format 5 If the file format has save options click the Options button to open the Save Options dialog Select new settings if appropriate If you are unsure of t
220. e is greater than or equal to 128 the Screen blend mode is used In general use the Hard Light blend mode to add highlights or shadows Combines the Burn and Dodge blend modes If the color channel value of the selected layer is less than 128 the Burn blend mode is used If the color channel value is greater than or equal to 128 the Dodge blend mode is used In general use the Soft Light blend mode to add soft highlights or shadows Subtracts the selected layer s color from the color of the underlying layers Lightens the image by having the lightness values of the colors in the selected layer lighten the colors of underlying layers Light colors produce the most lightening black has no effect Darkens the image by having the lightness values of the selected layer reduce the lightness of underlying layers Blend ranges normal 50 60 and 75 Setting the blend ranges Chapter 11 Working with Layers 277 Blend Mode Result Exclusion Creates an effect similar to but softer than the Difference blend mode Setting Blend Ranges In addition to setting the blend mode of a layer you can set the blend range This range limits the pixels that the blend mode affects By default the blend mode applies to all pixels Blend ranges set the opacity based on brightness or color channel to drop colors out of the selected layer and make other colors show through To set the blend range 1 On the Layer palette sel
221. e marker or midpoint to select it then enter a value in the Location field 100 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials To add a new marker Click a position under the gradient bar or the transparency bar For the gradient bar the marker s initial color is determined by the currently highlighted Fore Back or Custom button Click another color button to change the color For the transparency bar the marker s initial opacity is 100 Change this value in the Opacity edit box To delete a marker Click the marker and drag it away from the gradient bar or the transparency bar To change the color for a marker 1 Click the marker below the gradient bar to select it The triangle at lf a gradient uses the top of the marker turns black foreground or background l colors 2 Choose a color by doing one of the following If a gradient contains the To use the foreground color click the Fore button mj foreground or background color when you next apply the gradient it uses the current foreground and To use the currently defined custom color click the Custom To use the background color click the Back button Al background colors of the image button CI rather than the colors that you used to define the gradient To choose a new custom color left click the Custom color To create a gradient that always box to select from the Color Picker or right click to select contains the same colors color all fr
222. e multiple pixel specks 1 Select the area that contains the specks See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Salt And Pepper Filter 66 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Should make a selection first You can apply the Edge Preserving Smooth command to a selection or an image It is faster and more effective when applied to a selection Define the adjustment using the following options Speck size The minimum size in pixels of the largest speck that can be completely removed The value is always an odd number Sensitivity to specks How different an area must be from its surrounding pixels to be considered a speck Mark the Include all lower speck sizes check box to have Paint Shop Pro remove all lower speck sizes Results are usually better if you mark this check box Mark or clear the Aggressive action check box to set whether the strength of correction is normal if the check box is cleared or aggressive if the check box is marked Click OK Removing Noise While Preserving Edge Details Use the Edge Preserving Smooth command to remove noise in an image without losing edge details This command finds details such as object edges and preserves them while smoothing the areas between the edges For example you can preserve the edges of facial features while removing a blotchy complexion You can also use the Edge Preserving Smooth command to minimize film gra
223. e their color information in channels or planes of colors You can separate or split an image into RGB HSL or CMYK color channels An RGB image has three channels red green and blue An HSL image has three channels hue saturation and lightness Although you cannot create or edit an image using the CMYK model you can still split the image to four channels cyan magenta yellow and black The Split Channel command creates a new greyscale image for each color channel the original image is not affected For example an HSL image is split into separate greyscale images named Hue Saturation and Lightness Each greyscale image represents the percentage and location of a color such as red or a characteristic such as lightness within the image You can edit the greyscale images and use them to create interesting effects or masks You can combine them again using the Combine Channel command If you split an image into CMYK channels you can then send the four greyscale images to a printing service You can also print CMYK separations directly see Printing with CMYK Color Separations on page 371 To split color channels 1 Open the image 2 Choose Colors gt Split Channel and choose RGB HSL or CMYK A new greyscale image opens for each color channel To combine color channels 1 Open each color channel file 2 Choose Colors gt Combine Channel and choose Combine from RGB Combine from HSL or Combine
224. e transparency color and format options for the file The fifth tab displays estimated download times of the image at various modem speeds GIF Optimizer Transparency Tab The option you choose in this tab determines which area of the image becomes transparent None Produces a GIF file that does not contain one color set to transparency Existing Image or Layer Transparency Uses the current transparency information from the image Inside the Current Selection For images with a selection this option makes everything within the selection transparent Outside the Current Selection For images with a selection this option makes everything outside the selection transparent Areas that Match this Color Click the color box to select any color Or to choose a color from the image move the cursor over the image and click the color In the Tolerance edit box set a tolerance factor that indicates how closely colors must match the selected color before they become transparent 344 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools GIF Optimizer Partial Transparency Tab A GIF file cannot contain partially transparent pixels All pixels must be either transparent or opaque visible Original images may contain partially transparent pixels if the image does not have a background layer and you have reduced the opacity of a layer added a mask feathered a selection or used a brush at a reduced opacity setting Use the options in the Partial Transparency
225. e zoom percentage displays next to the Zoom buttons To pan the image Do either of the following Move the cursor over either preview window the cursor changes to a hand and then click and drag the image m Click and hold the Navigate button and then center the selection rectangle over the part of the image you want to display To proof changes in the main image window Click the Proof button All settings in the dialog are applied to the main image window Each time you change settings click the Proof button to view the changes in the main image window To set automatic proofing Click the Autoproof button a Paint Shop Pro automatically applies all dialog settings to the main image window each time you change a setting Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 27 Using Preset Settings Presets are saved settings or scripts that you can use to make quick Presets in a dialog changes to images Use the presets that come with Paint Shop Pro or ie I 2 create your own For more information on creating and using presets please refer to Using and Creating Presets on page 386 Editing Numerical Values To edit numbers in Paint Shop Pro dialogs you use the Jasc numeric Numeric edit controls edit controls which provide an easy way to edit numbers and change Spin controls settings Edit box To edit numbers Do one of the following elidor button To enter a specific value click
226. ear M Rectangular ff Sunburst O and Radial Angle Linear rectangular and radial gradients only The angle or direction of the gradient from O to 359 degrees Repeats The number of times from 0 to 100 to repeat the gradient pattern Invert Mark to invert the colors of the gradient Center Point Rectangular sunburst and radial gradients only The horizontal and vertical coordinates of the point from which the gradient disperses or radiates The distance is measured as a percentage of the fill area s width Change the center point to create fills in circles or other shapes where the center of the gradient is not at the center of the object Focal Point Rectangular and sunburst gradients only The horizontal and vertical coordinates of the point where the foreground color of the gradient begins The distance is measured as a percentage of the fill area s width Change the focal point to create fills in circles or other shapes where the effective light source is not at the center of the object This option is available only when the Link Center and Focal Points check box is cleared The examples below show the effect of varying the center point and the focal point hd Ld ll Location of Center 50 50 Center 50 50 Center 30 30 Center 30 30 coordinates Focal 50 50 Focal 30 30 Focal 50 50 Focal 30 30 Link center and focal points Rectangular and sunburst gradients Mark this check box to have the center and foca
227. earest grid line when you release the mouse To change the grid settings 1 Choose Preferences gt Options to open the Print Layout dialog 2 Set the grid options For more information see In the Grid settings group box set the following options on page 364 3 Click OK 364 Chapter 16 Printing Images Changing Print Layout Window Options Use the options in the Print Layout dialog to set auto arrange options units of measurement grid settings and template options To change Print Layout window settings 1 In the Print Layout window choose Preferences gt Options to open the Print Layout dialog Choose the Units either inches or centimeters from the drop down list The dialog s measurements will change to match Mar the Center to full page check box to have Paint Shop Pro calculate the page center based on the actual size of the page Clear this check box to have the page center calculated based on the printer s margins In the Auto Arrange group box choose from the following m Use borders Mark this box to have the Auto Arrange function leave a specified border around all images Enter values for the horizontal and vertical border sizes Stretch to fit Mark this box to have the auto arrange function enlarge images as much as possible while keeping their aspect ratios In the Template options group box Choose the Default Placement to determine how images will be placed in template cells by
228. eas cells then assign the URLs set cell properties and then save the map file as GIF JPEG or PNG file When you save the file a HTML page is automatically generated and copied to the clipboard so all you have to do is paste it into the source files for the Web page Creating Map Areas On the Image Mapper dialog use the tools in the Tools group box to create and edit the mapped areas To create a map area Tips 1 Ch File gt Export gt Image Mapper t the I M m Use the Pan tool drag the image sae aera Ag pper to open the Image Mapper in the preview to view hidden dialog areas of the Image 2 Choose the shape of a mapped area m Increase the size of the dialog to The Rectangle tool creates square or rectangular map areas the view more of the image in the preview area m Use the Zoom buttons to magnify a specific area of the 3 Do either of the following image Circle tool creates circular map areas and the Polygon tool creates map areas enclosed with multiple straight line segments m With the Rectangle or Circle tool click the image in the preview window not the original image and drag the cursor until the area you want map is enclosed m With the Polygon tool click the image in the preview window to set the starting point move the cursor to where you want the line to change directions and click the image Continue clicking new positions in the image to change the direction of the line To complete the polygon
229. eate a new raster layer click the New Raster Layer button Gj or choose Layers gt New Raster Layer To create a new vector layer click the New Vector Layer button ij or choose Layers gt New Vector Layer m To create a new mask layer click the New Mask Layer button or choose Layers gt New Mask Layer gt Show or Hide For information on mask show or hide layers see Creating New Mask Layers on page 290 m To create a new adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer and choose a type of adjustment layer For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 268 Chapter 11 Working with Layers More about background layers For more information see Background Layer on page 262 Copying all layers to another image Use the Browse window to copy all layers of an image into another image For more information see Copying One Image into Another Using the Browser on page 125 3 Edit the layer properties as desired and click OK For more information see Editing Layer Properties on page 270 The new layer is added above the active layer It is named with the type of layer and a number such as Vector Layer 1 To rename the layer see Renaming Layers on page 270 Promoting a Background Layer to a Regular Raster Layer When you want the background layer to function like a regular raster layer promote it to a layer Unlike the background
230. ect a command Cut Removes the selected contour to the Windows clipboard If the object has only one contour the command removes the entire object Copy Copies the selected contour to the Windows clipboard Paste Pastes a cut or copied contour into the current object Delete Deletes the selected contour Select All Ctrl A Selects all nodes in the path Select None Ctrl Shift A Deselects any selected nodes Invert Selection Ctrl I Selects all deselected nodes and deselects all selected nodes To delete a contour 1 2 3 4 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode IS Click on a contour then double click one node to select all nodes Press Delete or choose Edit gt Clear Note You cannot delete a path A path is deleted with its object or when all its contours are deleted 246 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects To move a path 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode ts 3 To select the path click on any contour in the path 4 To move all the contours in the object the path click and drag any contour To move a contour 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode I 3 Do one of the following Hold down Shift and move the cursor over the contour The cursor will display SUB Click and drag the contour Click on a con
231. ect a layer and set its blend mode See Blending Layers on page 274 2 Double click the layer name to open the Layer Properties dialog 3 Click the Blend Ranges tab 4 In the Blend Channel drop down list select a channel to use when blending layers Select Grey Channel to have the lightness values of layers determine opacity Select Red Channel Green Channel or Blue Channel to have the respective color values determine opacity 5 Set the opacity ramp for the channel as follows First drag the upper arrows to indicate the values at which the opacity is 100 percent Next drag the lower arrows to indicate the values at which the opacity is 0 percent Note that the values on the left side indicate the ramp up values while the values on the right side indicate the ramp down values For example in the graphic in the left column the selected layer s opacity is 100 percent between lightness values of 43 and 126 and falls off at the lightest and darkest areas 6 Click OK Paint Shop Pro applies the blend only to the pixels that fall within the range you selected The right panel of the Layer palette displays the Blend Range icon to indicate that a blend range is being used 278 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Protecting Transparent Areas To apply tools and effects only to areas of a raster layer with data use the Lock Transparency feature on the Layer palette Transparent areas remain protected when you pa
232. ects 243 resolution changing 138 retouch brushes 220 reversing contours 248 reversing paths 248 Revert command 127 RGB 104 107 adjusting 184 adjusting color channels 189 rotating images 140 Deform tool 141 Free Rotate 140 Straighten tool 142 rotating vector objects 244 rotation handle 244 rotation pivot point 244 rulers displaying 129 using 129 Index 433 S Salt and Pepper Filter 65 saturation 104 enhancing automatically 61 how to approach adjustments 53 improving in photographs 61 overview of correction options 61 Saturation Up Down brush 220 Save As dialog box 48 Save Copy As command 50 Saving 48 49 images for printing 357 saving an image 48 an image in a different file format 49 brush tip 214 copy of image 50 deformation map 148 gradients 101 layouts 365 masks 297 PNG files 348 using Autosave 47 scan line problems 62 scanned photographs with undesirable patterns 64 scanning images 38 Scratch Removal tool 75 scratches removing automatically 77 screen capture 41 area 43 capturing a screen 42 object 43 setting options 41 Scripting basics 378 changing Python Source editors 385 displaying Script toolbar 378 editing 384 Protected Script Mode 382 Python programming language 378 recording 380 running a script 380 434 Index saving 380 Script Output Window 379 Scripts Restricted folder 382 Scripts Trusted fo
233. ed For instructions see To change the resolution print size of an image on page 138 For best results Don t increase an image s size more than 25 percent Increasing the size of an image causes a loss of detail and sharpness m Only resize an image once If your first resize is not correct undo it and try again Correct and retouch images before resizing To increase or decrease the pixels in an image 1 Choose Image gt Resize Shift S to open the Resize dialog 2 To resize the current layer only clear the Resize all Layers check box 3 Mark the Resample using check box and select a resampling type Note Bilinear bicubic and weighted average resampling are available only for greyscale and 16 million color images Smart Size Use this type in most cases Based on the new pixel dimensions you set Paint Shop Pro chooses the best algorithm listed below Weighted Average Uses a weighted average color value of neighboring pixels to determine how newly created pixels will appear Use this type when reducing photo realistic irregular or complex images 138 Chapter 6 Editing Images Bilinear Uses the two nearest pixels around each existing pixel to determine how newly created pixels will appear Bicubic Minimizes the jaggedness that often results from expanding an image by estimating how the newly created pixels will appear Use this type when enlarging photo realistic irregular or complex images
234. ed Moir patterns Other patterns may come from scanning photographs printed on textured paper Paint Shop Pro s Moir Pattern Removal command removes these patterns from your images You can apply the command to a selection or an entire layer To remove moire patterns 1 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Moire Pattern Removal 2 Magnify the image in the preview window until you can see the fine patterns clearly 3 For Fine details select a value to remove fine patterns Change the value one number at a time until the pattern just disappears Higher values may blur the image so use the lowest value that removes the pattern 4 Reduce the image magnification until you can see bands or color blotches clearly in the preview window Bands or blotches may be visible when the image is at 100 but may be easier to see at smaller percentages 5 For Remove bands change the value one number at a time until any color bands or blotches are less visible they may not disappear completely Use the lowest value possible to avoid desaturation of small objects 6 Click OK Note After you have removed the Moir pattern you may be able to use the Sharpen commands to restore detail and remove blurriness without reintroducing the pattern This approach works best when you choose a Fine Details setting in the Moir Pattern Removal dialog that is slightly higher than needed to remove the pattern For more information on the Sharpen comman
235. ed channels The vertical axis represents the number of pixels and ranges from zero pixels to the highest number of pixels in the graph The horizontal axis represents the value from zero to 255 of a selected channel Red Green Blue Greyscale Hue Saturation and Lightness 202 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections For detailed information on the graph see Understanding Histogram Values on page 203 and Guidelines for Analyzing the Histogram on page 203 3 Mark or clear the check boxes below the graph to display or hide the values for the channels 4 Choose the image data that is graphed Sample merged If this check box is marked the histogram graphs all layers in the image If this check box is cleared the histogram graphs only the current layer Selection only If this check box is marked the histogram graphs only the active selection If the check box is cleared the histogram graphs the entire layer or image 5 Do one of the following To view information about a specific value place the cursor at that point on the histogram To select a range of values click and drag in the graph When you release the mouse the range is deselected These fields show information about the selected point or range Value s The value or range of values from 0 to 255 of the point over which the cursor is positioned in the graph in Range The percent of image pixels that are the value s of the selected
236. edo the program automatically selects all commands above it To undo or redo actions with the Command History 1 Choose Edit gt Command History 2 Select the actions you want to undo or redo Note You cannot select undo and redo commands at the same time 3 Click Undo or Redo Chapter 6 Editing Images 129 Repeating Commands To repeat multiple actions Record a script and run it on each image For more information on using scripts please see Scripting Basics on page 378 Another way to repeat actions Holding down Shift while selecting any toolbar button or menu item bypasses the dialog and runs the command with the last used setting Choose Edit gt Repeat to apply the same command to multiple images or to apply a command multiple times to the same image This command allows you to apply the same effect or correction without opening a dialog each time The last command that can be repeated always displays in the Edit menu If the previous command cannot be repeated the Repeat command is inactive To repeat a command Choose Edit gt Repeat or press Ctrl Y Using Rulers Grids and Guides Displaying rulers on an image Use the rulers grids and guides to align and arrange artwork and image elements Note You must save your image in PspImage format to save your grid and guide settings Using Rulers You can hide or display rulers By default rulers are hidden When the cursor is o
237. eferences Paint Shop Pro can automatically save all open images on a set schedule These autosaved files can help you recover your work if your computer crashes When Paint Shop Pro starts after a crash it will open any autosaved files it finds Note To find where Paint Shop Pro saves the autosaved files select File gt Preferences gt File Locations and select the Undo Temporary Files folder from the File Type list To set the autosave preferences 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt Autosave Settings to open the Autosave dialog 2 Set the options Enable autosave Mark this check box to activate the autosave feature Minutes Set the number of minutes between each autosave 410 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Setting File Format Preferences You can specify how PSP handles images in the following formats Kodak PhotoCD PostScript RAW and Windows Meta File Setting Kodak PhotoCD Preferences The Kodak PhotoCD format PCD is used by many photo developers This format can provide multiple image resolutions in one file To set PCD file format preferences 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Format Preferences to open the File Format Preferences dialog 2 Click the PCD tab 3 Choose A default resolution setting For example 1536 x 1204 pixels m Ask when loading each file PSP will ask you to pick a default resolution each time you open a PCD file 4 Click OK Setting Postscript File
238. elect everything outside the original selection 7 Click the Load button The selection displays on the current layer Deleting Selections from Alpha Channels If you saved selections to alpha channels that you no longer need you can delete them You can delete alpha channels from the current image only To delete an alpha channel 1 Choose Image gt Delete Alpha Channel to open the Delete Alpha Channel dialog 2 Select the alpha channel that you want to delete or mark the Delete all alpha channels check box 3 Click Delete 180 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images CHAPTER amp Making Color and Tonal Corrections Contents Paint Shop Pro provides advanced and flexible commands that aid in color corrections and create dramatic effects Start your corrections with Paint Shop Pro s automatic commands and then use the advanced correction commands if your images still need adjusting For an introduction to color and tonal corrections see How to Approach Color Contrast and Saturation Adjustments on page 53 For an overview of steps that help you improve your photographs see Basic Steps in Improving Photographs on page 52 Key Points to Know Before Making Corrections 182 How Corrections Relate to Color Depth 005 183 Adjusting the Color Balance ce ee 184 Adjusting Brightness and Contrast uaaa cece ee 190 Replacing Colls Gudea egies eda eer epee na ees eee 196
239. elected layer becomes part of the layer group By default the layer group is named Group with a number for example Group 1 3 To add a layer to the layer group click its name and drag it into the layer group A black line shows the position until you release the mouse button Note You can also add a layer group within a layer group called a nested group To remove a layer from the group Drag the layer to a new position outside the layer group or choose Layers gt Arrange gt Move Out of Group To ungroup layers Select the layer group that you want to ungroup and then choose Layers gt Ungroup Layers Linking Layers and Layer Groups Use layer linking to have layers move together on the image canvas when you move one layer with the Move tool To link individual layers use the Layer Link button on the Layer palette By default this button says None Change each layer that you want to link to the same number say 1 or 2 Left click to increase the number right click to decrease it An image with a linked group and linked layers Layer Link button Does linking affect the stacking order No Linking affects only movements within the image Canvas using the Move tool The only way to move layers together in the stacking order is to group them When you move a group layer in the stacking order all layers move regardless of whether the group is linked or not Chapter 11 Working wit
240. emove the selection Note Use the Expand or Select Similar commands to add to the selection See Modifying Selections on page 167 You can now edit the contents of the selection move it copy it paint in it correct colors apply effects etc The selection remains active until you make another selection or right click to deselect it Versatile Object Selector In addition to selecting vector objects use the Object Selection tool to m Move resize reshape and rotate vector objects and vector text m Align and distribute vector objects m Group and ungroup vector objects m Apply Edit menu commands Such as copying and pasting For more information see Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects To de selecting all To undo the Select All command choose Selections gt Select None Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 161 Selecting Vector Objects To edit a vector object such as a Preset Shape or vector text you must first select the object with the Object Selection tool You can select one or several objects on the same layer or on different layers You can also select vector objects from the Layer palette To select vector objects with the Object Selection tool 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool el 2 Do one of the following m Click the object you want to select To select multiple objects press Shift and click on each additional object Drag the cursor to c
241. en The right panel displays thumbnails of image files located in the selected folder 3 Select files using one of these methods Click a thumbnail image To select more than one file press Ctrl and click each file To select sequential files click the first file press Shift and click the last file Note To deselect a file press Ctrl and click its thumbnail 4 Open the selected file s using one of these methods Double click a single file s thumbnail or Ctrl double click one thumbnail when multiple files are selected Select a file or multiple files and then drag them onto a blank part of the work space Press Enter Right click and select Open from the context menu m Choose Image File gt Open After the file or files open you can close the Browse window by clicking its Close button or leave the Browse window open in the work space To open a recently used file Choose File gt Recent Files and then choose the file name By default the Recent Files menu lists four recently used files You can include up to 10 files For more information see Miscellaneous Preferences on page 400 32 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Creating Images About Raster and Vector Graphics Computer graphics are of two types raster also called bitmap or vector With Paint Shop Pro you create both raster and vector images You can also create an image with both raster and vector layers It s
242. ent End Start Node Line Segments Drawing Objects Use the drawing tool to draw single lines freehand lines Bezier curves and point to point lines as raster objects on raster layers or vector objects on vector layers When you use the Drawing too in vector mode the objects can be moved deformed and edited after they are created without affecting the rest of the image To select a drawing tool On the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool or the Preset Shapes tool 230 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Corner Join Types Round Line Miter Bevel Setting Line Options Before you begin drawing an object set the line options The line options control how the lines of your object will appear You can also adjust the line options of existing vector objects The following options appear on the Tool Options palette for the Pen tool and Preset Shape tool Note To see all of the options you may need to click the More button e at the end of the Tool Options palette Line Style Sets line style such as solid or dashed To create your own line styles see Creating Custom Line Styles on page 235 Width Sets the line width from 0 5 to 255 pixels Note To draw shapes with no line set the foreground color in the Materials palette to transparent Join Sets the type of corners for the path Miter Produces mitered pointed corners when the width of the corner is within the Miter Limit va
243. ent layer to open the Properties dialog and click the Reset to Default button e 5 Modify the settings on the Adjustment tab and then click OK The adjustment layer is added just above the previously selected layer About Adjustment Layer Types Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections describes in detail each type of adjustment layer The table shows specific sections to refer to within that chapter Type of Correction Adjust color balance Adjust brightness and contrast Reduce or remove colors Adjustment Layer Color Balance Hue Saturation Lightness Channel Mixer Brightness Contrast Curves Levels Invert Threshhold Posterize For More Information See Changing the Color Balance of Shadows Midtones and Highlights on page 185 See Adjusting the Hue Saturation and Lightness in Unison on page 186 See Adjusting the Color Channels on page 189 See Manually Adjusting Brightness and Contrast on page 191 See Adjusting Individual Brightness Values on page 192 See Adjusting the Lightness Levels on page 195 See Creating Negative Images on page 200 See Creating Black and White Images on page 198 See Reducing the Number of Lightness Levels on page 199 How to delete an adjustment layer Delete an adjustment layer just as you do any other type of layer Click the layer name and then click the Delete Layer button o
244. entire active image or to view image information The Overview palette displays a rectangle over the part of the image visible in the image window To show other areas of the image click and drag this rectangle The Overview palette contains two tabs Preview Displays the image preview The image updates after you complete an action Transparent areas of the image appear as white Info Displays image status information including height and width color depth memory used cursor position rotation and other information Using Context Menus Context menus provide quick access to commands specific to the active tool selection or palette Note For a complete list of Context menus choose View gt Customize to open the Customize dialog Click the Menu tab and select a context menu from the Select context menu drop down list To use a context menu 1 Position the cursor over an image an empty area of a palette a layer name on the Layers palette a thumbnail in the Browser or a toolbar 2 Right click to display the context menu 3 Choose a command from the menu 20 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Viewing Images An image window Does the image have a watermark If the image has an embedded watermark a copyright symbol is displayed in front of its name For more information on watermarks see Using Digital Watermarks on page 351 Save time by saving workspaces Did you Know that you can sa
245. er the file before it opens in Paint Shop Pro add plug in locations Choose File gt Preferences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog From the File types list select Plug ins Click the Add button A new blank item will appear in the folder list Type the full path name of the folder you want to add or click the Browse button to find and select the folder Set the options and settings for listed folders Enable Directory Es Mark this check box to have Paint Shop Pro search for plug ins in this folder Scan Subfolders Mark this check box to have Paint Shop Pro search the folders inside the folder Subfolders will not be scanned unless the Enable Directory check box is marked Click OK Another way to select Web browsers Select View gt Preview in Web Browser to open the Preview in Web Browser dialog Click the Edit Web Browser button Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 407 Selecting a Web Browser Paint Shop Pro allows you to preview your images with Web browsers Use the File Locations dialog to select which browser s to use To delete or edit Web browsers 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog From the File types list select Web Browsers Select a browser from the list Click Edit to change the browsers location or Delete to remove the browser from the list Click OK To add Web browsers 1 Choose File gt Pref
246. er 15 Using the Web Tools Saving and Loading the Map Settings When you save the map settings you save the map area arrangement and the information you entered in the Image Mapper dialog You can then re load the settings into the same image or use the settings with a different image To save the map settings 1 In the Image Mapper dialog click the Save Settings As button to open the Save Map Settings dialog 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the settings file The file is saved in the JMD format 3 Type a name for the file and click Save To load the map settings 1 Open the image in which you want to load map settings 2 Choose File gt Export gt Image Mapper to open the Image Mapper dialog 3 Click the Load Settings button to open the Load Map Settings dialog 4 Navigate to and select the JMD file you want to load 5 Click Open Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 335 Saving an Image Map to the Clipboard Save map settings to the clipboard so you can paste them into the HTML code To save an image map to the clipboard 1 In the Image Mapper dialog click the Save to Clipboard button to open the HTML Destination Folder dialog 2 Navigate to the folder where the HTML file is saved and click OK to open the Image Map Save as dialog 3 Navigate to the folder where the image file is saved and click Save 4 Open the HTML file place the cursor where you want to insert the HTML map code an
247. er and Blur settings to make the new eyes look more natural About manual eye correction methods For both the Pupil Outline methods select the pupil the small dark circle at the eye s center not the entire eye These methods correct red pupils on humans and animals but do not correct human irises you ll notice the Hue option for setting the iris hue is not available Typically red eye effect is confined to the pupil so with these manual methods you can correct the red pupil Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 73 4 From the Method drop down list select a correction method Auto Human Eye Automatically selects the correction area using a circular selection and chooses settings appropriate to a human eye If you are correcting human eyes even partially obscured ones try this method first Auto Animal Eye Automatically selects the correction area using a circular or elliptical selection area and chooses settings appropriate to an animal eye You can also rotate the selection with this method If you are correcting animal eyes try this method first Freehand Pupil Outline Manually select the correction area on human or animal eyes using a Freehand Selection tool Use this method for difficult situations such as a partially obscured pupil Point to Point Pupil Outline Manually select the correction area on human or animal eyes using a Point to Point Selection tool Use this method for difficult situations such a
248. er created from a selection The Layers menu has the same Matting commands as the Selections menu For more information see Cleaning up the Edges of Layers Created from Selections on page 282 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 171 6 In the Softness edit box specify the amount of softness for the referenced color 7 Click OK The selection borders change to add or exclude the color you specified Cleaning Up the Edges of a Selection When you move or copy a Selection some of the pixels surrounding the border are included especially when the selection is anti aliased or feathered Matting cleans up the border by removing these pixels There are three Matting commands Remove Black Matte Remove White Matte and Defringe Use the Remove Black Matte or Remove White Matte command when the selection is from an image with a black or white background These commands remove the black or white pixels at the selection edges Use the Defringe command when the selection is from an image with a colored background Defringing bleeds non feathered pixels in the selection edges outward and over the jaggies in the feathered part of the selection To use a Matting command 1 If the selection is not floating choose Selections gt Float 2 Do one of the following To remove the black matte choose Layers gt Matting gt Remove Black Matte To remove the white matte choose Layers gt Matting gt Remove White Mat
249. er of lightness levels in the image and create interesting effects With this command Paint Shop Pro divides the range of lightness levels from 2 to 255 into a number of equal increments that you specify As you lower the number you increase the effect To use the Posterize command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Do one of the following To modify the image pixels directly choose Effects gt Artistic Effects gt Posterize 200 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections To create a Posterize adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Posterize For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 3 In the Level edit box select the number of lightness levels 2 to 255 for the adjusted image To create a dramatic effect the number of levels typically must be below 10 4 Click OK Creating Negative Images In Paint Shop Pro there are three ways to create a negative image Color depth which looks like a photographic negative To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image Use the Negative Image command to replace each pixel color with its opposite on the color wheel You can also use the otherwise the command is applied Negative Image command to create a positive image from a to the entire image scanned photographic
250. er window To rotate files 1 Select the files that you want to rotate 2 Choose ImageFile gt JPEG Lossless Rotation and then choose an option to rotate the selected files 46 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Updating Thumbnails When you open a folder in the Browser Paint Shop Pro creates thumbnails for all supported graphic images and stores them in a file called PspBrwse jbf Every folder you have opened in the Browser has a copy of this thumbnail file Paint Shop Pro uses this file to display thumbnails more quickly each time you open a folder The default preference setting is to have the thumbnails file update automatically every time you open the folder To change this preference see Browser Preferences on page 397 Occasionally you may want to update the thumbnails with the Update Thumbnails command For example if you have used Windows Explorer to delete or add a file in a folder you can choose File gt Update Thumbnails or press F5 to update the thumbnails file You can also open the folder again in the Browser for Paint Shop Pro to update it automatically After a thumbnail file is created new files are appended to the end of the thumbnails list To sort the list alphabetically or by other characteristics choose File gt Sort Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 47 Saving Image Files Always save a Psplmage version of your file To be able to use all Paint Shop Pro fea
251. erences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog From the File types list select Web Browsers Click Add to open the Browser Information dialog Type the full path name of the Web browser you want to add or click the Browse button to find and select the program Type a different name in the Web Browser Name field if desired and Click OK Click OK Setting File Format Associations File format associations control how Paint Shop Pro will interact with many types of file formats 408 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro What if want to open a file in another program When you associate a file format with Paint Shop Pro you can still open that format in other programs ust use the other program s Open command Adding and Removing Associations You can have certain file formats automatically open in Paint Shop Pro For example when you associate the JPEG file format with Paint Shop Pro all JPEG files will open in Paint Shop Pro when you double click them from the Windows desktop The associated JPEG files will also display Paint Shop Pro icons To associate a file with Paint Shop Pro 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Format Associations to open the File Format Associations dialog Do any of the following To associate a specific file format mark the format s check box To associate all listed formats click the Select All button To associate all listed formats that are not a
252. ert 167 Load Save Selection Load Selection from Alpha Channel 178 Save Selection to Disk 176 Load Save Selections Load Selection from Disk 177 Save Selection to Alpha Channel 177 Modify Contract 169 Expand 168 Feather 169 Inside Outside Feather 170 Remove Specks and Holes 172 Select Selection Borders 174 Select Similar 168 Shape Based Anti alias 173 Smooth 172 Unfeather 170 Promote to Layer 175 Recover Anti alias 173 Select All 163 Select None 163 sepia tone images 199 shape libraries 234 shape based anti alias 173 sharing brush Presets 214 images using a photo sharing service 328 images via e mail 328 Sharpen brush 220 Sharpen command 80 Sharpen More command 80 shear 243 Shortcut keys 28 assigning 416 customizing 28 viewing all 417 simple mode 232 slicing an image 337 Smart Edge 157 Smudge brush 220 snapping to grids and guides 133 Soft Focus command 68 Soften brush 220 Soften command 68 Soften More command 68 Solarize command 201 source colors 55 source defects removing 64 source defects removing 62 specks and holes 172 spray can 208 Stacking order 259 265 standard colors using for manual color correction 57 Standard Colors category 57 Standard palette 116 Index 435 Straighten tool 142 Stretch command 191 Stroke Width 306 style buttons 83 swatches 96 changing display of 97 creating new 96 deleting 97 editin
253. es disabled in the Web browser This text also appears as a ToolTip in some versions of Internet Explorer 4 In the Target box select the target frame or window in which you want the image to open _blank Loads the linked page in a new browser window _parent Loads the linked page in the parent window or frameset of the link If the link is not in a nested frame the image loads in the full browser window _self Loads the linked page in the same window or frame as the link _top Loads the linked page in the full browser window and removes all frames 5 To omit the cell from the downloaded image clear the Include cell in table check box No image will be saved for that cell By default this check box is marked and the cell appears in the image 6 To assign a rollover to a map area click the Rollover Creator button For more information see Creating Image Rollovers on page 336 Setting Slice Preferences In the Slice Preferences dialog select new colors for the border lines of the active and inactive areas and enter the number of entries URL and Alt text drop down lists display 1 In the Image Mapper dialog click the Preferences button to open the Slice Preferences dialog 2 For the Active tile border color click the color box and choose a color 3 For the Inactive tile border color click the color box and choose a color 4 For the Maximum history list enter the number of entries stored in the URL and Alt t
254. es so that all Paint Shop Pro commands are available When you are ready to save the images use the GIF optimizer or JPEG optimizer which automatically decreases the color depth in the saved image but doesn t change the color depth or layers of your original PspImage file Depending upon the current color depth of your image you can decrease its color depth to the following 2 colors 1 bit Converts to a black and white image and drastically reduces file size See Decreasing Color Depth to 2 Colors 1 bit on page 111 16 colors 4 bit Converts to a color image with very limited colors Use this option if your image uses a small number of colors and you want a smaller file size See Decreasing Color Depth to 16 Colors 4 Bit on page 112 256 colors 8 bit Converts to a color image that works well for on screen viewing when your image will be viewed on a variety of monitor types This is a helpful color depth for images viewed on the Web See Decreasing Color Depth to 256 Colors 8 Bit on page 113 32K or 64K colors 24 bit Converts to 32 000 or 64 000 colors within a 24 bit image For images viewed on older monitors this color depth results in better refresh rates See Decreasing Color Depth to 32K or 64K Colors 24 Bit on page 114 X colors Converts to a color image with a number of colors that you specify from 2 to 256 This color depth can produce smaller file sizes and faster download times for
255. ess Ctrl Flipping a selection converts it into a floating selection leaving the original layer unchanged To mirror a selection layer or image Choose Image gt Mirror or press Ctrl M Mirroring a selection converts it into a floating selection leaving the original layer unchanged Combining Two Images Paint Shop Pro can combine two images into a third image The new image is the product of the color data from the two source images The color data from the two images is combined on a pixel by pixel basis according to the function you select To combine two images 1 Open the two images you want to combine 2 Choose Image gt Arithmetic to open the Image Arithmetic dialog 3 Choose an image for Image 1 from the drop down list The size of Image 1 determines the size of the new image 4 Choose an image for Image 2 from the drop down list 152 Chapter 6 Editing Images 5 From the Function group box select a method for combining the images Add Image 1 Value Image 2 Value Subtract Image Value Image 2 Value Multiply Image 1 Value x Image 2 Value Difference Absolute Value of Image 1 Value Image 2 Value Lightest Maximum of Image 1 Value Image 2 Value Darkest Minimum of Image 1 Value Image 2 Value Average Image 1 value Image 2 Value 2 OR Binary Or AND Binary And XOR Binary And Or From the Channel group box select the color channel from each image to use for combination Mark the All ch
256. et of all the colors your computer can display The palette varies from 2 to 256 colors depending upon the color depth of your image With these images you must choose foreground and background colors from the palette rather than from the Jasc Color Picker Note If you select the Rainbow Picker as your preference setting the Available Colors panel of the Materials palette shows all colors for both paletted and non paletted 16 million color images For paletted images when you select a color on the Available Colors panel Paint Shop Pro chooses the nearest color in the palette For more information on the Rainbow Picker see Display and Caching Preferences on page 395 To choose colors from the palette 1 On the Materials palette do one of the following Tochoose the foreground color click the Foreground Color or Foreground Material box To choose the background color click the Background Color or Background Material box Clicking a Color box opens the Color dialog and displays the palette Clicking a Material box opens the Material dialog click the Color tab to display the palette 2 In the Sort order drop down list select the way the colors are sorted Palette in order by the way the palette stores the colors Hue in order by color or Luminance in order by lightness 3 Click the desired color The color s index number within the palette color value RGB or HSL and HTML code are displayed 4 Click OK
257. etting all three values to 255 produces white setting all three values to 0 produces black When all three colors are set to the same value such as 120 120 120 the result is grey HSL Model The HSL model is based on how the human eye perceives color using the characteristics of hue saturation and lightness Each characteristic is assigned a value from O to 255 The three characteristics are described as follows Hue The color reflected from an object such as red yellow or orange Each hue value is assigned based on its position on the color wheel On the Jasc Color Picker s color wheel colors are assigned counter clockwise from the top Red is at the top value 0 and as you move around the wheel the colors go through orange yellow green blue purple and back to red Saturation The purity or vividness of the color Saturation represents the amount of grey in the color from 0 entirely grey to 255 fully saturated color Lightness The perceived amount or intensity of light in the color Lightness ranges from 0 no light or black to 255 total lightness or white At 50 percent lightness or a value of 128 a color is considered pure For example pure red has a hue of 255 a saturation of 255 100 percent and a lightness of 128 50 percent For pure blue the hue is 170 saturation is 255 and lightness is 128 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 105 CMYK Model The CMYK model is based on the fact tha
258. ew the HTML Hypertext Markup Language code for each color you select You can also specify a color by entering the HTML code Note By default Paint Shop Pro displays decimal base 10 numbers in the Jasc Color Picker You can also display hexadecimal base 16 numbers the format of HTML color codes For more information see Display and Caching Preferences on page 395 To specify or view HTML code for colors The HTML code for the color l l true red RGB 255 0 0 in the 1 Display the Jasc Color Picker See To display the Jasc Color Jasc Color Picker Picker on page 87 Hexadecimal symbol 2 Do one of the following To specify a color using its HTML code type the code in the HTML edit box To view the HTML code of a particular color choose a color by other methods such as entering RGB values or selecting from the color wheel and then view the number in HTML edit box HTML 3 j FFOOOC Red Blue Green Selecting colors from the image palette Color D Gradient 4 Pattern Palette index 137 Color F 249 G 203 B 49 HTML F9CB31 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 89 Choosing Colors from the Image Palette Images that have a color depth less than 24 bit 16 million colors are called paletted images the available colors are a subs
259. ewing Image Information on page 24 prog Eam Tools toolbar Crop paint draw type and perform other image editing tasks See Using the Tools on page 18 Paint Shop Pro contains these toolbars Standard toolbar Displays the most common commands such as saving images undoing a command and cutting items Paint Shop Pro automatically displays this toolbar when you first run the Browser toolbar Displays commands for using the Paint Shop Pro Browser Effects toolbar Displays commands for applying effects to your images Photo toolbar Displays commands for enhancing photos Customizing toolbars You can add and remove buttons from toolbars and create yourown Web toolbar Displays commands for creating and saving images for toolbars For more information see the Web Customizing Toolbars and Menus on page 412 Script toolbar Displays commands for creating and running scripts To execute a toolbar command Click the command button If the button is greyed out it is not available To display or hide a toolbar Flyout menu displaying toolbars Do either of the following Y d afe i he C2 Aea Choose View gt Toolbars and choose the toolbar from the menu iubiri m Right click any toolbar or palette choose Toolbars and then choose the toolbar from the context menu Note To hide a specific toolbar or the palette click the close button on its title bar 16 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The
260. ext drop down lists 5 Mark the Prompt for image folder on Save or Save As check box to indicate that you want to be prompted for a file location and name for your slices when you save the HTML code 340 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 6 Click OK Saving and Loading Slice Settings When you save the slice settings you save the cell arrangement and the information you entered in the Image Slicer dialog You can then re load the settings into the same image or use them with a different image To save the slice settings 1 In the Image Mapper dialog click the Save Settings button to open the Save Slice Settings dialog 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the settings file The file is saved in the JSD format 3 Type a name for the file and click Save To load the slice settings 1 In the Image Mapper dialog click the Load Settings button to open the Load Slice Settings dialog 2 Select the JSD file you want to load and click Open If you are loading a grid to a different image Paint Shop Pro automatically adjusts the grid size if the dimensions of the image are not the same Saving Image Slices to the Clipboard Save slice settings to the clipboard so you can paste them into your HTML code To save Image Slices to the clipboard 1 In the Image Slicer dialog click the Save to Clipboard button to open the HTML Destination Folder dialog 2 Navigate to the folder where the HTML file is saved and
261. extures can be applied at the same time as styles solid color gradient or pattern That means you can have both a pattern and a texture selected at the same time Working with Swatches Swatches are materials that you can save to use again For example if you create a material that is a certain shade of green with a fog texture you can save it as a swatch Swatches are displayed on the Swatches tab of the Materials palette To create a new swatch 1 On the Materials palette click the Swatches tab E3 2 Click the Create New Swatch button B You can also click the More Options button C1 and choose New Swatch 3 Type a name for the swatch This name appears as a ToolTip when you hold the cursor over the swatch on the Materials palette 4 Press Enter to open the Material dialog The Swatches tab of the Materials palette Materials EJ Swatches tab Delete button New Swatch More Options button button View button 5 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 97 Select the style color gradient or pattern and the texture for the material Click OK To select a swatch 1 2 On the Materials palette click the Swatches tab E Do one of the following To select a swatch as the foreground material left click the swatch you want to use To select a swatch as the background material right click the swatch you want to use To edit a swatch 1 2 On the Materials palette click the
262. fault each brush stroke over the same area applies more paint the color darkens until it reaches 100 opacity Click the New Stroke button to cancel the effect for all previous brush strokes Only new brush strokes will darken if you paint over them 7 Undoing paint strokes When you are applying paint strokes the Undo command can be your best friend To remove the most recent stroke click the Undo button or press Ctrl Z To undo multiple brush strokes press Ctrl Z multiple times or choose Edit gt Command History If you undo too many strokes click the Redo button or press Ctrl Alt Z Chapter 9 Painting 209 Wet Look Paint Mimics wet paint with soft color inside and a darker ring near the edge Decrease the Hardness setting from its maximum of 100 to see the effect Drag in the image to paint as follows For all painting tools to apply the foreground material drag with the left mouse button For all painting tools to apply the background material drag with the right mouse button For all painting tools to paint a straight line click once at the beginning point then press Shift and click the end point To continue the straight line move to the next point and press Shift and click For the Airbrush to build up color in one area click and hold the mouse at one position Creating Brush Tips You can create your own brush tips to use with painting tools Select Brush tips versus tool a
263. from CMYK 3 For each Channel source drop down list select the name of the file that contains that channel For example in the Combine RGB dialog you might select the file Red1 as the red channel source Note If you are combining channels that you split with the Split Channels command mark the Sync check box to have Paint Shop Pro automatically fill in the Channel Source boxes with matching file names 4 Click OK Paint Shop Pro displays a new image file that combines the color channels you selected 108 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Understanding Color Depth The color depth is the third number in the Status bar here 16 million colors Image 1208 x 1500 x 16 million Color depth also called bit depth refers to the number of colors each pixel and therefore its image can display As the color depth increases the number of colors an image can display increases Each pixel s color information is stored in a certain number of computer bits from 1 bit to 24 bits In a 1 bit image each pixel can display only one of two colors black or white In a 24 bit image each pixel can display one of 16 million colors 274 or 2 colors for each bit Images with a color depth of 16 million colors look best because they contain the most colors but they also require the most memory to store and edit In Paint Shop Pro you can create 2 color 1 bit 16 color 4 bit greyscale 8 bit 256 color 8 bit and 16 mil
264. g 97 renaming 97 selecting 97 Swatches tab 82 symmetric perspective 243 system requirements 6 7 target colors 55 Technical Support 9 template delete 368 template cells editing 369 templates fill template with image 367 new template 369 opening 366 printing 366 remove image 368 revert to layout 369 saving with images 365 text adding to images 304 align on path 312 alignment 306 anti alias 306 applying effects 309 auto kern 306 convert to curves 313 creating 304 editing 308 floating raster 305 formatting 306 kerning 307 leading 307 436 Index make path invisible 311 moving 307 on a path 310 remember text 304 scale 309 selection 305 size 306 stroke width 306 transform 309 type style 306 types of 305 vector 305 with patterns 310 Text tool 154 162 304 texture button 83 Texture effects 321 Texture Perserving Smooth command 68 textures choosing 94 creating new 95 Threshold command 198 to 345 Toolbars adding a separator to 414 adding BoundScripts to 382 adding commands or tools 413 creating custom 415 customizing 412 deleting custom 415 displaying 413 executing commands 15 hiding and displaying 15 removing a separator from 414 removing commands or tools from 414 resetting all 414 resetting specific 414 using 15 Tools setting options 18 using 18 transparency button 83 transparent GIF files 342 P
265. g Copying and Pasting on page 124 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 45 To copy files 1 Press Ctrl Y or right click the thumbnail and select Copy To from the context menu 2 Select the folder to copy the file to 3 Click OK To paste files to other applications that support OLE functions Press Alt and click the file s thumbnail drag it to the application s button in the Window task bar until the application opens then move the cursor to the application and release the mouse button You can paste images into any applications that support meta files DIBs and BMPs such as Microsoft Word If the image has more than one layer all layers are automatically merged To move files Do one of the following m Click the file s thumbnail and drag it to a different folder in the left pane of the Browse window You can also select several thumbnails and drag them to a new folder m Select the file or files then press Ctrl M or right click the thumbnail and choose Move To from the context menu At the Browse for Folder dialog select the desired folder and click OK To delete files 1 Select the file or files you want to delete 2 Press Ctrl Delete or right click the file s thumbnail and select Delete from the context menu To find files 1 Choose File gt Find Name to open the Find dialog 2 Enter the search criterial and click Find Next or Find All to display the search results in the Brows
266. g Center shows you how to use Paint Shop Pro s features to create amazing photographic enhancements and sophisticated graphics Jasc and third party tutorials walk you through the steps for everything from restoring old photographs to creating metallic text To access the Jasc Software Learning Center browse to www jasc com learncenter asp Or go to Jasc com click the Support tab and select Learning Center Getting in Touch with Other Paint Shop Pro Users Millions of people use and love Paint Shop Pro There are many independent non Jasc Paint Shop Pro communities where users share tips and tricks ask questions and get answers about Paint Shop Pro There are Websites newsgroups and chatrooms devoted to Paint Shop Pro As a starting point search online for Paint Shop Pro One popular newsgroup is the Usenet newsgroup comp graphics apps paint shop pro which you can access using your favorite news reader With Paint Shop Pro you have many options for getting help with the software you can use the Help system contact Jasc Technical Support check out our web based resources or refer to the README html file that was installed with Paint Shop Pro for the latest information about the software Using the Help System Paint Shop Pro s Help system complements this user guide To use help choose Help gt Contents and Index or press F1 Most dialogs also have a Help button click it to display context sensitive help
267. g Geometric Effects The geometric effects include such effects as turning an image into a sphere or cylinder and altering an image s perspective To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Geometric Effects and select an effect Note These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Applying Illumination Effects The illumination effects apply a sunburst or spotlights to images To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Illumination Effects and select an effect Note These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system 320 Chapter 14 Applying Effects Example of an Image effect Example of a Reflection effect Applying Image Effects The Image effects are Offset Page Curl and Seamless Tiling To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt
268. g to 133 using 131 H halos in JPEG images 63 help Help system 8 Technical Support 9 viewing the Product Tour 7 Index 427 highlights midtones shadows adjusting 194 Histogram 190 correcting images using 204 displaying 201 guidelines for analyzing 203 understanding values 203 using to analyze images 201 holes and specks removing from a selection 172 hollow shapes creating 248 HSL 107 hue and saturation adjusting using Hue Map 196 colorizing 197 Hue Map command 196 Hue Up Down brush 220 Illumination effects 319 image adding borders 150 adding effects 315 changing resolution 138 color and lightness 356 color palette 117 correcting faded 59 correcting perspective 145 cropping 134 decreasing color depth 111 deforming 143 deleting 127 effects 320 embedding a digital watermark 352 increasing color depth 109 information 24 previewing in Web browsers 330 resizing 137 rotating 140 saving 48 saving a copy 50 saving for printing 357 saving with new format 49 warping 146 Image menu Add Borders 150 Arithmetic 151 323 428 Index Count Colors Used 108 Count Image Colors 109 Delete Alpha Channel 179 Flip 151 Greyscale 199 Image Information 108 Palette Edit Palette 117 Load Palette 118 Save Palette 118 Set Palette Transparency 120 Picture Frame 322 Resize 137 image negatives 200 image perspective correcting 145 image problems JP
269. g with Text Creating Text Use the Text tool to create text on an image Choose text colors on Text in images the Materials palette and text options on the Tool Options palette then click in the image and enter text in the Text Entry dialog Jasc Software To create text 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Text tool A 2 On the Materials palette choose the foreground material as the text outline and the background material as the text fill the area within characters See Basics of Using the Materials palette on page 84 For standard text with no outline set the Stroke width on the Tool Options palette to 0 or click the Foreground Material box s Transparent button For hollow text click the Background Material box s Transparent button 8 3 On the Tool Options palette in the Create as drop down list choose the type of text Vector Selection or Floating For more information see About Vector Floating and Selection Text on page 305 4 Choose the text formatting options such as font point size stroke width and alignment See Formatting Text on page 306 5 Click in the image where you want to place the text The Text Entry dialog opens 6 Type the text As you type in the dialog the text displays on the image To add a line break press Enter 7 To change any of the text formatting options in the Text Entry dialog highlight the words or characters that you want to change and then make c
270. ge areas Blur Blends the eye with surrounding pixels when the photo has a grainy appearance Increase the setting one unit at a time until the eye blends naturally with the rest of the image Removing Scratches with the Scratch Remover Tool The Scratch Remover tool is one way to remove scratches cracks and other defects from your images Use the tool to enclose the area with the scratch and erase it The tool works best for scratches on relatively smooth backgrounds Note This tool can be used only on backgrounds it is not available when you are working on layers If there are many small scratches in the image use the Automatic Small Scratch Remover command See Removing Scratches with the Automatic Small Scratch Removal Command on page 77 To use the Scratch Remover tool 1 If necessary click the background layer on the Layer palette 2 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 This step works well when you need to be careful not to remove important details near the scratch 3 Select the Scratch Remover tool W 76 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 4 On the Tool Options palette set the following options Width The width in pixels of the tool Choose a width that is about 3 or 4 pixels wider than the scratch If the width is considerably larger than the scratch you will lose image detail Selection boxes The shape of the Scratch Remover t
271. ge in the JPEG format 348 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools Optimizing PNG Files Paint Shop Pro provides a PNG Optimizer feature to assist you in saving PNG files that maximize quality while minimizing file size To optimize and save a PNG file 1 Choose File gt Export gt PNG Optimizer to open the PNG Optimizer dialog The preview windows show the current image on the left and the resulting PNG file on the right 2 Do one of the following Configure the settings on the Colors Transparency and Format tabs and view estimated download times on the Download Times tab For more information see Choosing PNG Optimizer Settings below m Click the Use Wizard button to let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process Choosing PNG Optimizer Settings The PNG Optimizer dialog contains three tabs where you configure the color transparency and format options of the file The fourth page displays estimated download times of the image at various modem speeds PNG Optimizer Colors Tab Use this tab to select a color depth for your PNG image and for paletted images the method of color reduction number of colors and amount of dithering 1 Select the image type to determine whether the saved image is Palette Based 256 colors or less Greyscale 8 bit or 16 million color 24 bit Remember that a 24 bit image is larger and takes more time to download than an 8 bit image If you want to use the Alpha Transparency opti
272. ge the mask with the layer click Yes Paint Shop Pro merges the layers and deletes the mask layer To remove the mask from the image without affecting the underlying layer click No Paint Shop Pro deletes the mask layer Deleting Masks from Alpha Channels If you saved selections to alpha channels that you no longer need you can delete them Delete alpha channels from the current image only To delete an alpha channel 1 Choose Image gt Delete Alpha Channel to open the Delete Alpha Channel dialog 2 Select the alpha channel that you want to delete or mark the Delete all alpha channels check box 3 Click Delete 302 Chapter 12 Working with Masks CHAPTER E Working with Text Contents Create both raster and vector text and edit vector text using the Text tool Choose the font style size and color of the text Apply any of Paint Shop Pro s effects making text in your images stand out CleauiG Ox cteteeaua haters a et aaeeee cade 304 Formatting Texts aaeaes Gorges teres seceuererusaariee 306 MOVING TEXT kod cone oe hes en de a Ge oad oe ork eee 307 EUNT TOE eo ba a ea aee ow ee arene ede Se ew ace ay oe eae 308 Scaling and Transforming Text ccc eee ee eee 309 Applying Effects to TOXUs 6s sce ca wake were Yeo we Pes 309 Creating Text with Image Patterns cc 310 Creating Texton Object Paths cee ee 310 Converting Textto Curves ouaaa 313 303 304 Chapter 13 Workin
273. ge to open the Defringe dialog Enter the number of pixels to defringe and press Enter Deleting Layers or their Contents To remove a layer from an image delete the entire layer Or delete the contents of a layer to keep the layer within the image raster and vector layers become transparent and the background layer is filled with the current background color and material To delete a layer 1 On the Layer palette click the name of the layer you want to delete Chapter 11 Working with Layers 283 2 Click the Delete Layer button on the Layer palette toolbar right click and choose Delete from the context menu or drag the layer to the Delete Layer button W To delete the contents of a layer 1 On the Layer palette click the name of the layer 2 Press the Delete key or choose Edit gt Clear Using Adjustment Layers Adjustment layers are correction layers that adjust the color or tone of underlying layers without modifying their pixels directly Choose from these types of adjustment layers Brightness Contrast Channel Mixer Color Balance Curves Hue Saturation Lightness Invert Levels Posterize and Threshold All adjustment levels have equivalent commands on the Colors gt Adjust menu The advantage of an adjustment layer is that you do not modify the image layers themselves so it s easier to make quick changes to the color and tonal adjustments Add adjustment layers to test various color corrections or to see
274. ggle displays To display or hide the mask overlay Click the Mask Overlay toggle is or choose Layers gt View Overlay Edit a mask the same way you edit any greyscale raster layer Select a mask layer on the Layer palette and then use the painting tools or the effects commands to modify the mask When you edit a mask you change either the areas or the degree of masking For example painting over an object to mask it changes the area while applying a gradient fill edits the degree of masking Remember that a mask layer is a greyscale layer with 256 levels of grey that correspond to levels of masking When you select a mask layer the Materials palette displays the greyscale palette Apply black or white to mask or erase the mask at 100 percent Apply greys to vary the level of masking Edit the layer properties of a mask such as the name visibility or opacity in the same way you do any type of layer For more information see Editing Layer Properties on page 270 To create a gradient or textured mask invert the mask or change the overlay color refer to the following sections Displaying the Mask Overlay For more information on the mask overlay see Creating Masks on page 289 Chapter 12 Working with Masks 295 Changing the Mask Overlay Color By default the mask overlay displays red semi transparent pixels to show the mask on the image Change the color or opacity for the mask layer to make i
275. ghlight thumbnails with the current Windows selection color Or choose Use classic colors and choose a thumbnail highlight color form the Selection color box Clear the Display flat style thumbnails check box to display thumbnails that look like raised button bars Other Options Display tooltips over thumbnails Clear this check box to hide the image information that appears when the cursor is over thumbnails Save browser files to disk Clear this check box to stop the Browser from creating a cache file in folders you browse By default when you view a folder using the Browser Paint Shop Pro saves a file called pspbrwse jbf in that folder This cache file allows you to view the thumbnails more quickly the next time you browse the folder Automatically update the thumbnails Mark this check box to automatically update a folder s cache file every time the folder is browsed When you view a folder with the Browser the Browser displays the contents of the folder s cache file If you make changes to the images in the folder the thumbnails will not show the results unless the cache file is updated 398 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Grid Preferences To set grid preferences see Chapter 6 Editing Images Color choice tip Right click the Selection color box to pick from the Recent Colors dialog Units Preferences The Units tab controls ruler options and the default resolutions for new images Rulers Choo
276. gments Point to Point or Freehand buttons to choose how the next node will be created Drawing Lines and Custom Shapes Paint Shop Pro lets you draw lines and create custom shapes in three different ways You can draw straight lines curved lines and freehand lines While each vector preset shape is drawn as a separate object the Pen tool can create multiple contours inside a single object If you draw three separate line segments without clicking the New Shape button between each one the three contours will be one object To draw a line or shape 1 2 3 On the Tools toolbar choose the Pen tool EA On the Tool Options palette click Drawing Mode e On the Tool Options palette click New Shape or press Ctrl N Choose the line foreground and fill background colors and materials To draw shapes with no line or no fill set the color to transparent For instructions on setting colors see Using the Materials Palette on page 82 Choose the line options For more information see Drawing Objects on page 229 On the Tool Options palette select a Segment Type to draw with For more information see To draw using the straight lines on page 233 Choose Pen tool settings Contiguous Mark this check box to connect each node you draw forming one contour Clear this check box to draw unconnected line segments multiple contours Note The contiguous setting only applies to the Freehand and Line Seg
277. gram is a powerful tool for understanding and correcting images For casual users getting familiar with the histogram may not be necessary Paint Shop Pro offers many simpler ways to adjust images For information on how to begin correcting your photos see How to Approach Color Contrast and Saturation Adjustments on page 53 The histogram displays a graph of the distribution of red green blue greyscale hue saturation and lightness values in an image You can analyze the distribution of detail in the shadows shown in the left part of the histogram in the midtones shown in the middle and the highlights shown in the right part and decide how to make corrections After you analyze the histogram you can correct the image with Paint Shop Pro s color and contrast correction commands or you can use commands that adjust your image based on its histogram features Equalize Histogram Adjustment and Stretch To display the histogram for an image 1 To limit the histogram data to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose View gt Palettes gt Histogram or press F7 Histogram Display channel Red r Value in Range Below z Above Mean a2 Median 23 m Red Hl Green a Blue E Hue E Saturation Hl Lightness Hl Greyscale r Sample merged r Selection only The graph represents how many pixels are at each value of the select
278. gt Promote to Layer Then choose the Picture Tube tool and select the new picture tube you created Filling the cells of a picture tube want more picture tubes There are a variety of Web sites that offer free picture tubes Start with J asc com and click Free Downloads Or search the Web for free picture tubes 3 4 5 6 10 Set the following options Image Dimensions Choose a width and height in pixels that are multiples of the horizontal and vertical grid spacing The width and height of the image determine the total number of cells in the image For example if the grid spacing is 100 pixels create an image of 400 pixels wide by 300 pixels high to have 12 cells four across and three down Image Characteristics Choose Raster Background as the layer type and mark the Transparent check box Click OK If the grid is not visible choose View gt Grid Create one image in each grid square These squares are the picture tube cells Note To change the size of cells change the grid size and then use the Canvas Size command to change the canvas size Choose File gt Export gt Picture Tube to open the Export Picture Tube dialog Set the following options Cell arrangement Enter the number of cells across and down Placement options Choose the default options for this picture tube You can change these options when you apply the picture tube For more information see the descriptions on page 2
279. h Layers 273 Use group linking to have all layers within a layer group move together on the image canvas The Group Link button on the Layer palette displays a blue icon when the group is linked or a grey icon 4 when the group is not linked Layer links take precedence over group links For example Layer Group is linked and contains Layerl Layer2 and Layer3 Layer1 is set to link number 1 Layer4 outside of the layer group is also set to link number 1 If you move Layer4 Layer1 will move If you move Layer2 Layer will not move To link layers For each layer you want to link change its link set number to the same number Do either of the following on the Layer palette m Left click the Layer Link button to increase the number Right click the Layer Link button to decrease the number Double click each layer name to display the Layer Properties dialog change the Link Set number and then click OK To unlink layers For each layer you want to remove from the link set do either of the following on the Layer palette Left click or right click the Layer Link button until it displays None Double click the layer name to display the Layer Properties dialog change the Link Set number to 0 and then click OK To link or unlink layer groups Do either of the following on the Layer palette m Click the Group Link button A grey button means the group is unlinked Double click the layer name to display
280. h it When you choose a colored material Paint Shop Pro converts it to greyscale before applying it To create a gradient pattern or texture mask 1 Create a new mask See Creating Masks on page 289 2 Click the Mask Overlay toggle on the Layer palette to display the mask overlay 3 On the Tools toolbar click the Flood Fill tool 4 Note To fill all pixels in the mask on the Tool Options palette set the Match Mode to None On the Materials palette select a gradient texture or pattern See Choosing Gradients on page 91 Choosing Patterns on page 93 or Choosing Textures on page 94 4 Left click the mask to apply the foreground material right click the mask to apply the background material saving Masks Chapter 12 Working with Masks 297 Paint Shop Pro automatically saves mask layers in the PspImage format When you want to share a mask with others or use a mask in another image save the mask to your hard drive or to an alpha channel saving Masks to Disk When you save a mask to a hard disk or a removable disk Paint Shop Pro saves the mask as a separate file with a PspMask extension You can then load this mask into other images without opening the original image To save a mask to disk 1 On the Layer palette click the name of the mask layer 2 Choose Layers gt Load Save Mask gt Save Mask to Disk to open the Save Mask To Disk dialog The Mask files group box displays the
281. hange the saturation of all colors adjust the Saturation shift value from 100 to 100 A value of zero represents no change To change the lightness of all colors adjust the Lightness shift value from 100 to 100 A value of zero represents no change Click OK Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 197 Colorizing Images Use the Colorize command to replace all colors in a selection or an image with a single color and saturation while leaving the lightness values unchanged You can use this command to create sepia tones the brown seen in old photographs and other single color effects Note The Colorize command creates an image that looks like a duotone two color image To create a duotone with more subtle color changes apply the Greyscale command increase the color depth to 16 million 24 bit colors then apply the Colorize command To colorize an image 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Hue and Saturation gt Colorize 3 To colorize the image modify the following settings Hue The hue that all current colors are changed to Click the slider button and drag the slider to selec
282. hanges on the Tool Options palette For more information about editing see Editing Text on page 308 8 Mark the Remember Text check box to display the entered text the next time you open the Text Entry dialog 9 Click Apply Chapter 13 Working with Text 305 About Vector Floating and Selection Text The Text tool creates vector text a text selection or floating raster text Choose an option from the Create As drop down list Vector Creates vector text which is the only type of text you can edit by changing the words font type style and alignment Use this setting in most cases When you want to apply raster only tools such as the Paint Brush or commands such as applying a 3D effect merge the vector layer to a raster layer If you create vector text while a raster layer is active Paint Shop Pro adds a new vector layer with the text Selection Creates a selection marquee in the shape of text rather than creating text as a painted object Move copy fill or otherwise edit it just like any other selection For example use the Paint Brush to paint the selection with a texture You can also use a text selection to create special effects Delete the text selection to create words that are cut out of the image Or create a text selection on a photographic image and then copy and paste the selection to a new image the result is text filled with the image Floating Raster Creates raster text that is a floating
283. he Jasc Color Picker See Choosing Colors from the Image Palette on page 89 The selection rings show which color is selected Color wheel S aturation Lightness box The Basic Colors panel displays commonly used colors Use the numeric edit controls to choose a color using its RGB or HSL value Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 87 To display the Jasc Color Picker On the Materials palette do one of the following To choose the foreground color click the Foreground Material box or Foreground Color box To choose the background color click the Background Material box or Background Color box If you clicked a Material box the Material dialog opens here you can choose colors gradients patterns and textures click the Color tab to display the Jasc Color Picker If you clicked a Color box the Color dialog opens and displays the Jasc Color Picker here you can choose colors only To choose a color using the Color wheel 1 On the Color wheel click the approximate color or drag the selection ring around the color wheel to select the color The Color wheel represents the hue notice that the Hue edit box updates with a value between 0 and 255 as you go around the wheel 2 On the Saturation Lightness box click to choose a color variation or drag the selection ring Move from left to right to increase the saturation Move from top to bottom to increase the lightness To choose a c
284. he Visibility toggle for each layer or Layer Group you want to show or hide Note Hiding a layer group hides all of the layers within that group To show one layer only right click a layer name and choose View gt Current Only from the context menu Modify that layer group Here are some of the possible ways to modify a layer group m Edit its layer properties such as its opacity and blend mode See Editing Layer Properties on page 270 m Drag it to a new position in the image s stacking order All of its layers move too m Rename it See Renaming Layers on page 2 0 m Delete it Paint Shop Pro deletes all of its layers too See Deleting Layers or their Contents on page 282 Chapter 11 Working with Layers 271 To show all layers Choose Layers gt View gt All or right click a layer name and choose View gt All from the context menu To invert which layers are shown or hidden m Right click a layer name and choose View gt Invert from the context menu All previously visible items become invisible and all invisible items become visible Right click the layer name of a linked group and choose View gt Invert from the context menu To show or hide vector objects On the Layer palette click the Visibility toggle for each vector object you want to show or hide Grouping Layers Create layer groups to group multiple layers together Layer groups allow you to do the following
285. he appropriate effect for the Buttonize Chisel Cutout Drop Shadow Inner Bevel and Outer Bevel effects first make a selection in the image To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt 3D Effects and select an effect To apply these effects to an entire layer increase the canvas size to add pixels around the edges Note m These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system 318 Chapter 14 Applying Effects Example of an Art Media effect Example of an Artistic effect Applying Art Media Effects Apply art media effects to make an image look like it was painted or drawn using pencil charcoal or chalk To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To apply an effect choose it from the Effects Browser or choose Effects gt Art Media Effects and select an effect Note m These effects work on greyscale and 16 million color 24 bit images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 For descriptions and visual examples of each effect refer to the Help system Applying Artistic Effects Apply artistic effects to age a photograph or to create a variety of artistic results To limit an effect to a specific area make a selection before applying the effect To
286. he box by 1 pixel Consider using the Clone Tool 7 When the rectangle properly encloses the scratch release the instead mouse button The scratch is removed If you are not satisfied with the result click Undo to undo the scratch removal then try selecting the scratch again perhaps varying the width of the tool Color depth The Automatic Small Scratch Removal command works on 16 million color or greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 77 Removing Scratches with the Automatic Small Scratch Removal Command The Automatic Small Scratch Remover command finds and eliminates small line shaped defects that are either lighter or darker than the surrounding area To use the Automatic Small Scratch Removal command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 The command works best on a selection rather than the entire image 2 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Automatic Small Scratch Removal 3 Mark the check box of the type of scratches to remove you must choose at least one option Remove dark scratches Mark this check box to remove scratches that are darker than their background Remove light scratches Mark this check box to remove scratches that are lighter than their background 4 Specify how scratches are removed with the options in these two group boxes Local
287. he header of each image file To view EXIF data choose Image gt Image Information to open the Current Image Information dialog and then click the EXIF Information tab Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 39 Downloading Images Using Windows XP ME and a USB Cable Paint Shop Pro supports the WIA connection protocol If your computer has the Windows XP or ME operating system your camera or scanner uses the WIA connection system and you connect your camera or scanner to the computer using a USB cable then Paint Shop Pro and Windows XP or ME will automatically detect when you have connected your camera to your computer To download from a WIA camera or scanner with Windows XP or ME 1 Connect the camera card reader or scanner to the computer using the USB cable 2 Choose File gt Import gt From Scanner or Camera to download the images to your computer Downloading Images From a Mounted Drive Some cameras card readers and scanners display as a separate drive assigned a drive letter on your computer For example your camera may display as My Computer Removable Disk G To download from a camera card reader or scanner that appears as a mounted drive 1 Choose File gt Open to open the Open dialog Or choose File gt Browse and use the browser to locate the images on the mounted drive 2 Navigate to the drive for your camera card reader or scanner 3 Locate the images that you want to do
288. he item and choose Delete from the context menu To reset all toolbars 1 2 Click the Toolbars tab Click the Reset All button All toolbars will revert to the program s default settings To reset a specific toolbar 1 2 3 Click the Toolbars tab In the Toolbars list select the name of the toolbar to reset Click the Reset button The selected toolbar will revert to the program s default settings To add a separator to a toolbar 1 2 Choose View gt Customize to display the Customize dialog Right click a button in the toolbar to which you ll be adding the separator and then choose Start Group from the context menu that appears This adds a separator to the left of the button you clicked Note To rearrange a button relation to the separator hold down Alt and drag the button to the desired location To delete a separator from a toolbar 1 2 Choose View gt Customize to display the Customize dialog Right click the toolbar button directly to the right of the separator This displays the context menu Notice the check mark next to the Start Group item Select the Start Group item to remove the check mark and the separator Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 415 Creating a New Toolbar You can create a custom tool bar with your favorite commands and tools To create a new toolbar 1 Choose View gt Customize to open the Customize dialog 2 Click the Toolbars tab 3 Click New to
289. he settings use the default values Click OK to return to the Save As dialog 6 Click Save to save the image file and close the dialog 50 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Saving a Copy of an Image When you save an image using the Save Copy As command you are copying the original file not saving it Use this command to save a version of a file without affecting the original The dialog contains all the same features as the Save As dialog Note When using the Save Copy As command The modifier tag is not affected It does not disappear from the title bar The file name does not change The copy 1s titled Image Name Paint Shop Pro saves the copy to the same directory and in the same format that was last used with the Save Copy As command not the Save As command To save a copy of an image 1 Choose the File gt Save Copy As or press Ctrl F12 to open the Save Copy As dialog Use the Save In drop down list to navigate to a new folder if you want to save the copy in a different folder If necessary use the Up One Level button to help navigate or the Create New Folder button to create a new folder In the File Name box type a name for the file To save the file in a different format select the format from the Save As Type drop down list If the file format has save options click the Options button to open the Save Options dialog Select new settings if appropriate If you are unsure of
290. he step size Selection mode How Paint Shop Pro selects images to paint from the cells within the picture tube Random selects images randomly Incremental selects images one by one from top left to the bottom right Angular selects images based on the direction you drag the cursor as you paint Pressure selects images based on the pressure you apply on a pressure sensitive tablet Velocity selects images based on the speed you drag the cursor as you paint 4 To paint one image of the picture tube click once in the image To paint multiple images drag in the image Creating Picture Tubes To create your own picture tubes create a grid of cells and then fill each cell with an image The cells can be any size but picture tubes with larger cells require more memory to use To create a picture tube 1 Choose View gt Change Grid Guide and Snap Properties click the Grid tab set the current horizontal and vertical grids then click OK The grid positions are the value in pixels that the width and height of cells will be Images can be no larger than this cell size 2 Choose File gt New to open the New Image dialog 226 Chapter 9 Painting Painting with one image To use an entire image as a paint brush export the image as a picture tube Use a cell arrangement of one cell across by one cell down The image must contain one raster layer that is not the background to promote the background to a layer choose Layers
291. hes Brush Dodge Burn Smudge Push Soften Sharpen Emboss Lighten Darken Saturation Up Down Hue Up Down Effect Lightens and brings out the details in areas that are in shadow This tool mimics the traditional photographic darkroom technique of holding back some of the light when printing photographs to produce lighter areas The Dodge tool is the opposite of the Burn tool Darkens areas of the image that are too light Spreads color and image details from the starting point and picks up new color and image details as it moves the effect is similar to smearing paint Spreads color and image details from the starting point but does not pick up any new color or image details Smooths edges and reduces contrast Heightens edges and accentuates contrasts Causes the foreground to appear raised from the background by suppressing color and tracing edges in black Lightening increases brightness darkening decreases brightness Choose to affect the RGB or Lightness value of pixels Increases or decreases the saturation affects the HSL value of pixels Increases or decreases the hue affects the HSL value of pixels Apply the brush only where you want it To limit the effects of this brush to a specific area first make a selection in the image Using the mouse buttons When using the retouch tools you can retouch an image by left clicking and apply the opposite of the retouch by right
292. his check box to create separate end caps for all the middle segments dashes in the line Clear the check box to use the First Cap and Last Cap settings for each dash Segment Start From the drop down list pick the style for the beginning of each dash Segment End From the drop down list pick the style for the end of each dash Dash Segment Style The Style group box in the Styled Lines dialog controls the length of dashes and gaps in the line style E dit 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Area 2 Slider Preview e gt gt 8 gt a a aaea Area FirstCap Segment Start Segment End Last Cap The Preview Area at the bottom of the Styled Lines dialog displays the changes you make to the line The Edit Area has a ruler in pixels to help you to size dashes and gaps Each dash or gap can be selected and adjusted with its Slider The Style settings are Add Adds dashes or gaps Set the length of the dashes or gaps with the numeric edit control or by clicking and dragging the sliders Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 237 Delete Deletes the selected dash or gap Select a dash or gap by clicking on its slider in the edit area Clear Removes all dashes and gaps Zoom Buttons Click to zoom the view of the edit area in or out Undo Click to undo previous changes made in the Style group box Editing Vector Object Properties Selecting vector objects Use the Object Selection tool to select vec
293. his format is used with many wireless devices The images are black and white and have lossless compression Optimizing GIF Files Use the Paint Shop Pro GIF Optimizer feature to save GIF files that maximize quality while minimizing file size You can save images with or without transparency depending on how you want to display them on your Web pages Paletted images those with 256 or fewer colors such as GIF or PNG files do not support transparent backgrounds but you often need to make part of your image transparent when displayed on a Web page For example you may have a round logo and you want the background of the Web page to display around the logo Most Web browsers can choose not to display one color effectively making that color transparent Use the GIF optimizer to choose the color to make transparent Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 343 To optimize and save a GIF file 1 Choose File gt Export gt GIF Optimizer to open the GIF Optimizer dialog The preview windows show the current image on the left and the resulting GIF file on the right 2 Do one of the following Configure the settings on the Transparency Partial Transparency Colors and Format tabs For more information see Choosing GIF Optimizer Settings below m Click the Use Wizard button to let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process Choosing GIF Optimizer Settings The GIF Optimizer dialog contains four tabs where you configure th
294. horizontal grid lines starting from the top of the image Vertical grids Sets the distance between vertical grid lines starting from the left side of the image Units The unit of measure for positioning grid lines Color Click the color box to select a different color for grid lines Snap influence Controls how many pixels away an item must be to snap to a guide or grid The Snap to Grid option must be selected in the View menu Chapter 6 Editing Images 131 Using Guides Guides are horizontal or vertical lines that you drag onto your image Displaying guides on an image _ to use for positioning items or aligning brush stokes While grids place a series of horizontal and vertical lines at certain intervals you place guides at the locations you want To place guides you must display the rulers by choosing View gt Rulers To display or hide guides Choose View gt Guides To place a horizontal or vertical guide 1 Do one of the following To place a horizontal guide click the top ruler and drag a guide to the desired position To place a vertical guide click the left ruler and drag a guide to the desired position As you drag the Status Bar displays the guide s position in pixels To move a guide Do either of the following m Click the guide handle on the ruler and drag it to a new position Double click or right click the guide handle to display the Guide Properties dialog type in a new Guide
295. hose during setup If you chose Full Screen Client Area or Window during setup the screen area or window is captured 5 For Area and Object captures select the area or object to capture m For Area captures click at the top corner of the area you want to capture then move the cursor to the bottom corner and click again As you move the cursor a rectangle displays the selection area For Object captures move the cursor until the area you want is highlighted with a black rectangle around it then click to activate the capture 6 If you selected to take multiple captures during setup you can now take another capture Right click or press the hot key for each screen capture When you are finished click the Paint Shop Pro button in the Windows task bar Using the Paint Shop Pro Browser With the Paint Shop Pro Browser you can view open and manage your files When you open the Browse window you have a variety of options for selecting files to open and for renaming moving copying and deleting the image files You can use the Browse window just as you would Windows Explorer with the additional help of being able to see the image files you are managing To open the Browser Choose File gt Browse or press Ctrl B To select all files in a folder On the Browser menu choose Edit gt Select All or press Ctrl A To deselect all files in a folder On the Browser menu choose Edit gt Select None or press Ctrl
296. how several corrections look when you combine them Hide delete or edit adjustment layers An adjustment layer applies to all layers below it that are at the same How to create an level as follows adjustment layer that applies to one layer only m If the adjustment layer is at the main level rather than in a layer Create a layer group with the one group it applies to all layers below it in the stacking order layer and then add the adjustment If an adjustment layer is in a layer group it applies only to layers layer above the layer in the layer within the group that are lower in the stacking order group To add an adjustment layer 1 On the Layer palette click the layer which you want to create an adjustment layer above 2 To apply the adjustment layer to a selection make a selection 3 Choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer and select the type of adjustment layer A dialog with the name of the adjustment layer opens The preview windows show the image before and after changes The Adjustment tab shows the color and tonal correction settings to change 284 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Note The General tab includes layer properties such as layer name blend mode and opacity Change these properties here or on the Layer palette For more information see Editing Layer Properties on page 270 4 To reset values to default settings in the Presets drop down list choose Default Or double click the adjustm
297. ialog 1 Choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Grey World Color Balance The right preview window shows the image colors automatically corrected with the Grey World algorithm 2 In the preview window center an important part of the image such as a face Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary 3 In the Illuminant Temperature group box type a value or drag the slider to change the image s illuminant temperature from warmer tones oranges to cooler tones blues The default setting is 6500K which gives the effect of a photo taken in typical daylight Photos taken indoors tend to look more orange while photos taken in bright sunlight tend to look more blue Adjust the value to achieve the desired effect or until the colors look the most natural 4 Click OK Color depth The Fade Correction command works on 16 million color images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Have a faded black and white photo Black and white photos have no colors to correct Instead use the Automatic Contrast Enhancement command to restore the photograph See Automatically Enhancing Contrast on page 60 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 59 Correcting Faded Images With time and exposure to the elements especially light the dyes in a photograph fade Colors become less vivid the image acquires an undesirable c
298. ient pattern or texture 1 On the Materials palette do one of the following To choose a foreground material click the Foreground Material box To choose a background material click the Background Material box The Material dialog opens In this dialog you can choose from all of Paint Shop Pro s colors gradients patterns and textures 2 To choose the style click the Color Gradient or Pattern tab and select the appropriate settings For more information see Choosing Colors on page 86 Choosing Gradients on page 91 or Choosing Patterns on page 93 3 To choose a texture mark the Texture check box and select a texture For more information see Choosing Textures on page 94 4 Click OK Recent Materials dialog Recent Materials x a i pmi mimi i in Eo ore The Available Colors panel of the Materials palette Materials x Choose a color or white You can reverse the foreground and background color or material Swap Colors Swap Materials Orchoose black a shade of grey Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 85 To choose from recently used materials On the Materials palette right click a Color or Material box to display the Recent Materials dialog and then choose a material On the Recent Materials dialog you can click the Other button to display the Material dialog and choose or create a material from all of Paint Shop
299. ile size is too large decrease it by clicking the Colors tab and reducing the number of colors Saving the GIF File After you have selected the options click OK to open the Save As dialog Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the new image and type a name for the file When you click Save Paint Shop Pro saves a copy of the image as a GIF file Optimizing JPEG Files Paint Shop Pro provides a JPEG Optimizer feature to assist you in saving JPEG files that maximize quality while minimizing file size To optimize and save a JPEG file 1 Choose File gt Export gt JPEG Optimizer to open the JPEG Optimizer dialog The preview windows show the current image on the left and the resulting JPEG file on the right 2 Do one of the following Configure the settings on the Quality and Format tabs and view estimated download times on the Download Times tab m Click the Use Wizard button to let Paint Shop Pro guide you through the process Choosing JPEG Optimizer Settings The JPEG Optimizer dialog contains two tabs where you configure the settings and a third that displays estimated download times of the image at various Internet speeds Lossy vs Lossless compression Lossy Compression is a compression method that eliminates data to reduce the file size while lossless compression retains all of the original image data and reduces the file size by Storing patterns of pixels in the image Chapter 15 Using the We
300. image If the image has a high brightness all colors are bright If the image has a low brightness all colors are dark Several of Paint Shop Pro s contrast adjustments also affect the brightness of images Note The Automatic Contrast Enhancement command works on 16 million color and greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Automatically Enhancing Contrast To adjust an image s overall lightness and intensity and to balance its highlights midtones and shadows use the Automatic Contrast Enhancement command You can apply the command to a selection or an entire image Note If you apply this command to a selection on an image the contrast adjustment may not be as effective because all the image information is not available To automatically adjust contrast 1 Choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Automatic Contrast Enhancement 2 In the preview window center an important part of the image Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or Out as necessary 3 Adjust the Bias the brightness of the correction Lighter Neutral or Darker 4 Adjust the Strength of correction Normal or Mild 5 Adjust the Appearance of the correction Flat a slight difference between light and dark areas Natural an average difference between light and dark areas Bold a striking difference between light and dark areas
301. in To remove noise while preserving edge details 1 Select the area that contains the noise See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Edge Preserving Smooth For Amount of smoothing change the value until you are satisfied with the adjustment Choose the smallest amount of smoothing that removes the specks while retaining image detail Click OK Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 67 Removing Small Areas of Noise Use the Median Filter command to remove small random specks or areas of noise that are distinctly different from the surrounding area You can also use the command to remove single pixel colored specks The Median Filter command adjusts the intensity of each pixel in the image to the median intensity of surrounding pixels The median intensity is the middle value not the average in the range of values To preserve object edges the Median Filter command adjusts a pixel that is very different from surrounding pixels more than a pixel that is similar to surrounding pixels You can choose the number of surrounding pixels to use in the calculation If you choose a large number more noise is removed and so more detail is lost To remove small areas of noise 1 Select the area that contains the noise See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Median Filter 3 For Filter Aperture choose the number of surrounding pi
302. in save as dialog When you mark this check box the last file format used to save an image automatically appears in the Save as type field Display all color dropper ToolTips Clear this box to hide the color information that appears next to the dropper tool when it is positioned over a color Use precise cursors Mark this check box to use a cross hair for tool cursors instead of the tool s icon Show brush outlines Clear this check box to hide the outline shape size of the current brush as the cursor moves over an image Thumbnail Preview Enter a size for the thumbnails in the Effects Browser and the preview images that display in the Layer palette Zoom Rescaling Quality Adjust the slider between Faster and Better Faster will zoom images faster but will display less fine detail Better will zoom images more slowly but display more fine detail 396 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Why use hexadecimal Web browsers use the hexadecimal format to specify colors Caching Options These options allow for faster image redraws after you make changes By default they are all marked Turning these options off will likely slow image redraws In the Image group box Merged Image Clear this check box to stop saving an image cache of your entire merged image Merged Below Active Layer Clear this check box to stop saving an image cache of all the layers below the active one Group Layers Options Merged Group Clear
303. ing 214 Brush Variance palette opening 212 using 212 brushes Clone 219 erasers 216 options 211 Paint Brush or Airbrush 208 Retouch 220 Warp 215 brushes painting 208 Burn brush 220 C cells in image maps in sliced images 337 Change to Target brush 221 changing canvas size 139 changing curves and lines 252 Channel Mixer command 189 choosing colors 86 for the Web 88 from an image 88 from the desktop 90 from the image palette 89 using the dropper 90 choosing gradients 91 choosing patterns from an image 94 Clear Output Window command 379 Clipboard emptying 126 Clone brush 219 closing contours 247 CMYK 107 color separations 371 profiles defining 371 Index 423 modifying 373 Color Balance Grey World 58 color balance 184 black and white points 188 highlights midtones shadows 185 hue saturation lightness 186 manual correction 55 overall balance 184 color box 27 color cast removing 54 color categories in manual color correction 56 color channels working with 107 color correction automatic 54 Grey World 58 manual 55 57 color depth about 108 Color Management about 420 using 420 color model CMYK 105 HSL 104 RGB 104 color palette 82 color palette making transparent 120 Color Picker Windows 395 color reduction 115 Color Replacer tool 223 color values 87 colorizing images 197 colors correcting by setting blac
304. ing File gt Script The items in the Script toolbar are Select Script By default this drop down list shows the scripts saved in Paint Shop Pro 8 s Scripts Trusted and Scripts Restricted folders Using the File Locations dialog you can set this drop down list to display any folder s scripts Run Selected Script I Click this button to run the script displayed in the Select Script drop down list Edit Selected Script Click this button to edit the script displayed in the Select Script drop down list Script Output tip Text in the Script Output window can be selected and copied to the clipboard This can be helpful if you need to report error information Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 379 Interactive Script Playback Toggle El Click this button to switch between Silent and Interactive mode when running scripts When the button shows a border it is set to Interactive mode Run Script Click this button to open and run a script Stop Script Click this button to stop the running script Note This button will only be active while the script is running Start Script Recording O Click this button to begin recording actions that will comprise a script Pause Script Recording lM Click this button to pause the recording of a script Cancel Script Recording XI Click this button to cancel script recording Save Script Recording El Click this button to save the actions you have recorded Note This button is
305. ing Images 005 355 Before PON 625 n eee che eens eaes seas anenaseeeds 356 Choosing Printing Setup Options 004 357 Printing a Single Image 0 0 0 ee eee eee ee 359 Printing Multiple Images on a Page 04 360 Printing Images Using a Template 366 Printing Images from the Browser 000005 369 Printing with CMYK Color Separations 371 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 00005 377 Scripting Baits es cu 24 8dr SN uisi hs oes Oh he eeEeEEES 378 Recording and Saving a Script 0 000 eee eee 380 Running a Saved Script 0 0 0 cece ees 380 Stopping or Undoing a Script 0 0 0 00 eee eee 381 About BoundScripts 0 0 0 0 0 ees 381 About Protected Script Mode 0 00000 382 Editing SCUOUS 24 4 ce bend eos ee nnd sede eee es 384 Using and Creating Presets 0 0 0 386 Processing Multiple Files 0 2 0 0 0000 eee 388 Renaming Multiple Files 0 00 000000 391 vi Contents Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 393 Setting General Program Preferences 0 4 394 Resetting Application Preferences 2 005 401 Using Custom Workspaces 0 0 0 eee eee eens 401 Setting File Locations sasana 00 cece eens 403 Setting File Format Associations 0000 000s 407 Setting Autosave Prefere
306. ing Selections in Images 167 selecting Everything Outside the selection Sometimes the easiest way to select a complicated part of an image is to select the part of the image that you don t want and then invert the selection For example if you have a picture of a person against a solid color background you can select the background and then invert the selection to select the person To invert a selection 1 Make a selection in the image 2 Choose Selections gt Invert The marquee changes to enclose the opposite area of the image Modifying Selections Adding to a selection After you make a selection in your image you may want to modify or edit the selection Adding to a Selection You can add to the selection area using the selection tools either the same selection tool you used to make the original selection or a different selection tool For example you have a picture of a person carrying a large sign You can select the sign with the rectangular Selection tool then add the person to the selection using the Freehand Selection tool You can also use the Expand command to increase a selection by a specific number of pixels or the Select Similar commands to add to selections based on pixel color values 168 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images To add to a selection using the selection tools 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the selection tool Selection Freehand or Magic Wand tool that you want to use
307. ing Toolbars on page 15 Palettes The palettes display information and help you select tools modify options manage layers select colors and perform other editing tasks See Using Palettes on page 16 Status bar The Status bar displays text about the selected tool or menu command as well as image information including the dimensions and color depth See Viewing Image Information on page 24 Browser Displays thumbnail previews of image files You can open delete copy and perform other file commands in the Browser For more information see Using the Paint Shop Pro Browser on page 43 Print Layout window Displays a page on which you can arrange and size multiple images and then print the images For more information see Printing Multiple Images on a Page on page 360 Tools Title Standard Menu Image Script Tool Options toolbar bar toolbar bar toolbar palette Overview palette aterials palette TLL AT ers T r a T h D ri i e birani Tank EA mdd myi ea Din are Oe tc ee ee hj ce Foe oe e Learning Center palette Status bar Layer palette Browser minimized Script Output palette 14 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Using Toolbars and Palettes You can dock float move and resize both palettes and toolbars To dock a toolbar or palette Docked and floating D Materials palette m Drag its title bar to one edge of the workspace The toolbar or palette snaps int
308. ing the Selection Tools on page 154 Choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Black and White Points In the right preview window center the area with the source points the points that should be black white or grey Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary Note You must use the right preview window for panning the image because you select the source colors in the left preview window To use a greyscale palette to select all destination colors mark the Balance to grey check box If this check box is cleared you can select any color for the destination points For each point that you want to correct do the following m Select the source point click the color s dropper button lA then click a color in the left preview window that is supposed to be the color you are correcting black grey or white If you want change the default color for the Desired color boxes click the appropriate Color box black grey or white and select a color from a black and white color palette Note To select a destination color from the image window or the desktop position the cursor over any destination color box press and hold the Ctrl key move the cursor over the image or the desktop and click a color To preserve the lightness of the source color mark the Preserve lightness check box If this check box is cleared the lightness of the corrected image matches the target color s
309. int apply effects paste selections or perform other edits Note This feature applies to raster layers only You cannot lock the transparency of vector adjustment mask or group layers Also background layers do not support transparency When transparency is locked the Lock Transparency button displays When a transparency is not locked the Lock Transparency button is grey To lock or unlock the transparency Do one of the following m On the Layer palette click the Lock transparency button of the appropriate raster layer Double click the layer name to display the Layer Properties dialog mark or clear the Lock transparency check box and click OK Setting Icon Highlight Colors To organize the Layer palette visually specify the highlight colors for layers and layer groups The highlight color displays as the background of the icon to the left of the layer or group name It has no effect on the image itself In a layer group layers that have not been assigned individual highlight colors inherit the color of the parent layer As an example use the same highlight color for all layers in layer group and use a different color to highlight other layers or layer groups To set the highlight color of an icon 1 On the Layer palette double click the name of the layer to open the Layer Properties dialog 2 Mark the Highlight in Layer palette check box 3 Do one of the following To select a new color click th
310. into sections of equal size and places each image in a section Only images on the page or in the workspace are used Before automatically arranging images specify these preferences 362 Chapter 16 Printing Images Notes on resizing Resizing an image for printing can result in poor image quality When you enlarge an image the image loses detail and sharpness As a general rule don t enlarge or reduce an image more that about 25 percent If you need more than a 25 percent change scan or create the image ata different resolution To include borders between arranged images choose Preferences gt Options to set the border width the default is 0 5 inches or 1 27 centimeters Then choose Preferences gt Use Borders or click the Use Borders button B If you do not use borders Paint Shop Pro may arrange images with touching edges To have Paint Shop Pro enlarge stretch images to fit their sections of the page layout choose Preferences gt Stretch to Fit or click the Stretch to fit button IE If you do not choose this option when Paint Shop Pro automatically arranges photos it keeps them the same size or if necessary makes them smaller to fit Manually Arranging and sizing Images in a Layout Use rotate resize position or zoom the images Display the grid if you want to precisely position image in the window To automatically arrange images 1 Drag each image that you want to arrange onto the page or the
311. ints on the gradient bar Markers indicate points of solid color Midpoints e indicate the positions where two colors are equally blended Each pair of markers has a midpoint that can be located anywhere between the markers How can restore Paint Shop Pro s default gradients Do a custom installation to reinstall the gradients from the Paint Shop Pro program disk For more information see Installing the Software on page 6 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 99 To specify the transparency of the gradient including opacity values and transition points use the settings in the Transparency group box Markers and midpoints indicate the places where the transparency changes You change and add markers on the transparency bar which represents the transparency of the gradient across its width The following table shows example gradients that result from different numbers of markers Produce Produce this These Gradient Marker Locations this Linear Rectangular Gradient Gradient m _ Markers To display the Gradient Editor dialog 1 On the Materials palette click the Foreground Material box or the Background Material box The Material dialog opens 2 Click the Gradient tab 3 Choose the gradient you want to edit then click the Edit button To change the location of markers and midpoints Do one of the following m Click and drag the marker or midpoint to a new location m Click th
312. ions from Disk Load a selection with a PspSelection extension or image file that you have saved to a hard disk or removable disk When you load an image Paint Shop Pro creates a selection based on luminance non black pixels or opacity To load a file or selection from disk 1 Choose Selections gt Load Save Selections gt Load Selection from Disk to open the Load Selection from Disk dialog The Selection Files group box shows selections files in the default directory for selections To change the default directory click the Edit Paths button 2 Choose the selection or image file you want to load 3 In the Operation group box select an option to determine whether to replace the selection or add to or subtract from it 4 In the Create selection from group box choose what Paint Shop Pro creates the selection from 5 Click Load The selection displays on the current layer Saving Selections to Alpha Channels Save a selection to an alpha channel within the current image or within another image An alpha channel is a data storage area in an image that holds selections and masks Alpha channels are like secret compartments within a suitcase use them to store things you may need later Selections and masks stored in alpha channels have no effect on the look of an image To use the stored selections or masks load them into the same image or another image When you save the image to a file format other than PspImage format
313. ircle or star See Making Selections with the Selection Tool on page 155 Freehand Selection tool F Makes a selection of an irregular shape or around the edges of an object such as the petals of a flower or a child s hand See Making Selections with the Freehand Selection Tool on page 157 Magic Wand tool Makes a selection based on a color brightness or opacity See Making Selections with the Magic Wand Tool on page 159 These selection tools are grouped together in a flyout on the Tools toolbar One tool is displayed at a time Click the down arrow to the right of the tool to see the other selection tools Although these selection tools create raster selections you can use them on vector layers they create raster selections from the vector objects For example if you copy the selection and paste it as a new image the object is copied as individual pixels rather than a vector object onto a raster layer Vector Selection Tools To select vector objects and vector text without turning them into raster selections use these tools Object Selection tool l Selects vector objects or vector text See Selecting Vector Objects on page 161 Text tool A Creates a selection in the shape of text See Selecting Text on page 162 Feather before or after If you select a Feather value in the Tool Options palette that value affects the next selection that you make with the Selection tool You ca
314. ition of 229 deleting 256 editing 251 merging 256 moving 252 new start or end 255 selecting 251 transform with Objects menu 257 transform with tool options 258 types 251 asymmetrical 251 cusp 251 smooth 251 symmetrical 251 types of 251 noise adding 321 overview of removal options 65 removing 65 68 removing specks 65 removing while keeping texture 68 removing while perserving edges 66 removing with Blur commands 78 O object distribution 241 Object Selection tool 154 objects about 228 alignment 241 definition 229 raster 228 vector 228 Objects menu Align 241 Arrange 242 Distribute 242 Edit Break 249 Close 247 Join 248 Merge 256 Reverse Contour 248 Reverse Path 248 Edit commands 245 copy 245 cut 245 delete 245 invert selection 245 Paste 245 select all 245 select none 245 Group 240 Node Type 251 Convert to Line 254 Curve After 254 Curve Before 254 Line After 254 Line Before 254 Transform Selected Nodes Contract 257 Expand 257 Flip 257 Mirror 257 Rotate 257 Skew 257 Ungroup 240 opening images existing images 30 recently used 31 using the Browser 30 Optimized Median Cut 116 Optimized Octree 116 Options 157 options for printing 357 Overview palette 19 p Paint Brush 208 Paint Shop Pro Index 431 customizing 393 exiting 12 installing Paint Shop Pro 6 Product Tour 7 starting 12 user interface 12
315. ixels must be adjacent to each other Discontiguous erases all pixels in the tool s path that match the sampled pixels even if they are discontiguous non adjacent Use this mode on images that show the background through holes in the image Contiguous erases only contiguous pixels that match sampled pixels Use this mode when the background pixels are close in color to the edges of the object you want to isolate Find Edges restricts the brush erasing according to the edge information m Auto Tolerance Mark this check box to have the tool determine the tolerance based on the pixels in the Background Eraser tool s path the tolerance may change continuously as the tool moves over different parts of the layer Clear this check box to have the tool use the Tolerance setting that you choose Sample merged Mark this check box to sample data from all layers merged together only pixels in the current layer are erased Clear the check box to sample data from the current layer only Ignore lightness Mark this check box when the colors in the object that you want to isolate are strongly saturated and the background is unsaturated or vice versa If the image has more than one layer on the Layer palette click the layer that has an object that you want to isolate by erasing the background Note The Background Eraser cannot be applied on the background which does not support transparency If you apply the tool to the background
316. k and white points 188 GIF files 344 how to approach adjustments 53 improving in photographs 59 in print 106 manually correcting 55 overview of correction options 54 PNG files 349 424 Index viewing on a monitor 106 Colors menu Combine Channel 107 Increase Color Depth 109 Split Channel 107 Colors tab 82 combining images 323 Command History 128 commands moving 413 compressing images 47 context menus 19 customizing 415 contiguous pixels definition of 222 contours adding 246 break with Pen tool 250 breaking 249 closing 247 definition of 229 editing 245 joining 248 reversing 248 contrast enhancing automatically 60 how to approach adjustments 53 improving in photographs 60 overview of correction options 60 control arms 253 convert to line 254 Copy command 124 Copy Merged command 124 copying images into other applications 126 parts of an image 219 using the Browser 125 correcting eyes 73 correcting image angle 142 correcting perspective 145 create as vector 231 creating brush tip from selection 210 brush tips 209 hollow shapes 248 images 32 new image 35 raster images 32 vector graphics 32 creator IDs registering 353 cropping 134 a selection 136 to opaque areas 136 Curves command 192 curves adjusting 253 custom line styles 235 dash segment style 236 end cap styles in vector objects 236 custom shapes drawing 232
317. k the check box next to the name of the toolbar you want to display Note The Menu Bar and Layer Palette Toolbar cannot be hidden To select which Menu Bar is displayed 1 Click the Menu tab 2 In the Application Frame Menus group box select an option from the Show Menus for drop down list Default This set of commands displays when no images are open Image This set of commands displays when images are open Browser This set of commands displays when the Browser is the active window To reset a Menu Bar 1 Click the Menu tab 2 In the Application Frame Menus group box select the menu you want to reset from the Show Menus for drop down list 3 Click the Reset button To move a command button or tool Click and drag the item to another palette or toolbar To add commands or tools to a toolbar 1 Click the Commands tab of the Customize dialog 2 From the Categories list select a category Paint Shop Pro groups related commands into categories For example click the File category to display all File menu commands To list all Paint Shop Pro commands at once choose All Commands 3 From the Commands list click and drag a command to a toolbar 414 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro To remove commands or tools from a toolbar Click and drag the item to an empty workspace area or an empty area outside a toolbar Release the mouse button when you see the cursor change to this shape abe x Right click on t
318. ke any other data Select the object and from the Edit menu select Cut or Copy To paste vector objects within the same layer choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Vector Selection To paste vector objects as a new layer choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Layer To paste vector objects as a new image choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Image Align and arrange vector objects in a variety of ways align their edges distribute them evenly center them on the image canvas and arrange their order from top to bottom on a layer Note All of the commands in the Objects menu appear in a context menu that opens when you right click on objects contours or nodes To move a vector object 1 Select the object s you want to move 2 Do any of the following m Click inside a bounding box and drag the object or objects to a new position m To move one pixel at a time press Shift or Ctrl and press the Up Down Left or Right arrow keys To move 10 pixels at a time press Ctrl Shift and press the Up Down Left or Right arrow keys Grouping and Ungrouping Vector Objects To edit several objects in similar ways group them together When objects are grouped you can move resize reshape and change their lines and materials all at once You can also group several groups of vector objects When you group objects on different layers Paint Shop Pro automatically moves them all to the layer of the first object you selected
319. ks dead Adjust the glint using the following options Glint size The size of the glint Glint lightness The lightness of the glint Lower values darken the glint higher values lighten it Center glint Mark the check box to move the glint to the center of the pupil Clear it to leave the glint at its original position Correcting obscured human eyes If a human eye is partially obscured select the Auto Human Eye method and then use the Refine setting to adjust the correction area Smooth vs textured background The Scratch Remover tool uses the background image details to create new information to replace the scratch If the background is relatively smooth the result is usually satisfying To remove scratches from a textured background the Clone tool may be more effective See Cloning Parts of Images on page 219 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 75 4 Use Refine when the eye is partially obscured in the original image For example if the eyelid covers part of the original eye it should cover it in the corrected eye Use the Refine Slider to reduce the correction Slowly drag the slider to the left to reduce the correction and minimize its overlap with the surrounding skin 5 To blend the corrected eye with the rest of the image set the following options Feather Adjusts the edges of the corrected eye Smaller values make the edges more defined larger values blend the edges to the surrounding ima
320. l points be the same values Clear the check box to edit the focal point separately from the center point Note You can also move the center point by dragging the control needle or cross hairs in the Gradient Type drop down list If you clear the Link Center and Focal Points check box you can move the focal point by dragging the cross hairs on the gradient Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 93 5 To edit the colors transition points and opacity of the gradient click the Edit button For more information see Editing Gradients on page 98 6 To save this gradient as a swatch that you can access later click the Add to swatches button type a name and press Enter 7 Click OK Choosing Patterns You can paint draw or fill patterns to create interesting effects Example applications of Paint Shop Pro includes many patterns such as bricks and zebra patterns stripes You can create your own as well You can also use an entire image or part of an image as a pattern mn ASG Patterns are a great way to add creative flair to your images You can apply patterned brushstrokes create objects with patterned fills or ASG edges and create patterned text You can use patterns to create a stationary to use when sending e mail or to create tiled images for Web pages Patterns are especially helpful for projects that require an interesting background such as a CD covers calendars or greeting cards You choose pattern
321. lace new images into the blank cells Templates with Images For a layout with certain images that you want to print repeatedly save the layout as a template with links to the images Every time you open the template it will open and display the images you placed in your layout If you modify images linked to a template the modified images will appear the next time you open the template To save a layout 1 Choose File gt Save Template or click the Save Template button to open the Save dialog 2 Enter a name for the new template in the Name field 3 Choose a save option m Mark the Save with Images check box to save image links with the template When you open the template the images currently on the page will appear Clear this check box to create a blank template 366 Chapter 16 Printing Images Printing Images To open the Print Layout window At the Paint Shop Pro main menu choose File gt Print Layout This command is only available when at least one image is open in Paint Shop Pro A quick way to print with templates from the main workspace The Template tab of the File gt Print command allows you to fill templates with the current image and print templates with Saved images These actions are also scriptable For more information on the Print to Template option see Printing Multiple Images on a Page on page 360 4 Click OK Note To delete a print layout navigate to the Print Tem
322. layer raster layers support transparency and can be moved anywhere within the stacking order To promote a background layer Choose Layers gt Promote to Layer or right click on the layer and select Promote to Layer Duplicating Layers Duplicate a layer within an image to use as a starting point for a new layer or to try out edits and effects while keeping the original layer intact Or copy a layer to another image To duplicate a layer within the same image Do one of the following m Click its name on the Layer palette then choose Layers gt Duplicate m Right click its name on the Layer palette then choose Duplicate from the context menu m Click its name on the Layer palette choose Edit gt Copy to copy the layer and then choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Layer The duplicated layer is added just above the current layer How to start a new vector layer with a vector selection Use the Object Selection tool to select one or more vector objects choose Edit gt Copy to copy the object s and then choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Layer Cleaning up selection edges When you promote a selection some of the pixels surrounding the selection border may be included especially when the selection is anti aliased or feathered Use the Matting commands to clean up the border by removing these pixels To clean up a selection before you copy or promote it see Cleaning Up the Edges of a Selection on
323. ld Viewing and adjusting monitor settings You can view the possible settings for your monitor by following these Steps click the Windows Start button choose Settings gt Control Panel double click the Display icon and then click the Settings tab For information on adjusting your monitor settings see your Windows documentation Quick color depth changes If you are increasing or decreasing several images to the same color depth you can add the color depth s button to the toolbar For more information see Customizing Toolbars and Menus on page 412 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 109 To view the color depth of a monitor 1 Choose Help gt About Paint Shop Pro 2 Click the System Info button 3 Scroll down to the Video Driver Information section and look at the Number of Colors field To view the number of colors in a layer 1 On the Layer palette click the layer name that you want to check 2 Choose Image gt Count Image Colors Increasing the Color Depth of an Image If an image has a color depth less than 24 bit you may want to increase the color depth while editing the image Many of Paint Shop Pro s effect and correction commands work only on images with 16 million colors Depending on the color depth of your image you can also increase an image to 16 colors 4 bit or 256 colors 8 bit Because all colors are available in a 16 million colors 24 bit image increasing the co
324. lder 382 undoing an applied script 381 Scripts assigning a shortcut key to 416 seamless tiling 175 segment types 233 selecting layers 266 non masked areas 163 pixels 163 text 162 vector objects 161 selecting nodes 251 selecting vector objects from the Layer palette 161 on all visible layers 161 selection creating brush tip 210 cropping to 136 expanding based on color value 168 Selection tool 154 custom selection 156 using 155 selection tools about 154 Freehand Selection 154 Magic Wand 154 Object Vector Selection 154 Selection 154 Text 154 selection types 157 Edge Seeker 157 Selections Modify Select Color Range 170 selections adding to 167 adding removing color 170 anti alias based on shape 173 applying effects to marquee 164 create selection from 156 expanding by pixels 168 feathering 169 fixing edges 171 floating 166 inverting 167 loading 177 loading from alpha channel 178 modifying borders 174 modifying the feathering 170 moving in images 174 promoting to layer 175 recovering anti alias 173 removing 163 removing specks and holes 172 saving to alpha channel 177 saving to disk 176 smoothing the boundary 172 subtracting from 169 subtracting from in pixels 169 unfeathering 170 using Edit Selection 164 Selections menu Defloat 166 Edit Selections 164 Float 166 From Mask 163 From Vector Object 164 Hide Marquee 166 Inv
325. le click To replace using brush strokes drag in the image For both options use the left mouse button to replace the background color with the foreground color and use the right mouse button to replace the foreground color with the background color Painting with Picture Tubes Two examples of picture tubes ae sor 000 tI amp Raster only The Picture Tube tool paints raster objects on raster layers You cannot use the tool on vector layers To make picture tube elements easier to edit itis helpful to paint them on a separate layer Use the Picture Tube tool to paint with a collection of objects without having to draw them You can add butterflies and beetles to a picnic setting fill an aquarium with fish or frame a picture with holly Use one of the picture tubes included with Paint Shop Pro or create your Own Picture tubes are PspTube files Each picture tube file is made up of a series of images arranged in rows and columns that are called cells Picture tubes may have any number of cells As you paint with the Picture Tube tool Paint Shop Pro paints one image of a picture tube after another Many picture tubes create discrete images such as traffic signs while some create the effect of a continuous image such as crepe paper Note To use Paint Shop Pro version 8 picture tubes with Paint Shop Pro version 7 copy the version 8 tubes with the PspTube extension to the picture tube directory in version
326. lection marquee If the layer has data that is moved off the image canvas that data is also selected Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 163 Deselecting a Selection You can deselect any selection in the image which removes the marquee and integrates the selection back into the image If you deselect a floating selection Paint Shop Pro defloats it and places it in the underlying layer if the layer is raster If the underlying layer is vector Paint Shop Pro creates a new raster layer and defloats the selection to it To deselect a selection Choose Selections gt Select None right click in the image or press CTRL D selecting All Non Masked Areas Create a selection that selects all non masked areas and omits all masked areas The selection is clipped to the canvas size To select all non masked areas 1 Create a mask as described in Creating Masks on page 289 2 On the Layer palette select the mask layer 3 Choose Selections gt From Mask The selection marque surrounds the non masked areas Note If you saved a mask to an alpha channel you can load it as a selection by choosing Selections gt Load from Alpha Channel Selecting All Pixels Use the Select All command to select all pixels on a single layer or in the entire image if the image has only one layer The Select All command selects all pixels on the image canvas but does not include pixels that have been moved off the canvas To select all
327. lick Load Paint Shop Pro adds the mask layer and the selected layer to a new layer group The mask layer applies to the selected layer only To apply it to all underlying layers drag it from the layer group to the main level To view the mask on the image on the Layer palette click the Mask Overlay toggle Deleting Masks Hiding masks To turn off the visibility of a mask but keep it in the image click the Visibility toggle on the Layer palette How do view the alpha channels To see what masks and selections are saved to alpha channels in an image choose Selections gt Delete Alpha Channel Click the Alpha Channel drop down list to list all alpha channels in the Current image When you finish click Cancel Chapter 12 Working with Masks 301 Delete a mask entirely from an image or merge the mask with the underlying layer and then delete the mask layer If you merge the mask you can no longer edit it independently A mask saved to an alpha channel is not deleted when you delete the mask layer To delete a mask 1 Delete the mask in either of these ways On the Layer palette right click the name of the mask layer and choose Delete m On the Layer palette click the name of the mask layer and then choose Layers gt Delete or click the Delete button fj Paint Shop Pro displays a message asking if you want to merge the mask with the underlying layer 2 Do either of the following To mer
328. lightness instead Click OK Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit color images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 189 Adjusting the Color Channels Use the Channel Mixer command to increase or decrease the red blue or green color channel by a percentage of itself and the other two channels Use this command when you want to adjust color channels individually To use the Channel Mixer command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Do one of the following To modify the image pixels directly choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Channel Mixer To create an adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Channel Mixer For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 3 Do one of the following To maintain a color image in the Output channel drop down list select a color channel to edit Red Green or Blue To change the image to a monochrome which looks like a greyscale but has a color depth of 16 million colors mark the Monochrome check box The Channel drop down list displays Grey When
329. lion color 24 bit images Many of Paint Shop Pro s effect and correction commands work on 16 million color images only Therefore it is best to create most images using 16 million colors After you finish working on an image you can decrease its color depth and save it in another format Computer monitors also have a color depth that is determined by the monitor s capabilities as well as the selected color setting If you display an image with a higher color depth than the monitor can display the image will have some color distortion Some file formats limit the number of supported colors so that images display correctly on a variety of monitor types For example GIF images a popular format for the Web contain up to 256 colors 8 bit depth The number of colors actually used in an image is usually less than the color depth For example in a 16 million color image the image is capable of displaying that many colors but may only use 50 000 colors You can use the Image gt Count Colors Used command to count the number of colors in a layer of the image To view the color depth of an image Do one of the following Look at the Status bar which displays the active image s pixel dimensions the first two numbers and color depth the third number Press F9 to display the Overview palette click the Info tab and then view the Color Depth field Choose Image gt Image Information then look at the Pixel Depth Color fie
330. list select the file type for which you want to add locations 3 Click the Add button A new blank item will appear in the folder list 4 Type the full path name of the folder you want to add or click the Browse button and navigate to the folder 5 Click OK To delete file locations 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog 2 From the File types list select the file type that you want to delete a folder from 3 In the list of folders select the folder you want to delete 4 Click the Delete button 5 Click OK 406 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Setting Plug in Locations Paint Shop Pro allows you to use Adobe compatible plug ins Use the File Locations dialog to choose folders containing plug ins and control how plug ins are used To 1 To control plug in functions Choose File gt Preferences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog From the File types list select Plug ins Set these options Enable plug ins Mark this box to allow Paint Shop Pro to use plug ins Limit Loaded plug in files to those with an 8B extension The 8B extension is the most common plug in extension Clear this check box to load plug ins with other extensions Allow file format plug ins to request pre filtering of support file types Some plug ins can open files that Paint Shop Pro also supports Mark this check box to allow a plug in to try to open pre filt
331. ll pixels or fill only those pixels that match options that you specify When you click in the image the Flood Fill tool finds and fills all contiguous adjacent pixels that match the pixel you select To use the Flood Fill tool 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Flood Fill tool K 2 Choose the foreground or background color and material to fill the area with See Basics of Using the Materials palette on page 84 3 On the Tool Options palette specify the Match Mode options Match Mode How pixels that match the pixel you click are chosen and filled None has no matching criteria and so fills all pixels RGB fills contiguous pixels that match the red green and blue values Color fills contiguous pixels that match the hue and saturation values Hue fills contiguous pixels that match the hue value Brightness fills contiguous pixels that match the brightness All Opaque fills all pixels that are opaque not transparent Opacity fills contiguous pixels that match the opacity Tolerance How closely the selected pixels must match the initial pixel you click The range is O to 200 At lower settings only pixels with very similar colors are filled At higher settings more pixels are filled Sample Merged Mark this check box to choose pixels to fill based on matching pixels from all layers merged together Clear this check box to choose matching pixels to fill in from the current layer only Apply the tool only where yo
332. lone Brush tool E 2 On the Tool Options palette choose the brush tip size opacity and other options See Setting Brush and Paint Options on page 211 3 Mark the Aligned mode check box to have the Clone Brush tool paint from the point of the source area relative to the first point you click on the target area each time you stop and start painting You can keep clicking and dragging over the target area to fill in the source image Clear the check box to have every stroke copy the same data 4 Mark the Sample merged check box to clone data from all layers merged together Clear the check box to clone data from the current layer only 5 On the source image right click or press Shift and click the center point of the source area 6 Click and drag on the image you want to change to paint the cloned area 220 Chapter 9 Painting Retouching Images You can retouch images with Paint Shop Pro s retouch brushes which apply changes with brush strokes Some retouch brushes mimic photographic effects while others change pixels based on their lightness saturation hue or color values Some retouch brushes create similar effects to Paint Shop Pro s color correction commands The following table describes each of the retouch Before and after applying the Emboss brush Before and after applying the Dodge brush Before and after applying the Smudge brush Before and after applying the Soften brush brus
333. lor depth to 16 million colors 24 bit automatically loads the Rainbow Color Picker If your image has its own palette and you need to keep those exact colors you may want to save the palette before increasing the color depth After editing the image reload its original palette For more information see Working with Image Palettes on page 117 To increase the color depth of an image Choose Colors gt Increase Color Depth and choose the desired color depth 16 Colors 4 Bit 256 Colors 8 Bit or 16 Million Colors 24 bit Color depths not available for the active image are greyed out 110 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Limitations of decreasing color depth Keep in mind these limitations when decreasing color depth m Most Paint Shop Pro effect and correction commands work on 16 million color and greyscale images only m When you decrease the color depth Paint Shop Pro first flattens the image merging the data on all layers However you can add vector layers to images of any color depth Decreasing the Color Depth of an Image If you are creating an image for on screen viewing you may want to decrease the number of colors to make sure most monitors can display the image properly Also when you have finished editing an image you may want to decrease color depth to save memory space Note If you are creating images for the Web we recommend that you work with 16 million colors 24 bit imag
334. lor images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 What the ToolTip reveals When you place the cursor over the histogram a ToolTip displays the following information m Input is the value on the horizontal axis m Count is the number of pixels that have that value m Integral is the percentage of pixels in the image with that value m Output is the adjusted value 204 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections The usefulness of the histogram depends upon the image content as well as its channel values For example an image of pale desaturated skin tones may display a big saturation peak on the left side in the lower values of the histogram An image of a bright red fire engine may display a peak on the right side in the higher values of the histogram If the images were improperly saturated the saturation histograms might be reversed m If the greyscale graph is mostly at the left side the image is too dark m If the greyscale graph is mostly at the right side the image is too light If the greyscale lines are not spread out enough you may need to increase the contrast Correcting Images by Adjusting the Histogram Use the Histogram Adjustment command to adjust the contrast and color balance of your image The graph in the Histogram Adjustment dialog displays how many pixels are at each value of the selected channel The vertical axis represents the number of pixels and ranges
335. lready associated with other applications click the Select Unused button To associate no file formats with Paint Shop Pro click the Remove All button 2 Click OK Note To add or remove file extensions you want associated with the selected format see Changing File Format Extensions below Changing File Format Extensions Note File format extension changes will not take effect until the next time you start Paint Shop Pro To set file extensions 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Format Associations to open the File Format Associations dialog 2 Select the file format that contains the extensions you want to set 3 Click the Extensions button to open the Extensions dialog The preferred extension the extension that Paint Shop Pro will use to save files is at the top of the list Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 409 4 Do one of the following m To add a file extension click the Add button Type in the new extension and click OK Note File extensions that have been associated with Paint Shop Pro will have an asterisk after the name m To delete a file extension select the extension from the list and click Delete To reset a format to its default extension s select the extension from the list and click Reset To make an extension the preferred choice select the extension and click Preferred The extension will move to the top of the list 5 Click OK setting Autosave Pr
336. ls on page 189 Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit color or greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 199 Creating Greyscale Images A greyscale image looks like a traditional black and white photograph Use the Greyscale command to convert a colored image into a greyscale image with a palette that contains white black and 254 shades of grey Each color in the image is replaced with a grey that matches its lightness value The Greyscale command changes the color depth of the image to 8 bit To create a greyscale image Choose Image gt Grey Scale Creating Sepia Tone Images Sepia tones are the browns of old black and white photographs and newsprint You can give your photographs and graphics this 19th Century look by turning them into sepia tone images In Paint Shop Pro you have two ways to do this Apply the Sepia Tone effect to the image You select the number of years to age the image See Applying Artistic Effects on page 318 Use the Colorize command and choose a brown hue For more information see Colorizing Images on page 197 Reducing the Number of Lightness Levels Use the Posterize command to reduce the numb
337. ls palette Colors tab Displays the Available Colors panel where you can click to select a color At the bottom of the tab you can click to select white black or three shades of grey Swatches tab Displays swatches which are materials you can save to use again For more information see Working with Swatches on page 96 You can reverse the foreground and background color or material Swap Colors Swap Materials Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 83 Foreground and Background Color boxes Display the current foreground or background color Foreground and Background Material boxes Display the current foreground or background material the style color gradient or pattern plus the texture Style button Specifies which style is currently selected color gradient M or pattern To change between the most recently selected color gradient or pattern click the Style button and select a new style To define a new color gradient or pattern click a Material box Texture button t Turns the current texture on or off To choose a new texture click the Foreground Material or Background Material boxes Transparency button Specifies whether the foreground or background material is transparent in other words it has no style or texture You use a transparent material primarily with vector objects and text a transparent foreground has no outline the objects or letters are filled
338. ltiple Files To process multiple files use the Batch Process feature Depending on your settings in the Batch Process dialog Paint Shop Pro can make copies of original files convert and then save the copies in the output folder you select To use the Batch Process feature 1 Open the Batch Process dialog by choosing File gt Batch gt Process Navigate to the folder containing the source original files In the Save Mode group box choose one of the following options New Type This is the most basic option requiring only that a new output type be set in the Type field of the Save Options group box You can also choose to run a script with this Save Mode This option will a read in the file b run the script if defined against the file c save the file to its new location and or name and d convert it to the new file format Copy This option requires that a script is defined in the Script group box This option will a read in the file b run the script against the file and c save the file to a new location and or name With this option selected the Type field and Options button of the Save Options group box will be disabled Overwrite This option requires that a script is defined in the Script group box This option will a read in the file b run the script against the file and c save the file to its original location the original file is overwritten With this option selected all Save Options group box setti
339. lue and produces beveled corners when the corner width exceeds the limit m Round Produces round corners Bevel Produces flattened corners Miter limit This option is available only when you select Miter in the Join group box The value determines whether the corner is mitered pointed or beveled flattened Higher miter limits will create more pointed corners Lower miter limits will create more beveled corners Anti alias Mark this check box to use anti aliasing which smooths the jagged edges of lines by softening the color transition between edge pixels and background pixels Curve Tracking Pen tool only The distance in pixels between the nodes of a Freehand line A higher value will create smoother less precise lines A lower value will create more segmented precise lines Retain style Preset Shape tool only Mark this check box to use the line and fill settings of the preset shape Clear this check box to use the current foreground and background material for the lines and fill Sample Preset Shapes To view more preset shapes at once From the View drop down list choose Small Icons Preset Shape Drawing Tips To place the center of the shape where you Click right click and drag To keep the height and width of the shape proportional hold the Shift key while you click and drag Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 231 Drawing Preset Shapes Use the Preset Shape tool to draw objects rectangles
340. lug ins are scriptable but plug ins that do not support scripting cannot be scripted Outside of the above restrictions anything you do in Paint Shop Pro 8 should be scriptable To record and save a script 1 Make a note of or write down the specific actions you wish to Want to author your own record Ideally your actions should be as efficient as possible Python language scripts On the Paint Shop Pro 8 CD 2 To begin recording click Start Script Recording lol browse for a directory labeled 3 Perform the actions that comprise the script Script Authoring Inside are f documents detailing sample 4 Click Save Script Recording m In the Save As dialog navigate scripts instructions for writing if necessary to where the script will reside enter a name for the scripts and an API document script and then click Save Running a Saved Script To run a script listed in the Select Script drop down list 1 Select the script that you want to run from the drop down list To run a script on all open P P 2 Click Run Selected Script M images Using one of the methods on the l l l l right run the script on the first To run a script not listed in the Select Script drop down list image Make another image active l i and then press Ctrl Y Repeat 1 Click Run Script to display the Run Script dialog this for each open image 2 Navigate to the folder containing the script that you want to run 3 Select the scrip
341. mal or More colorful 4 Adjust the Strength of correction Weak Normal or Strong 5 Mark the Skintones present check box if significant amounts of skintones are present in the selection or image Marking this check box gives people more natural coloring Clear the check box if the image has few or no skintones 6 Click OK 62 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Removing Source Defects Images can contain defects that come from the process of scanning or capturing them Note These commands work on 16 million color and greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Fixing Line Problems in Video Images Video images can contain visible scan lines In these images lines can be missing or out of alignment with other lines The resulting image looks excessively blurry Use the Deinterlace command to eliminate missing or misaligned lines from your image and to reconstruct missing information If the image contains noise it may become more visible after removing scan lines For information on removing noise see Removing Image Defects and Noise on page 65 Note Apply the Deinterlace command before you resize the image Resizing adds or removes pixels from the image which makes it more difficult to determine scan lines If your image has already been resized you must return it to as close to the original size as possible so that each scan line i
342. ment styles Create as vector Mark this check box to create a vector object Clear the check box to create a raster object Simple Mode Clear this check box to show vector style controls while drawing raster objects Click to draw nodes Once you have three nodes Paint Shop Pro will fill the space between them with the current background color Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 233 To close the path of a shape click Close Path KG The Pen tool automatically adds a line to connect the end point with the starting point 9 When you finish the object do one of the following New Shape button tip If you clicked the New Shape button by mistake click it again to resume drawing To draw another object click New Shape and begin drawing To add a new contour within the same object click New Contour amp and continue drawing Choose a new tool To draw using the straight lines 1 From the Pen tool Tool Options palette Shape drawn with choose Line Segments 7 Line Segment option l 2 Click and drag from the line starting point to the location of the next node Release the mouse button 3 To extend the line click drag and release again Note To draw lines at fixed angles 45 degree increments press and hold the Shift key as you drag To draw using curved and straight lines 1 From the Pen tool s Tool Options palette Shape drawn with choose Point to Point Point To P
343. menu opening and closing from the drop down list Menu icons Clear this check box to hide the Menu Bar icons 418 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro Options Tab Toolbar Show Screen Tips on toolbars Clear this check box to hide the ToolTips that appear over tools and buttons Show shortcut keys in Screen Tips Clear this check box to hide the shortcut key if available that appear in ToolTips Large icons Mark this check box to display larger toolbar icons Personalized Menus and Toolbars Menus show recently used commands first Mark this check box to have Paint Shop Pro simplify its menus to show only recently used commands You can expand the menus by clicking the expansion button Show full menus after a short delay If menus are only showing the most recent items all items will appear in a moment Reset my usage data Click this button to erase the memory of your recently used menu commands Palettes Show captions on docked palettes Mark this check box to give layout captions a different appearance Adjusting Monitor Display Options How often should calibrate my monitor Monitor performance can change over time so it s best to calibrate your monitor every few months Calibrating Your Monitor To get the best results when working with Paint Shop Pro you need to properly calibrate your monitor Calibrating the monitor improves image quality and allows others to view your images as you intend To
344. mmand does Adjustment layers cannot be the bottom layer You will not be able to delete other layers if deleting them causes an adjustment layer to become the bottom layer For more information see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 Mask Layers Mask layers show or hide portions of underlying layers A mask is basically an adjustment layer that modifies opacity Use masks to create sophisticated effects For example mask all details around the main subject in a photograph or use a mask to create a picture frame that fades away at the center to reveal the subject 262 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Color depth Only greyscale and 16 million color images can have multiple raster layers Images of any color depth can include multiple vector layers Background layer or not Paint Shop Pro supports transparency on layers other than the background To create an image without transparent areas choose a Solid colored background The image will contain a background layer as the bottom layer To create a new image with transparent areas choose a transparent background The image will contain a raster layer as the bottom layer For more information on creating new images see Creating Images on page 32 Mask layers cannot be the bottom layer You will not be able to delete other layers if deleting them causes a mask layer to become the bottom layer For more information see Chapter 12 Working with Mask
345. mmands and effects to vector objects Experiment with changes Save work in progress How to Do It with Layers Create individual components on separate layers to make them easy to edit together For example if you have an illustration of a car speeding down a highway in the mountains create the car the driver the highway and the mountains on separate layers Link or group layers that need to move together For example link the car and the driver in this example so that when you move the car to the left the driver moves too Create objects you need to fine tune or edit as vector objects on vector layers Create a new layer with raster copies of the vector objects To do this duplicate the vector layer and then convert it to a raster layer Turn off the visibility of the vector layer Make a copy of a layer and try out changes Turn the visibility of a layer off and on to see which works best in the overall image Keep a copy of the intermediate steps of transformations then turn off the visibility of those layers If you need to go back a few steps at a later date you ve got the data Chapter 11 Working with Layers 265 Using the Layer palette The Layer palette lists all layers in an image The order of layers on the palette is the order of layers in the image The top layer is listed first and the bottom layer is listed last Change this stacking order by dragging a layer to a new position on the Layer
346. mooths the jagged edges of text by softening the color transition between edge pixels and background pixels Anti aliasing greatly increases the number of colors in the image This makes it challenging to reduce the number of colors and thus reduce file size Anti aliasing may cause stray colors to appear along the edges of text Alignment How text is aligned in relation to the initial cursor position where you clicked in the image to insert the text m Aligns the left edge of each text line to the initial cursor position a Aligns the center of each text line to the initial cursor position E Aligns the right edge of each text line to the initial cursor position Type Style The style of text choose bold italic or both Underline or Strikethrough Click U to underline text Click to place a horizontal line through text Line Options Define the look of the text outline stroke Options include Line Style such as solid or dashed Join and Miter Limit For details see Drawing Objects on page 229 For information on Custom line styles see Creating Custom Line Styles on page 235 Auto Kern Mark this check box to have Paint Shop Pro use the kerning of the font as the spacing between characters About em s Em s are a unit of measurement used in typesetting 1000 em s equals 72 points Moving Text How to move text to another layer To move text to another layer select the text then cut and paste it
347. n darken emboss change colors and apply other retouches to parts of the image Note The Red Eye and Small Scratch Removal commands work on 16 million color images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Removing Red Eyes When you take a flash picture of people sometimes their eyes look red the result of the flash s light reflecting off the retina of the eye Use the Red Eye Removal command to return eyes to natural colors You can also use this command to enhance or change eye colors To use the Red Eye Removal command 1 Make sure the image has no selections If necessary choose Selections gt Select None The Red Eye Removal command is not available if the image contains a selection 2 Choose Adjust gt Red Eye Removal 3 In the right preview window center the red eyes of the subject Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary Note You must use the right preview window for panning the image because you select the subject s eyes in the left preview window So you always wanted blue eyes To use the Red Eye Removal command to enhance or change eye colors follow the same steps for correcting red eyes with these Special instructions m Select the new eye color m Select the entire eye pupil and iris m Adjust the Iris Size setting until the pupil and iris look natural m Use the Feath
348. n also change the feathering of an existing selection choose Selections gt Modify gt Feather or Selections gt Modify gt Inside Outside Feather Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 155 Making Selections with the Selection Tool Use the Selection tool to select a portion of a raster layer or to create a raster selection of objects on a vector layer You can make a selection of a specific shape rectangle square rounded rectangle rounded square ellipse circle triangle pentagon hexagon octagon Star or arrow To use the Selection tool 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Selection tool from the Selection tool flyout 2 On the Tool Options palette choose from these options Selection Type Choose the shape of the selection area such as rectangle or circle Mode Specifies whether you want to Replace Add or Remove from an existing selection Feather Specifies a width in pixels 0 to 200 that the selection is faded along the edges When you move or paste the selection feathering helps blend the selection into the surrounding area and makes it appear more natural The higher the Feather value the softer the edges Set the width to O to create a selection with no feathering and distinct edges Anti alias Mark this check box to use anti aliasing which produces a smooth edged selection by partially filling in pixels along the edge making them semi transparent Clear the check box to keep the original edges
349. n tab CMYK Profile Default Ed Black Generation Transfer and Components Ink Calibration r Hue and greyness Cyan Blue Magenta Red Yellow Green C M Y eebaece Default Cancel Hep 2 In the Hue and Greyness group box click in the color box of the color you want to change to open the Color dialog Adjust the color settings and click OK 3 In the Grey Balance group box type values in the text fields to adjust the individual CMY percentages 376 Chapter 16 Printing Images 377 lig jy s ay E gt a CHAPTER my Automating Tasks Automating a lengthy task or set of tasks is one of the many exciting benefits of Paint Shop Pro 8 This chapter describes four important time saving features Automated Productivity Scripts let you automate an action or set of actions that you apply to images Presets allow you to save dialog or tool settings for later use The Batch Process feature lets you among other things convert multiple files from one file format to another The Batch Rename feature lets you rename multiple files at once Contents Scripting Basies oo ccc ceccccccccvvveeeceteeeenne T Recording and Saving aScript cee eee ees 380 Running a Saved SCPC wtca sneer ce hee de aka eae ex Ow 380 Stopping or Undoing a Script ov tai obo ee od oe ees 381 ADOUL BOUNCS CHONG 0 as ai bie Ged a oe
350. n the Layer palette toolbar To undo a deletion click the Undo button or press Ctrl Z Chapter 11 Working with Layers 285 Editing an Adjustment Layer Edit an adjustment layer to change the color or tonal correction Or change the layer properties such as layer name and opacity To edit an adjustment layer 1 On the Layer palette double click the name of the adjustment layer that you want to edit Or select the layer and choose Layers gt Properties The Layer Properties dialog opens 2 On the Adjustment tab modify the color or tonal correction settings For detailed information refer to the appropriate section as listed in About Adjustment Layer Types on page 284 3 Click the General tab to modify the general layer properties such as layer name blend mode and opacity Change these properties here or on the Layer palette For more information see Editing Layer Properties on page 270 4 Click OK Modifying Portions of Adjustment Layers Sometimes most of an adjustment layer correction works well but one part of an image doesn t need all of the correction One way to solve this challenge is to make a selection in the image and create an adjustment layer for that selection However if the image has multiple areas that need different levels of correction use a more flexible approach of creating one adjustment layer and modifying portions of it Adjustment layers are greyscale layers Use the pai
351. n the Alt text field type the text that displays if image doesn t load or 1f the user has images disabled in their Web browser This text also appears as a ToolTip in some versions of Internet Explorer You can also select recently typed text from the drop down list Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 333 4 In the Target box select the target frame in which to open the linked page _blank Loads the linked page in a new browser window _parent Loads the linked page in the parent frameset of the link If the link is not in a nested frame the image loads in the full browser window _self Loads the linked page in the same frame as the link _top Loads the linked page in the full browser window and removes all frames 5 To assign a rollover to a map area click the Rollover Creator button see Creating Image Rollovers on page 336 Setting Map Preferences Using the Map Preferences dialog to select new colors for the border lines of the active and inactive map areas and enter the number of entries that the URL and Alt text drop down lists display 1 In the Image Mapper dialog click the Preferences button to open the Map Preferences dialog For the Active map border color click the color box and choose a color For the Inactive map border color click the color box and choose a color For the Maximum history list enter the number of entries stored in the URL and Alt text drop down lists Click OK 334 Chapt
352. n the image a thin line appears on each ruler to show the cursor s position You can display rulers in pixels inches or centimeters and change the color of the ruler To display or hide rulers Choose View gt Rulers or press Ctrl Alt R To change ruler units and colors 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt General Program Preferences 2 Click the Units tab 3 In the Display units drop down list select Pixels Inches or Centimeters 130 Chapter 6 Editing Images Displaying grids on an image 4 Choose the ruler color by selecting either Black on white or Toolbar colors 5 Click OK Using Grids Grids are horizontal and vertical lines that help you position items You can display or hide grids and set preferences for grid spacing and appearance When you display grids they appear in all open image windows To display or hide the grid Choose View gt Grid or press Ctrl Alt G To modify the grid 1 Do either of the following Right click the image s title bar and from the context menu choose Change Grid Guide and Snap Properties Choose View gt Change Grid Guide and Snap Properties 2 Click the Grids tab The Default settings group box shows settings for all future grids you display The Current image settings group box shows settings for the grid in the current image 3 For either the default or current settings select from these options Horizontal grids Sets the distance between
353. nce you can select colors by clicking the Material boxes you may wonder why the Materials palette includes Color boxes too With the Foreground or Background Color box you can select a new color even when the Material box displays a gradient or a pattern The Color boxes provide a quick way to change colors without changing the other parts of the material With Paint Shop Pro you can paint draw and fill with a variety of colors styles and materials A style is the color gradient or pattern A material is the style plus the optional texture You select materials on the Materials palette In general you use foreground materials for brushstrokes and background materials for fills When you paint with a brush right clicking the brush paints with the background material and for fill tools left clicking fills with the foreground material For text and preset shapes the foreground color is the stroke or outline of the text or shape and the background color is the fill of the text or shape In general it s best to select the tool you want to use select the material on the Materials palette and then apply the tool The Materials palette is shown below Colors tab Es Swatches tab Available Colors panel Foreground Foreground Material box Color box Background Background Color box Material box M All tools Style buttons Color Transparency button button Texture button Here are the main components of the Materia
354. nces nunnana nana 409 Setting File Format Preferences 0 00005 410 Customizing Toolbars and Menus 008 412 Setting Other View Options 0 0 00 cee eee eee 416 Adjusting Monitor Display Options 418 CHAPTER Getting Started Contents Jasc Paint Shop Pro 8 is the most complete easy to use software for professional digital imaging results Combining a unique set of automatic and precision photo editing and graphic design tools with an integrated learning system Paint Shop Pro helps you deliver superior results with power and ease It s your complete solution for print and Web What s New in Version 8 1 cee ce ee ee 2 System Requirements 0 cee ee ees 6 Installing the Software haa eae eave eae eae ewe dw 6 Learning Paint Snop PrO o 0 ke eee dae deed Rewo caw de wwe 0 8 7 GUN Well scott eaacaduadecagen E E 8 2 Chapter 1 Getting Started What s New in Version 8 Paint Shop Pro version 8 includes many new and improved features to make photo enhancements and image editing easier and more powerful Enhanced User Interface A New Look Paint Shop Pro includes new icons palettes and menu displays to make using the software more intuitive Enhanced Tool options The Tool Options palette is now fully dockable streamlined and much more intuitive Enhanced Materials The Materials palette formerly the Color palette includes ea
355. nd use it That way the original pixels are left unchanged If you change your mind or want to revise the correction it s much easier when you use an adjustment layer See Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 Depending upon the color depth of your image some correction commands may not be available It s always best to work with images of 16 million 24 bit colors If needed you can reduce the color depth when you finish editing the image For more information see How Corrections Relate to Color Depth on page 183 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 183 How Corrections Relate to Color Depth The following table shows you which correction commands and adjustment layers are available for images of different color depths and which color depths can apply commands to selections Color Depth 2 color 1 bit 16 color 4 bit 256 color 8 bit Greyscale 8 bit 16 million 32K or 64K color 24 bit Commands that Apply to Entire Layer or Image Greyscale Negative Image Greyscale Posterize Solarize and Sepia plus all commands in the Adjust menu Same as 16 color 4 bit plus the Equalize and Stretch Histogram commands All commands that correct brightness or contrast All correction commands Commands available for Selections None None None The same commands that work on the layer or image All correction commands Available Adjustment Layers None None No
356. nd the selected layer to a new layer group The mask layer applies to the selected layer only To apply it to all underlying layers drag it from the layer group to the top of the main level To view the mask on the image on the Layer palette click the Mask Overlay toggle 300 Chapter 12 Working with Masks Loading Masks from Alpha Channels When you save a mask to an alpha channel within a PspImage image you can load that mask from the alpha channel into the same image or into any other image To load a mask from an alpha channel 1 2 On the Layer palette click the layer you want to mask Choose Layers gt Load Save Mask gt Load Mask From Alpha Channel to open the Load Mask from Alpha dialog In the Document drop down list select the image which contains the alpha channel you want to load Choose from open images with existing alpha channels only In the drop down list below the document name choose the alpha channel which contains the mask you want to load In the Orientation group box select from the following options Fit to canvas Fit to layer or As is For descriptions see page 299 In the Options group box select whether Paint Shop Pro hides or shows pixels surrounding a loaded mask that is smaller than the current image canvas Choose a Hide all or Show all mask To invert the transparency of the mask image mark the Invert transparency check box For detailed descriptions see page 299 7 C
357. nd then use the histogram commands to adjust the image Use the Brightness Contrast command to adjust the brightness or contrast individually Use the Curves command to change the brightness values of individual pixels Use the Gamma Correction command to change the image s gamma which adjusts the brightness and contrast in unison Adjust the brightness of highlights midtones and shadows to improve contrast and bring out detail in light or dark areas Use the Levels command to adjust the lightness of the image Using the Histogram to Fix Contrast Problems In Paint Shop Pro there are three main ways to use the histogram to fix contrast problems Use the Histogram Adjustment command to edit the luminosity or lightness channel See Correcting Images by Adjusting the Histogram on page 204 Use the Equalize command to average image brightness by distributing the lightness values of pixels more evenly across the lightness spectrum from black to white This command makes the darkest pixel as close to black as possible and the lightest pixel as close to white as possible and then distributes the remaining pixels evenly between these two values Use the Stretch command to increase contrast If an image s histogram does not cover the entire lightness spectrum the image does not contain very dark or very light areas and so it lacks contrast The Stretch command stretches the graph closer to both ends so that it covers more
358. nderlying layers without affecting the hue or saturation 276 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Blend Mode Multiply Screen Dissolve Overlay Hard Light Soft Light Difference Dodge Burn Result Combines the colors of the selected layer with the underlying layers to produce a darker color Multiplying any color with black produces black Multiplying any color with white leaves the color unchanged Lightens the colors of underlying layers by multiplying the inverse of the selected and underlying layers The result is a color that is the same or a lightened version of the selected layer Randomly replaces the colors of some pixels on the selected layer with those of the underlying layers to create a speckled effect The selected layer s opacity determines the number of pixels replaced the lower the opacity the more pixels that are replaced Combines the Multiply and Screen blend modes If the color channel value of underlying layers is less than half the maximum value the Multiply blend mode is used If the color channel value is greater than or equal to half the value the Screen blend mode is used The Overlay blend mode shows patterns or colors of the selected layer while preserving the shadows and highlights of underlying layers Combines the Multiply and Screen blend modes If the color channel value of the selected layer is less than 128 the Multiply blend mode is used If the color channel valu
359. nding of brush strokes Enhanced Retouch Brushes All of the retouch brushes that were formerly part of the Retouch tool are now separate brushes For example use the Dodge brush to lighten images and bring out details use the Burn brush to darken areas of images or use the Saturation brush to increase or decrease the saturation Enhanced Crop Tool Choose from preset crop sizes such as 4 x 6 or 8 x 10 This tool now also provides aspect ratio control to make it even easier to achieve the perfect crop Enhanced Selections New Edge Seeker mode adds more intelligence as the Freehand Selection tool automatically seeks an edge between mouse click points along an object You also have a wide choice of ways to modify selections such as removing holes and specks and adding an inside feather Versatile Tablet Options Explore your freedom and creativity with additional options for pen tablets vary the color density opacity rotation size and thickness of brush strokes based on pressure tilt altitude and more Layer Groups Place layers in layer groups to organize the Layer palette apply settings such as opacity to all layers within a group and have mask and adjustment layers affect only layers within the group rather than all underlying layers Mask Layers Masks are now separate layers rather than attributes of other layers Mask layers mask all image data below them at the same level 4 Chapter 1 Getting Started New Filter
360. ndom settings in the dialog See Randomizing Parameters on page 28 Resize Handle A handle in the lower right corner of the dialog used to change the size of the dialog See Resizing a Dialog on page 28 The preview windows Size the dialog In each Paint Shop Pro dialog with preview windows you can size the dialog by clicking and dragging a corner Expand a dialog when you want the preview windows to be large enough to see detailed changes You can also double click the dialog title bar to maximize the dialog Exceptions to panning in the left preview window In a few dialogs the left preview window is used for making selections such as selecting a red eye in the Red Eye Removal dialog In these dialogs the cursor does not change to a hand over the left preview window Use the right preview window for panning instead 26 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Using Preview Windows Most dialogs that correct images apply effects or modify selections have two preview windows that show the image before and after changes are applied Use the window controls to zoom the preview in or out pan it or proof changes on the actual image You can show or hide the preview windows When you hide previews use the main image window to proof changes To display or hide preview windows Click the Show Hide Previews button El To zoom the image preview Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons Th
361. ndow gt Fit to Image or press Ctrl W 22 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Zooming in and out Automatic resizing By default when you zoom in or out the image window is automatically resized to fit the image To change this preference setting see View Preferences on page 394 Magnifying and Reducing the View Magnify the view of an image zoom in to view and edit image details or reduce the view zoom out to see the overall image The title bar of the image window displays the zoom percentage To zoom in Do one of the following Zoom with the mouse wheel roll the optional wheel on your mouse to zoom in or out quickly On the Tools toolbar choose the Zoom tool Q if necessary click the down arrow next to the Pan tool and then left click the area you want to magnify The view magnifies to the next preset percentage with each click up to the maximum magnification of 5000 Choose the Zoom tool or the Pan tool and then in the Tool Options palette select a zoom percentage or click the Zoom In By 1 Step or Zoom in by 5 Steps buttons Choose View gt Zoom In By 1 Step to magnify the view to the next preset percentage Choose View gt Zoom In by 5 Steps to magnify the view by five preset percentages To zoom out Do one of the following On the Tools toolbar select the Zoom tool if necessary click the down arrow next to the Pan tool and then right click the area you want to reduce
362. ne Brightness Contrast Curves Invert Levels Posterize Threshold All adjustment layers 184 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Adjusting the Color Balance Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 The automatic alternative For a quick and easy way to balance colors use the Automatic Color Balance command See Automatically Balancing Colors on page 54 In technical terms color balance refers to the balance of red green and blue in your images In common usage balancing colors means creating natural looking images without a color cast an overall imbalance of colors in an image Use Paint Shop Pro to correct color balance and also to change the balance to create dramatic effects Changing the Overall Color Balance Use the Red Green Blue command to adjust the amount of red green and blue in your image and to make color corrections by changing the overall color cast To reduce the amount of a color in the image you can either increase its opposite color on the color wheel or reduce the amount of adjacent colors on the color wheel For example to color correct an image containing too much yellow either increase the amount of blue or decrease the amount of red and green To use the Red Green Blue command 1 To limi
363. negative In addition adjustment layers are Use an Invert adjustment layer to create an adjustment layer that available for 16 million 24 bit has the same effect as the Negative Image command but doesn t color or greyscale images only change the original image pixels To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Use the Solarize command to produce a negative image in which you control the threshold level This level is the lightness value above which all colors are inverted Use this command to create interesting effects You can create a negative of a selection or an entire image To use the Negative Image command Choose Adjust gt Negative Image To use an Invert adjustment layer 1 Choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Invert 2 Choose the layer properties There are no additional settings for this adjustment layer For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 3 Click OK Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 201 To use the Solarize command 1 Choose Effects gt Artistic Effects gt Solarize 2 In the Threshold edit box select a lightness threshold 1 to 254 above which all colors are inverted At a threshold of 1 all image pixels are inverted and the effect is the same as applying the Negative Image command 3 Click OK Using the Histogram to Analyze Images Do need the histogram For image editing professionals the histo
364. ng Contrast on page 60 Adjusting the Brightness of Highlights Midtones and Shadows Use the Highlight Midtone Shadow command to separately adjust the light middle and dark values the tonal values of a photograph To use the Highlight Midtone Shadow command 1 To limit the adjustment to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Highlight Midtone Shadow 3 To adjust values in relation to each other select Linear adjustment method Each value ranges from 0 to 100 and defaults are O for Shadow 50 for Midtone and 100 for Highlight Dynamic adjustment method Each value ranges from 100 to 100 and zero represents no change for that value 4 Adjust these tonal values Shadow Removes lightness from the image Increasing the value darkens lighter pixels Midtone Changes the middle portion of the light scale Increase the value to darken middle values or decrease the value to lighten middle values Highlight Adds lightness to the image Decreasing the value lightens darker pixels 5 Click OK Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit color or greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109
365. ng and Editing Objects 229 The Anatomy of a Vector Object Object An object is anything you create with the Pen or Preset Shape Closed object selected with tool Each object is represented by its own bounding box An object Object Selection tool has properties you can control such as line style and fill color Each Bounding Box Path object contains one path made up of contours and nodes Path An object contains one path The path is all the contours in an object The properties of the path are controlled by the object s properties A path s direction flows from its start to end point Some paths are closed their start and end points are the same Contour A path contains at least one contour A contour contains at least one line segment A contour s direction flows from its start to Open object selected with end point A contour can also be open or closed The contours in a Pen tool path do not need to be connected Some of a contour s properties are controlled by its object s properties e g line style fill color anti o aliasing The shape of a contour is controlled by the type and Path wes location of its nodes X Node A contour contains at least two nodes A node is a point on a Contour contour that define the contour s shape at that point For instructions on editing nodes see Editing Nodes on page 251 Contour selected with Line Segment The straight or curved line between two nodes is a line Pen tool segm
366. nging the original image data To promote a selection to a layer Placing a selection in 1 Make a selection in the image another image 2 Choose Selections gt Promote to Layer To place a selection as a layer within another image copy the The new layer is placed above the original selection s layer and selection open the other image is named Promoted Selection and choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Layer Creating Custom Patterns from Selections You can turn a selection into a custom seamless pattern which you How to use the pattern can use for applications like painting adding text or creating Web To use the pattern that you create page backgrounds save itin the Patterns folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder and select it as your foreground or To create a custom pattern background material See 1 Make a selection in the image Choosing Patterns on page 93 You can then use the pattern to 2 Choose Effects gt Image Effects gt Seamless Tiling to open the paint create text or fill an entire Seamless Tiling dialog image 3 Choose the tiling method direction settings and corner style and then click OK 176 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images saving and Loading Selections It s helpful to save complicated selections that you may use again or to save selections to use in other images to create effects Save a selection in one of two ways m Save the selection as a file with a
367. ngs are inactive Obey Script This option requires that a script is defined in the Script group box This option will a read in the file and b run the script against the file With this option selected all Save Options group box settings are inactive Note Since no save is performed you should only use this option when you know the script performs a save If not this option will not have any effect 4 Inthe Save Options group box set the following the Save Mode settings affects what is available in this group box Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 389 m Click the Type drop down list to select a new file format If a format has save options the Options button is accessible Click it to open the Save Options dialog Select the format options and click OK to return to the Batch Process dialog Designate another output destination folder for the new files by typing a path in the Folder field or by clicking the Browse button next to this field and navigating to another folder Unless you specify another output folder Paint Shop Pro saves the converted files in the same folder as the source files You also have the option of renaming the converted files To do so click Modify to open the Modify Filename Format dialog The Rename Options list displays the choices for renaming your files Select an option and click Add to move it into the Included list Choose from the following options m Custom Text When you choose this
368. nload time at four modem speeds If the file size is too large decrease it by clicking the Colors tab and reducing the number of colors Saving the PNG File After you have selected the options click OK to open the Save As dialog Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the new image and type a name for the file When you click Save Paint Shop Pro saves a copy of the image and leaves the original image unchanged Using Digital Watermarks A digital watermark is a permanent proof of authenticity for an image While a computer can detect it it is invisible to the viewer A watermark contains information about the creator the copyright and the image When a viewer chooses to see this information the program opens a dialog that contains a link to the Digimarc Web page which displays contact information for the artist Note A layer can contain only one watermark You cannot embed a new watermark in a layer that already contains one 352 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools Embedding a Digital Watermark A digital watermark can only be embedded on a layer once Because its quality may be degraded by further changes to the layer If you try to embed a watermark in a layered image Paint Shop Pro displays a message recommending that you flatten the image before proceeding When you embed a watermark you can select the following options creator ID image copyright dates image attributes and restrictions on use and waterma
369. normal resolution Choose template options Use the standard template m Mark this box to print all the images at thumbnail size Clear this box to choose a template from the drop down list The Browser will use the template to format your images for printing To change the folder where Paint Shop Pro loads templates from click the Edit Paths button For more information see Chapter 18 Setting File Locations Choose a Print Range option All Prints all the pages the Browser has created for printing Pages Prints only the page range you enter in the from and to fields Selection Prints only the images you selected in the Browser window instead of all the images in the current folder Click the Print button to print Or click the Close button to save the print options without printing the images Chapter 16 Printing Images 371 Printing with CMYK Color Separations When you print using CMYK separations Paint Shop Pro prints four pages representing the levels of Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black in the image Note Printing CMYK separations is the opposite of the Colors gt Split Channels gt Split to CMYK command When you split channels Paint Shop Pro treats white as full color and black as no color brighter equals more color When you print CMYK separations Paint Shop Pro treats black as full color and white as no color darker equals more color To modify the default CMYK conversion preferences see Defining
370. nt Shop Pro does not crop it You can move it back to the canvas or increase the canvas size to show the additional data Note You cannot use the Move tool on the background layer To move the contents of the background layer promote it to a regular raster layer first See Promoting a Background Layer to a Regular Raster Layer on page 268 To move a layer within the image canvas 1 On the Layer palette select the layer you want to move 2 On the Tools toolbar click the Move tool pi 3 Click and drag in the image to move the layer to a new position 4 To limit the Mover tool to the current layer press and hold the Shift key while you click the image and drag the layer Merging Layers Merging layers is also called flattening You can merge selected layers or all of the layers in an image Merging layers decreases the memory requirements for the image Paint Shop Pro merges layers based on the blend modes converts vector data and vector text to raster data and replaces transparent areas of the background layer with white Always make a backup copy of the original PspImage image before you merge layers Once you merge layers you cannot edit the layers separately Unless you are certain you have finished editing the image it s best not to merge layers To merge two layers together 1 Make sure one layer is located directly above the other on the Layer palette 2 Click the name of the layer above the one you want to me
371. nt options From the main Paint Shop Pro workspace choose File gt Print or press Ctrl P From the Print Layout window choose File gt Print Setup or click the Print Setup button To open the Print Setup dialog from the main Paint Shop Pro workspace choose File gt Print or press Ctrl P From the Print Layout window choose File gt Print Setup or click the Print Setup button Note Note You can script most print options However all printer settings may not be scriptable due to variations in printer drivers The following printing options are available when printing a single image Most of the options are also available when printing multiple images from the Print Layout window Choosing print setup options 1 In the Printer group box choose the printer to send the image to Click the Printer button to select a different printer Click the Properties button to view or change printer properties For more information refer to your printer documentation 2 Print to File Mark this check box to save the image to a file instead of sending it to a printer When you click the Print button to print the image Paint Shop Pro prompts you for a file name 3 Enter the number of copies to print in the Number of Copies field 4 In the Orientation group box choose either the portrait or landscape orientation 358 Chapter 16 Printing Images Scripting print options You can script most print options However all prin
372. nting tools to selectively change which parts of the image get the full correction and which parts get partial or no correction Adjustment layers contain pixels that can display 256 shades of grey These grey levels indicate the amount of correction White pixels mean Paint Shop Pro applies the full correction that you specify Black pixels mean Paint Shop Pro applies no correction 286 Chapter 11 Working with Layers m Grey pixels vary the correction For lighter greys Paint Shop Pro applies close to the full correction For darker greys Paint Shop Pro applies close to no correction Middle grey means Paint Shop Pro applies the correction at half strength Here are the basics of selectively modifying adjustment layers When you first create an adjustment layer all pixels in the layer are white full strength correction If you create an adjustment layer when there is an active selection all pixels in the selection are white full strength correction and all other pixels are black no correction When you select an adjustment layer the Material palette displays black white and 254 shades of grey as available colors To modify portions of the adjustment layer use the painting tools to paint with shades of grey To see what the pixels of an adjustment layer look like click the Mask Overlay button Or position the cursor over the layer name The layer thumbnail displays the greyscale adjustment layer
373. nu Adjusting Nodes with Control Arms The length and direction of a nodes control arms determines the shape of the contour at the node The arrow control handle indicates the direction of the contour To adjust a curve using control arms 1 Select a node to display its control arms Note Cusp nodes may have no control arms 2 Move the cursor over a control handle until the cursor changes to two rotating arrows and then click and drag the handle Note To constrain the control arms to fixed angles 45 degree increments press and hold Shift as you drag Changing Line Segments Instead of changing node types you can simply tell Paint Shop Pro what type of line segment you want on each side of the node You can also convert line segments from curved to straight The line segment type and node type work together For example when you add a straight line before or after a symmetrical curve the node type changes to asymmetrical 254 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Changing Line Segments Original Line Before Line After Convert to Line Adding Nodes in Drawing or Edit Modes ADD a To change the line segment before or after a node 1 Select a node 2 Do one of the following m Choose Objects gt Node Type and select an option To straighten the segment before and after a node choose Convert to Line Ctrl L To straighten the segment before or after a node choose Line Before Ctrl B or Line
374. o place Materials E Colors oa cee Double click its title bar To float a toolbar or palette Drag the handle ll to move the toolbar or palette away from the m edge of the workspace eso Oa i Note The drag handle size and position will vary depending on a aed BO the size of the palette and whether the palette is vertical or horizontal eS Double click its title bar V Alltoals To move an undocked toolbar or palette Drag its title bar to a new position To resize a toolbar or palette Click and drag the sides or corners of a toolbar or palette to change its size To display all toolbars and palettes Press Ctrl Shift T Note To hide a specific palette click the close button on its title bar Press and hold Ctrl while dragging a palette to prevent it from docking Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 15 Using Toolbars The toolbars display buttons for the most common tasks Position the cursor over a button to display a ToolTip with its name The Status bar displays more information about the command Display or hide toolbars or arrange them on the workspace Dock a Status bar toolbar to snap it into place at an edge of a workspace or to float it The Status bar displays textabout to move it anywhere on the screen the selected tool or menu command as well as image information including the dimensions color depth and Cursor position For more information see Vi
375. o ungroup all objects in a group 1 Select the group 2 Do one of the following Choose Objects gt Ungroup m On the Object Selection tool s Tool Options palette click the Ungroup button ia m On the Layer palette right click the group name and select Ungroup from the context menu To remove a single object from a group On the Layer palette drag the object from the group into another group or layer Align Tops Before After Distribute Vertical Tops __ L L L Before After Another way to distribute With your objects selected right click on an object From the context menu select a distribution method from Distribute Object Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 241 Aligning Vector Objects You can align objects in relation to each other For example align their top edges To align vector objects 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool 2 Select the first vector object All other objects selected will align to this object 3 Press the Shift key and select each additional object you want to align 4 On the Tool Options palette click one of the Object Alignment buttons Top FF Bottom El Left Right 2 Vertical Center 24 or Horizontal Center Note You can also choose Objects gt Align and select a command Distributing Vector Objects You can evenly distribute vector objects in relation to each other For example distribute three objects
376. oach Color Contrast and Saturation Adjustments on page 53 Correct defects caused by the image source including unwanted patterns on scanned images and undesirable lines on video frames See Removing Source Defects on page 62 Correct image defects such as black or white specks and image distortions caused by camera lenses See Removing Image Defects and Noise on page 65 and Correcting Image Distortions on page 69 Retouch photos including removing scratches and red eye effects on people and animals During this step you can also remove unwanted highlights and objects from your photos See Retouching Photographs on page 72 Clarify and sharpen images See Improving Image Clarity on page 79 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 53 How to Approach Color Contrast and Saturation Adjustments Curious about color For more information about the qualities of color see Understanding Color and Color Models on page 103 Adjusting greyscale images Because greyscale and black and white photos have no color you can adjust only the contrast See Improving Contrast on page 60 The color contrast and saturation have the most influence on our perception of a photograph s quality If the colors are washed out or the contrast is low the photo doesn t look right Paint Shop Pro s adjustments modify the basic components of color hue saturation and lightness Hue is the color
377. of the following Choose Objects gt Edit gt Close Ctrl Shift C m Right click on the contour and select Edit gt Close from the context menu On the Tool Options palette click Close Selected open contours f Note When you close a contour Paint Shop Pro draws a segment from the contour s start to its end node To duplicate a contour Aa Gd pe From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode e Select one node on the contour From Objects gt Edit choose Duplicate Ctrl D Copies the selected contour and pastes it directly on top of the original contour Note The overlapping nodes will all show node on node indicators Duplicate amp Offset Ctrl Shift D Copies the selected contour and pastes it at an offset from the original contour The default offset is 10 pixels in the X and Y directions Note To adjust the number of pixels contours are offset type new settings in the Duplication X and Duplication Y fields of the Tool Options palette for the Pen Tool 248 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Reversing a path with text pam SPIO TET Reversing a contour to create a hollow shape ii ON wa b l d Lod Reversing the Direction of Contours or Paths The direction of a contour flows from the start node to the end node When you place the cursor over the start node START displays next to the cursor When you place the
378. oint option 2 Click and drag at the start point When the direction of your line is correct release the mouse button 3 For the next node To create a straight line click where you want the next node To create a curved line click and drag When the curve is the right shape release the mouse button 4 Add additional nodes clicking for a straight segments or clicking and dragging for curved segments 234 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects To draw using free form lines 1 From the Pen tool s Tool Options palette Shape drawn with choose Freehand e Freehand option 2 Click and drag the cursor along the path you want the line to take Release the mouse Paint Shop Pro creates a contour that matches the path To adjust how precisely the line follows your cursor see Drawing Objects on page 229 Creating New Preset Shapes You can save any vector object lines shapes or text as a preset shape used by the Preset Shape tool Preset shapes are stored in files called shape libraries which contain one or more vector objects Paint Shop Pro s default shape libraries are located in the Preset Shapes folder of the Paint Shop Pro program folder By default your custom preset shapes are saved in the Preset Shapes folder of your My PSP8 Files folder in your My Documents folder To choose another folder for your preset shapes see Setting File Locations on page 403 To create a new preset shape 1 Crea
379. olor LZ77 compression which is slower than RLE but can compress an image to a smaller size than RLE It works well with photo realistic images Choose a compression option by clicking the Options button in the various save dialogs 48 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Saving an Image You can easily save an image with the same file name and location Note that this will overwrite the original image with the modified image To save the image using a different name or file format choose File gt Save As To save an image To automatically save the image with the same file name and location overwriting the original image with the modified image Choose File gt Save Press Ctrl S m Click the Save button J on the toolbar Saving a New Image File The first time you save an image Paint Shop Pro automatically opens the Save As dialog where you select a location name and format for the image After this Paint Shop Pro saves changes to the original image without opening the dialog To save a new image 1 Choose File gt Save press Ctrl S or click the Save button H on the toolbar to open the Save As dialog 2 Use the Save In drop down list to navigate to the folder in which you want to save the image file If you frequently save files to the same folder click the Favorites folder and select a folder from the list 3 In the File Name field type a name for the file 4 To save the fil
380. olor cast and contrast is lost Use the Fade Correction command to restore color and contrast to faded photographic images You can apply the command to a selection or an entire image The Fade Correction command is a simple one step adjustment that corrects both color and contrast If the resulting image doesn t look as good as you would like the image may need different adjustments Instead try applying the three automatic adjustments from the submenus of the Adjust menu in this order Automatic Color Balance Automatic Contrast Enhancement Automatic Saturation Enhancement To use fade correction 1 Choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Fade Correction 2 In the preview window center an important part of the image such as a face Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary 3 For Amount of correction start with 45 and adjust the value until the image looks the most natural Note Use the minimum value that produces a good correction If you apply too much correction highlight and shadow areas may lose detail and objects may blend together 4 Click OK 60 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Improving Contrast Contrast is the variation of dark and light intensities within an image To look its best an image must have the proper balance between highlights midtones and shadows Brightness is a term often associated with contrast Brightness is the overall lightness of an
381. olor from the Basic Colors panel 1 Move the cursor over the Basic Colors panel A ToolTip displays the color value 2 Click the color you want Notice that the RGB and HSL values update with the current color values and the selection rings on the Color wheel and the Saturation Lightness box move to the selected color To choose a color using its RGB or HSL value For each value you want to change do one of the following Click the slider button H and drag the slider to a new position Drag the meter bar m to a new position Click the edit box and type a new value To change the value by one click the up or down arrows Bl 88 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Note Clear the Link Colors check box to have the sliders visually represent only their selected value such as just the hue To choose a color from the active image 1 Make sure the Jasc Color Picker is displayed See To display the Jasc Color Picker on page 87 2 Move the cursor over the active image The cursor turns into a dropper and a ToolTip displays the color values 3 Click the part of the image that has the color you want The Jasc Color Picker updates with that color Note You can also choose a color from an image using the Dropper tool or a special feature of Color or Material boxes See Choosing Colors from an Image or the Desktop on page 90 Specifying HTML Code for Colors With the Jasc Color Picker you can vi
382. om previous versions of the software Dynamic Personalization Customizing the User Interface Adapt your workspace to the way you work Drag and drop any feature special effect filter and tool anywhere on the interface wherever you want Place menu items and tools you frequently use on a floating or docked toolbar that you create You can also create your own keyboard shortcuts and customize the menus Enhanced Workspaces Once you have everything set up just the way you like it save your workspace or multiple workspaces This is perfect if you share a computer with others because each person can have their own personalized workspace that loads instantly and saves time otherwise spent moving things around 6 Chapter 1 Getting Started system Requirements Before you install this program make sure that your computer meets or exceeds these requirements Windows 98 NT4 SP6a 2000 ME XP Pentium or comparable processor m 128 MB RAM 200 MB free disk space 16 bit display adapter at 800 x 600 resolution Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Installing the Software Before you install the program close any programs or applications that you have running on your computer To install the software 1 Insert the Paint Shop Pro CD in your CD ROM drive The installation program starts automatically Note If the installation program does not start automatically double click the My Computer icon and then
383. om recently used colors markers with custom colors ae ee To select a color from within the gradient itself click the gradient bar To change marker transparency 1 Click the marker below the transparency bar to select it The triangle at the top of the marker turns black 2 Change the value in the Opacity edit box Values range from 0 completely transparent to 100 opaque the underlying pixels are covered completely Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 101 Saving Edited Gradients After you edit a gradient on the Gradient Editor dialog you can save the gradient in two ways m Click the Save button to overwrite the previously saved gradient with the current gradient If you make changes to a Paint Shop Pro default gradient it s best to use the Save As option rather than overwrite the default gradient m Click the Save As button to save the current gradient to a new gradient name which creates a copy of the current gradient This is a helpful way to save a gradient that you want to use frequently and is also a good way to maintain Paint Shop Pro s default gradients you can make your changes to the copy rather than the original gradient When you click the Save As button the Save Gradient As dialog opens and displays a suggested gradient name usually the current gradient plus a number Type a name for the new gradient or leave the suggested name then click OK Creating New Gradient Types Yo
384. omize parameters button ca Resizing a Dialog All dialogs contain a Resize Handle in the lower right corner of the dialog Click and drag the handle to resize the dialog Using Shortcut and Function Keys Customizing Shortcut Keys If you don t like the assigned function keys you can customize the function keys to suit your needs See Assigning Shortcut Keys on page 416 To view all assigned keys including custom shortcuts choose Help gt Keyboard Map To work quickly and easily in Paint Shop Pro learn the shortcut and function keys for common tasks Key combinations like Ctrl Z Undo and Ctrl C Copy become second nature as you work and they save time over using the mouse Here are the ways you can use shortcut and function keys in Paint Shop Pro Use shortcut keys to execute menu commands display palettes edit nodes on vector objects and execute Browser commands All menu commands list their shortcut keys on the menu Shortcut keys for palettes are listed on the View gt Palettes menu Use shortcut keys to select tools Move the cursor over a tool to display a ToolTip with its shortcut key in parentheses Use function keys to display a menu by pressing Alt plus the underlined letter of the menu name for example press Alt F for the File menu Then press the underlined letter of a menu command or scroll through menus using the arrow keys Press ESC to return to your image without executing
385. ommand creates an image with pixels of two colors black or white To create a black and white photograph which is really made up of many shades of grey see Creating Greyscale Images on page 199 To use the Threshold command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Do one of the following To modify the image pixels directly choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Threshold To create an adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Threshold For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 3 Click the Zoom out button until you can see the entire image in the preview windows 4 In the Threshold edit box select a pixel lightness value that determines which pixels change to white those above the threshold and which pixels change to black those below the threshold The value ranges from 1 to 255 Adjust the threshold until the image in the preview window is satisfactory 5 Click OK A greyscale look alike There s another way to create an image that looks like a greyscale but maintains its same color depth Use the Channel Mixer command and mark the Monochrome check box With this command you can modify how much of the image s red green and blue channels are used to create the monochrome image For more information see Adjusting the Color Channe
386. on on the Transparency tab with your image you must choose either the Greyscale or 24 bit color option Paletted images cannot display alpha transparency Note When you choose to create a Palette Based image the other options on this tab become available Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 349 2 Choose how many colors you want the image to contain As mentioned a paletted image contains 256 or fewer colors As you remove colors the size of the file decreases but so does the quality of the image Use the preview windows to help you determine how small you can make the image without compromising quality 3 Choose how much dithering you want in the image This refers to the way the program arranges pixels to compensate for missing colors in the adjacent pixels Use the preview windows to help you determine the best setting 4 Select a method of color selection to determine how Paint Shop Pro reduces the number of colors in the image m Select Existing Palette if your image is paletted and you want to use its palette Select Standard Web safe if your image will be used on the Web m Select Optimized Median Cut if you need to reduce the image to only a few colors Select Optimized Octree if your original image contains only a few colors Note Depending on your needs try both Optimized options and select the one that produces the better looking image or the smaller file size 5 In the Options group box Ma
387. on basics 285 types of 284 Airbrush 208 align vector objects 241 alpha channels deleting masks from 301 anti aliasing lines 230 text 306 Art Media effects 318 Artistic effects 318 asterisk in title bar 20 Auto Kern 306 Automated Productivity Scripts see Scripting Automatic Color Balance 54 Automatic Color Balance command 54 Automatic Contrast Enhancement command 60 Automatic Saturation Enhancement command 61 Automating tasks 377 Autosave settings 409 using 47 Available Colors panel 85 Average blur 78 B background color 83 Background eraser 217 Barrel Distortion Correction command 70 Batch Process command 388 black amp white printers 357 black and white images 198 Black and White Points command 188 blend modes 275 ranges 277 Blur command 78 Blur more 78 borders adding to an image 150 modifying in selection 174 BoundScripts about 381 adding to a toolbar or menu 382 creating 381 breaking contours 249 brightness and contrast adjusting 190 adjusting gamma 193 adjusting individual values 192 adjusting manually 191 Browser Edit menu Invert Selection 44 Select None 43 File menu Select 44 Sort 44 Update Thumbnails 46 Image File menu Open 30 preferences 397 printing 369 printing with templates 370 using to copy images 125 brush Preset sharing with others 214 brush tip creating 209 deleting 210 resetting defaults 213 sav
388. only active if you have completed a scriptable action About the Script Output Window To display this window choose View gt Palettes gt Script Output This window may automatically appear to display information such as Commands that are executed when running a script Script error information such as Python syntax errors or runtime errors Statements output from hand written scripts containing a Print command To clear the Script Output window Choose File gt Script gt Clear Output Window or right click the window and choose Clear from the context menu 380 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks Recording and Saving a Script Before you begin recording a script be aware of these general rules as to which actions can be recorded within Paint Shop Pro 8 You cannot script user interface customizations CMYK profile Scripting rules of thumb creation editing operations inside the Browser operations inside The longer a task takes to of Print Layout gradient creation or the floating docking complete the more desirable it is arranging of toolbars palettes and windows to have a script for it However if a task only takes two or three mouse Materials palette operations and Tool Palette selections can be clicks to complete creating and scripted but are not recorded these actions need to be written running a script for those few via a text editor application actions may not Save you any time oe P
389. ontrast Areas Use Edge effects to accentuate edges and contrast areas in your image For more information on Edge effects see Applying Edge Effects on page 318 Improving image clarity is the final step in image correction Use the Clarify and Sharpen commands to clarify and sharpen your images Note The Clarify and Sharpen Edge commands work on 16 million color or greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Clarifying Images Use the Clarify command to give your image a crisp focused look so objects stand out This command adds a sense of depth and clarity to the image It can also make hazy foggy or slightly out of focus images look clearer To clarify images 1 Make sure the image has no selections If necessary choose Selections gt Select None The Clarify command is not available if the image contains a selection 2 Choose Adjust gt Brightness Contrast gt Clarify 3 In the preview window center an important part of the image such as a face Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary 4 For Strength of effect use the smallest value that gives a satisfying result 5 Click OK 80 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Sharpening Images Paint Shop Pro contains several commands that sharpen your image by increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels Sharpen and Sharpen Mor
390. ool Select the flat end option to correct scratches that are perpendicular to object edges in the image or are in an open area the background is similar and has no objects in it Select the pointed end option to correct scratches at an angle to object edges in the image with this option you can place the tool closer to the edges 5 Center the cursor just outside one end of the scratch then click Achieving the best results and drag the bounding box over the scratch If the scratch background is highly textured or contains many image variations Say a flower a face and a wall the result may not be as Satisfying Try these tips to get the best results If the tool width is 10 or fewer pixels the box is single sided Position the box so that the edges surround but do not touch the scratch If the tool width is more than 10 pixels the box is double sided Position the box so that the inner edges surround but do not touch the scratch m Before using the tool select the area that contains the scratch 6 With the mouse button still pressed you can adjust the size and m Use a tool width about 3 or 4 pixels wider than the scratch itself m For scratches over several different backgrounds try removing the scratch a section at a time position of the rectangle m Press the Arrow keys to move the starting point of the bounding box by 1 pixel m Press PageUp or PageDown to increase or decrease the width of t
391. option the program displays a Custom text field below the Included list Type the name you want applied to the converted files Date The current date is added to the name Document Name Includes the original name in the new name but also allows for case changes upper lower m Sequence The position of a file in the renaming process is added to each file m Time The current time is added to the name A preview of the new file naming scheme appears at the bottom of the dialog Click OK to go back to the Batch Process dialog To stop the conversion process if Paint Shop Pro encounters an error mark the Stop on error check box If you do not mark it the program processes all the images without stopping The error messages appear in a Batch Conversion Status dialog Note If you are overwriting files during processing particularly many files you may want to leave this box unchecked to avoid having to confirm the overwriting of each file Use the Script group box to run a script on all the files before converting them In the text entry box enter the path for the script or click Browse and then navigate to where the script resides Mark the Run script in silent mode check box to ensure the script runs in this mode If you have already selected files to process click Start If you have not already selected the files to process do one of the following 390 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks To process specific files pre
392. option captures the dialog If no dialog is open this option captures the active application Object Captures an object within a program such as a menu bar toolbar icon or a document window When you initiate the capture you move the cursor over an object and it is highlighted with a rectangle 3 In the Activate capture using group box select the method for activating the screen capture Right mouse click A right mouse click activates a capture Hot key A key such as F11 or key combination such as Shift F1 activates a capture Select the option then click the drop down list to select a key or key combination Delay timer The screen capture is taken a certain number of seconds after you start the screen capture 42 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro How do I capture a Paint Shop Pro screen Open two copies of Paint Shop Pro In one copy set up the screen Capture options and start the capture feature press Shift C which minimizes the software Display the other Paint Shop Pro and press the hot key to activate the capture Note These options select the method for activating the capture after you have started the screen capture feature To start the screen capture you click the Capture Now button on this dialog or at the Paint Shop Pro work space press Shift C or choose File gt Import gt Screen Capture gt Start 4 In the Options group box select from the following options Include
393. or all of the following m In the Printer group box select the printer and whether to print to file On the Placement tab choose the number of copies the page orientation and the size and position of the image m On the Options tab choose the print output color options and print marks m On the Template tab choose to print a template with images or fill a template with the current image Selected options display on the image preview For more information on the options see Printing Multiple Images on a Page on page 360 3 Click the Print button to print the image Or click the Close button to save the print options without printing the image 360 Chapter 16 Printing Images Printing Multiple Images on a Page Use Paint Shop Pro s Print Layout window to print multiple images in a variety of ways For example print nine wallet size copies of the same image print two different images on the same page or arrange an image to print on labels Note After you arrange a layout save the layout as a template that you can use later For more information see Saving a Page Layout on page 365 Paint Shop Pro includes many templates to use or modify For more information see Printing Images Using a Template on page 366 About the Print Layout Window Print Layout Window Thumbnails Layout Por hip pres PI Tap neal SR a LE x AY To print images using the Print Layout Window 1 Open the Print
394. ort or apply To resize a vector objectand keep perspective You can also resize and reshape a vector object by the same proportions select the editing its nodes and contours using the Pen tool For instructions one lu ae eee selection see Editing Paths and Contours on page 245 tool and right click and drag a corner handle of the bounding box Note All of the commands in the Objects menu appear in a context menu that opens when you right click on objects contours or nodes To resize and reshape vector objects 1 Use the Object Selection Preset Shape or Text tool to select an Reshaping Objects object 2 Do one or more of the following Before m To resize click and drag one of the corner or edge handles To resize while keeping the current proportions right click and drag a corner handle To change perspective symmetrically press Ctrl and drag a corner handle horizontally or vertically To change perspective asymmetrically press Shift and drag a corner handle To shear press Shift while dragging a side handle To distort press Ctrl and Shift while dragging a handle Symmetric Asymmetric Perspective Perspective 244 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Rotation Controls Rotation Pivot Point h a Rotation Handle To rotate vector objects 1 Use the Object Selection tool to select an object 2 Click and drag the rotation handle Note To change the center of rota
395. ou want to create a greyscale image from a color image see Creating Greyscale Images on page 199 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 113 Decreasing Color Depth to 256 Colors 8 Bit To limit your image to colors most monitors can display and to reduce file size decrease the color depth of the image to 256 colors 8 bit You can choose a Web safe palette that assures your image displays properly on a variety of computer monitors To decrease the color depth to 256 colors 1 To emphasize the importance of certain colors in the conversion select an area of your image optional 2 Choose Image gt Decrease Color Depth gt 256 Colors 8 bit 3 In the Palette group box choose a palette option See About Palette Options on page 116 4 In the Reduction method group box choose a color reduction method See About Color Reduction Methods on page 115 Note The Ordered Dither option is available only for the Standard Web safe color palette 5 In the Options group box mark or clear these check boxes Boost marked colors by If you selected an area of your image and you are using the Optimized Median Cut method mark this check box to make the colors in the selection more important by a factor from 1 to 10 The selected colors will stand out from the rest of the image Include Windows colors If you chose the Optimized Median Cut or the Optimized Octree palette you can mark this check box if you
396. ount of disk space each images undo redo steps can use Limit undo redo steps per open image Sets the number of times you can undo or redo in each open image Compress undo redo information Saves disk space but slows down undo and redo operations Enable the redo system Activates the Redo command View Preferences The View tab controls some image window behaviors Zooming These options determine if Paint Shop Pro automatically resizes an image window when you zoom in or zoom out A window is resized to include as much of the image as will fit About color pickers In previous versions of Paint Shop Pro you could use the J asc Color Picker or the Windows Color Picker In Paint Shop Pro 8 the Windows Color Picker is not available Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 395 New Images Auto size With this check box marked Paint Shop Pro automatically zooms out to fit the entire image in the window if you open an image that is too large to fit in its image window After Changing Size Fit window to image check box is selected Paint Shop Pro automatically resizes the image window whenever you resize an image Auto Size With this check box marked if you increase an image s size to more than can fit in its window Paint Shop Pro reduces the image s magnification accordingly Display and Caching Preferences The Display and Caching tab controls presentation and caching Presentation Options Re use last type
397. over dialog Navigate to and select the graphics file you want to use as the rollover image Click Open On the Rollover Creator dialog the File box displays the file path For each action you want associated with a rollover mark the check box and choose a rollover file Note If you do not select a file then the original file is used Click Close to return to the Image Mapper or Image Slicer dialog Slicing Images Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 337 When you slice an image you divide it into several smaller images that you can save in different formats or at different levels of optimization Because these optimized images can take less time to download than one large image your Web pages may load more quickly Slicing an image also can reduce the number of graphics you need to save If your Web site displays the same logo or other graphic in more than one image you only need to save that section once if you slice the images you reload the same logo or graphic section into all the images The Imager Slicer works by creating a table from the image saving the location of each sliced section as a region in the table and generating the HTML code for the column and cells Copy this code into your source files so that the image can be reassembled when the user downloads the Web page The Image Slicer can also create rollovers which are areas that display secondary images when the user clicks or moves a mouse over them
398. ow zoom in or out as necessary Note You must use the right preview window for panning the image because you select the source color in the left preview window 3 Define the Source color in the left preview window using one of these methods m Click once to select a single pixel Zoom in to make sure you select the correct color m Click and drag to select a rectangular area To select an irregularly shaped area mark the Freehand check box then click and drag over the image To change your selection click the Clear button or make another selection Choose an area that is mostly one color You do not have to be overly precise with the selection area because pixels in the selection are averaged to determine the source color When you select the source color the Source color box displays the selected color 56 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs The Source and Target color boxes Select target colors manually by entering Hue Saturation and Lightness values rf Manual Hue Saturation Lightness p Preserving lightness and saturation If you mark Preserve Lightness and Preserve Saturation and the source and target colors are similar hues you may not notice much change in the adjusted image Try clearing one or both options To match the target color exactly clear Preserve Lightness and Preserve Saturation Choose the Target color using one of these methods To choose from a preset color
399. own list select a filter to use as a starting Randomize button until you find an point Choose Default for default settings or select one of the effect that you like other filters 3 Set the Matrix modifiers m The Divisor number is used to divide the Filter matrix values It can reduce the effects of the filter matrix Use the Compute button to calculate a Divisor that will adjust the brightness of the image back to no change The Bias number shifts each color value by a fixed amount The number is added to the color value produced by the filter matrix 4 In the Apply to group box pick the which color values the effect applies to Choose Color Channels and mark the channels or choose Grey Values 5 After you make changes click OK Paint Shop Pro applies the effect to the image 326 Chapter 14 Applying Effects 327 a CHAPTER BE Using the Web Tools Use the Web tools to create backgrounds for your Web pages map and slice images to create hotspots or rollovers Optimize images for the Web to reduce the image file size and make images load more quickly Share your images by sending them via e mail Protect your images by adding a watermark with creator and copyright information Contents Sending Images via E Mail ccccccccccccceceeeee sj Uploading Images to a Photo Sharing Service 0085 328 Previewing Images ina Web BrowSer cee eaee 330 Mapping ImageS cc ee eee tees 331 Cre
400. pace used for the image as well as its selections masks alpha channels and undo storage m Click the Creator Information tab to view or edit the image title artist name copyright description date created and date modified m Click the EXIF Information tab to view information for images taken with digital cameras In the Section group box mark the check boxes for the information you want to display Input Device Artist Date Image Shot Conditions and GPS Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program 25 Working with Dialogs Dialogs are windows that open when you choose certain Paint Shop The Average dialog Pro commands Use them to select and preview command options cro All dialogs remember where you last positioned them on the screen Preset Loe Use J m a 2 and re open in the same location Most dialogs have the following features in common Preview windows Zoom and navigate to see before and after views of changes See Using Preview Windows on page 26 Beale ama Presets Default settings and commonly used options that you have Filter apertune Fay saved as a script See Using and Creating Presets on page 386 cancel tee Numeric edit controls The controls that you use to select a value See Editing Numerical Values on page 27 Color boxes The box you click to select a color See Using Color Boxes on page 27 Randomize parameters button A button you click to try out ra
401. page 171 To clean up a layer created from a selection see Cleaning up the Edges of Layers Created from Selections on page 282 Chapter 11 Working with Layers 269 To copy a layer to another image Do either of the following On the Layer palette click and drag the name of the layer or layer group onto an open image and then release the mouse button Paint Shop Pro adds the layer above the selected layer of the second image On the Layer palette click the name of the layer or layer group that you want to copy choose Edit gt Copy select the image to copy to and then choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Layer The layer is pasted to the center of the canvas Creating Raster Layers from Selections Use the Selections gt Promote to Layer command to promote a selection to a layer Use the Selection Freehand Selection or Magic Wand tool to make a raster selection of raster or vector data The new layer is always a raster layer You can also copy a raster selection and paste it as a new layer To create a raster layer from a selection 1 Use the Selection Freehand Selection or Magic Wand tool to make a selection on the image 2 Do one of the following Choose Selections gt Promote to Layer The new layer is named Promoted Selection Choose Edit gt Copy to copy the selection and then choose Edit gt Paste gt As New Layer The new layer is named Raster plus a number Raster 1 270 Chapter
402. palette Note Adjustment and mask layers cannot be the bottom layer Vector objects cannot be moved from their layer group Create layer groups to organize the Layer palette Link layers or groups so they move together when you use the Move tool in the image The left panel of the Layer palette displays the names of layers and layer groups The icon to the left of each name indicates the type of layer background raster vector mask adjustment group or floating selection When there are more layers than the palette can display use the scroll bars on the right side to move the list of layers up or down The right panel of the Layer palette displays options for the layer including visibility opacity blend mode link set and lock transparency The Layer palette toolbar includes buttons for command tasks such as adding a new raster or vector layer To add and remove toolbar buttons see Customizing Toolbars and Menus on page 412 Layer Palette Raster Layer Link Lock Transparency toolbar layer button button Layer Raster 1 Cy Tey fe Pe i7 Ly Faster 1 sti A 5 Group ector 1 ay a a Normal 1g None A i i vectori D ur 1 HTE Eachoround iE BRE Vector Visibility Group Link layer toggle button 266 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Seeing layer contents Selecting a layer Faster 1 EI 5 Group Vector 1 BrightnessiContrast 1 F Mask Vector 1 E Td Yeohor 1 E Background
403. paths refer to Setting File Locations on page 403 In the New Workspace Name field type a name for the new workspace 4 Click Save If your workspace contains any modified images that you have not saved you will be prompted to save the changes to your image Choose from these options Yes Saves the image changes and saves the workspace No Saves the workspace but does not save the changes to your image Cancel The workspace is not saved Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 403 Loading Workspaces To load a workspace Quick Access to Workspaces 1 Choose File gt Workspace gt Load or press Shift Alt L to open Load a recently used workspace by E LpAC NOR PACE CANE choosing it from the list of recent 2 Select the workspace file you want to load workspaces located at the bottom i ai aoe gt Workspace menu Note To load a workspace not displayed in the dialog click Edit Paths For information on editing paths please see Setting File Locations on page 403 3 Click Open Workspace files do not include an actual copy of any open images Workspace files only reference the name and location of an image If you delete an image from your computer it will not display in a workspace If you had two windows open for the same image when you saved the workspace they both open again If an image from the workspace is already open Paint Shop Pro applies the workspace settings to the open im
404. plates folder in the Paint Shop Pro program directory and delete the layout from the folder Using a Template Use templates to simplify image placement and sizing Templates by default do not contain any specific images However Paint Shop Pro can save templates with links to images Save your own templates created from page layouts or use any of Paint Shop Pro s many templates By default sample templates are stored in the Print Templates folder of Paint Shop Pro program folder To change where Paint Shop Pro stores and searches for templates click the Edit template file locations button 4 or choose File gt Template locations For more information see Chapter 18 Setting File Locations To print images using a template 1 Open the Print Layout window From the Paint Shop Pro workspace open each of the images you want to print and then choose File gt Print Layout From the Paint Shop Pro Browser select the thumbnail of each image you want to print and then choose File gt Print Layout Each open file is displayed in the thumbnail list on the left side A blank layout is displayed 2 In the Print Layout window choose File gt Open Template or click Open Template to open the Templates dialog 3 Choose a category from the Select a category list Thumbnails of the templates in each category are shown in the window to the left Templates that have images saved with them will show colored template cells
405. point then press Shift and click the end point To continue the straight line move to the next point and press Shift and click Note If you erase on the background the eraser strokes change to the background color when you use the left mouse button or to the foreground color when you use the right mouse button To erase to transparency promote the background to a full layer Before and after applying the Background Eraser Chapter 9 Painting 217 Using the Background Eraser Tool Use the Background Eraser tool to selectively erase pixels For example in a photograph of a mountain range you can erase the sky To use the Background Eraser tool 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Background Eraser tool amp It may be hidden under the Eraser tool 2 On the Tool Options palette choose the brush tip size opacity hardness and other options See Setting Brush and Paint Options on page 211 For the opacity setting 100 erases pixels to complete transparency and a lower opacity erases pixels to partial transparency 3 Choose from these additional options Tolerance How closely the selected pixels must match the sampled pixel The range is 0 to 200 At lower settings only pixels with very similar colors are erased At higher settings more pixels are erased This edit box is unavailable if the Auto Tolerance check box is marked Sampling How the tool determines what pixels to erase Once samples at the
406. point or range The number in parentheses is the number of pixels that are the selected value s Above The percent of image pixels that are above the value s of the selected point or range Below The percent of image pixels that are below the value s of the selected point or range 6 To view the mean and median values for a channel in the Display channel drop down list choose a channel Red Green Blue Hue Saturation Lightness or Greyscale The Mean field displays the average value for the selected channel The Median field displays the middle value in the range of values for the selected channel Note The Display Channel has no effect on what is graphed in the histogram and also does not affect the four statistics immediately below it Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 203 Understanding Histogram Values The value of a selected channel is graphed from 0 to 255 along the horizontal axis of the histogram The meaning of the value depends on the selected channel Red Green and Blue values represent the amount of red green or blue in each color channel A channel value of zero indicates the color is not present and a value of 255 indicates the color is at full strength For example if the graph has a spike at the value 128 for the Red channel then there are a large number of pixels with a red value of 128 or middle red Hue Saturation and Lightness values are a different representation of color
407. posed to be rectangular For example the feature may be a building with sides that are angled but should be straight On the Tool Options palette fine tune the position of the bounding box by specifying the X and Y positions of the four corner handles Double click the image or click Apply Note To reset the perspective correction box to the original rectangle click Reset on the Tool Options palette Use the Mesh Warp tool to deform images layers and selections Warping with the Mesh Warp Clicking the tool places a grid or mesh on the image The grid tool intersections have mesh points or nodes that you drag to create deformations Note The Mesh Warp tool is limited to deforming the interior of a selection Use the Warp brush when you want to blend the selection into the rest of the image Chapter 6 Editing Images 147 To use the Mesh Warp tool 1 On the Tools toolbar select the Mesh Warp tool Ll Other ways to warp images 2 Drag the nodes to deform the image Use the Warp Brush See Warping Images on page 215 Use the Warp Effect See Applying Geometric Effects on page 319 Activate and move nodes using the keyboard Press Ctrl PgUp or Ctrl PgDn to activate the next or previous node in a row Press Shift Ctrl PgUp or Shift Ctrl PgDn to activate the next or previous node in a column Press the Ctrl Arrow keys to move the node 1 pixel Press the Shift Ctrl Arrow key
408. ptions palette click the Line Style drop down window Note If you want to copy an existing line style to create a new style or if you want to edit or delete an existing line style select that style in the Line Style drop down window 3 Click the Custom button to open the Styled Lines dialog 4 In the Caps group box choose end cap settings for the line segments For details see End Cap Styles on page 236 5 In the Style group box choose dash and gap lengths For details see Dash Segment Style on page 236 6 When you are finished do one of the following If you are creating a new line click Save As New Type a unique name in the Styled Line Name field Click OK If you are editing an existing line click Save To close the dialog without saving changes click Cancel Note To reset the dialog back to the style you started with click the Reset button Ee 236 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects End Cap Styles The Caps group box in the Styled Lines dialog controls the end cap style of each segment in the line style The settings are First Cap From the drop down list pick the style for the first segment in the line Size Click this button to open the Cap Size dialog and adjust the size of the end cap To set and adjust height and width equally select the Link axes check box Last Cap From the drop down list pick the style for the last segment in the line Different Segment Caps Mark t
409. quiring images from digital camera or scanner 38 from mounted drive 39 screen capture 41 using TWAIN 40 using Windows XP 39 adding contours 246 additive colors 106 Adjust menu Add Remove Noise Add Noise 321 Automatic Scratch Removal 77 Deinterlace 62 Despeckle 65 Edge Preserving Smooth 66 JPEG Artifact Removal 63 Median Filter 67 Moir Pattern Removal 64 Salt and Pepper Filter 65 Texture Preserving Smooth 68 Blur Average 78 Blur 78 Blur More 78 Gaussian 78 Motion Blur 78 Brightness and Contrast Automatic Contrast Enhancement 60 Brightness Contrast 191 Channel Mixer 189 Clarify 79 Curves 192 Equalize 191 Gamma Correction 193 Highlights Midtones Shadows 194 Histogram Adjustment 205 Levels 195 Stretch 191 Threshold 198 Color Balance Automatic Color Balance 54 Black and White Points 188 Color Balance 185 Fade Correction 59 Manual Color Correction 55 57 Red Green Blue 184 Grey World Color Balance 58 Hue and Saturation Automatic Saturation Enhancement 61 Colorize 197 Hue Map 196 Hue Saturation Lightness 186 Lens Correction 421 422 Index Barrel Distortion Correction 70 Fisheye Distortion Correction 70 Pincushion Distortion Correction 71 Negative Image 200 Red Eye Removal 72 Sharpness Sharpen 80 Sharpen More 80 Unsharp Mask 80 Softness Soft Focus 68 Soften 68 Soften More 68 Adjustment layers about 283 adding 283 editing 285 modificati
410. r Color Legacy Luminance Luminance Legacy Blend Mode Result Displays pixels of underlying layers based on the opacity of pixels on the selected layer If data is fully opaque no pixels show through As the opacity decreases more pixels from underlying layers show through Displays pixels in the selected layer that are darker than the underlying layers Pixels lighter than the underlying layers disappear Displays pixels in the selected layer that are lighter than the underlying layers Pixels darker than the underlying layers disappear Applies the hue of the selected layer to the underlying layers without changing the saturation or lightness Applies the hue of the selected layer to the underlying layers without changing the saturation or lightness Applies the saturation of the selected layer to the underlying layers without affecting the hue or lightness Applies the saturation of the selected layer to the underlying layers without affecting the hue or lightness Applies the hue and saturation of the selected layer to the underlying layers without affecting the lightness Applies the hue and saturation of the selected layer to the underlying layers without affecting the lightness Applies the luminance or lightness of the selected layer to the underlying layers without affecting the hue or saturation Applies the luminance or lightness of the selected layer to the u
411. r Halo size set a percentage value to choose the size of the halo At lower values the halo is small At higher values the halo effect is large 8 For Halo visibility set a percentage value to choose the strength of the halo visibility At lower values the halo effect is subtle At higher values the halo effect is more obvious 9 Click OK Correcting Image Distortions Camera lenses can create distortions in photographs You see these distortions most often in wide angle photographs in close up photographs taken with cameras with fixed focal ranges and in cameras with inexpensive lenses such as disposable cameras Note The Barrel and Fisheye Distortion Correction commands work on 16 million color and greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 You must correct lens distortions before cropping the image For distortion corrections to work properly the axis of the camera lens must coincide with the center of the image 70 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Correcting Barrel Distortions If your image has a barrel distortion it looks pushed out at the center Lines that should be straight are curved To correct a barrel distortion 1 Choose Adjust gt Lens Correction gt Barrel Distortion Correction 2 Set the Strength of the correction Adjust this value until the distortion disappears Look for lines in the image that are curved and adjust the Strength Value until they become s
412. r by lightness or By Hue in order by color 3 To replace a color double click it The Color dialog opens and displays the Jasc Color Picker For more information see Choosing Colors from the Jasc Color Picker on page 86 Make your selection and click OK Notice that the image updates with the new color To return the palette to its original colors on the Edit Palette dialog click the Revert button 4 Click OK Why should I save a palette When you save a palette you can load it into other images a good way to achieve consistent colors across several images Saving a palette is also useful if you are making many color changes and want to save a backup copy of the palette If you are using a palette with the Current image only you don t need to save itas a separate file because the palette colors are saved with the image itself Color depth changes When you load a palette the color depth of the image decreases If necessary to match the number of colors in the palette For example if you load a 256 color palette into a 16 million 24 bit color image the image decreases to a 256 color 8 bit image What if change my mind If you loaded a palette and now you want to change it back to the Original palette or color depth click the Undo button or press Ctrl Z 118 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials To save an image palette 1 2 Choose Image gt Palette gt Save Palette
413. r commands Average Removes noise that occurs throughout an image by adjusting the intensity of each pixel to the average intensity of its surrounding pixels Also removes color dithering that results from increasing the color depth of an image from paletted to 24 bit Blur and Blur More Remove noise by applying smooth transitions and decreasing the contrast in your image The Blur More effect applies the Blur effect with more intensity Use either effect to reduce graininess in your image Gaussian Blurs an image by an adjustable amount Blends a specific number of pixels incrementally following a bell shaped curve The blurring is dense in the center and feathers at the edges Motion Blur Blurs in a particular direction from 0 to 359 degrees and at a particular strength from 1 to 100 Use this effect to simulate taking a picture of a moving object using a fixed exposure time To apply a Blur effect 1 On the Layer palette click the layer containing the area you want to blur 2 To limit the blur to a specific area make a selection in the image Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 79 3 Choose Adjust gt Blur then choose a effect For the Blur and Blur More effects the effect is applied to the image or selection For the Average Gaussian and Motion effects a dialog opens Choose from the options then click OK The effect is applied to the image or selection Improving Image Clarity Accentuating Edges and C
414. r only To apply it to all underlying layers drag it from the layer group to the main level For information on editing the mask see Editing Masks on page 294 To view the mask on the image on the Layer palette click the Mask Overlay toggle 294 Chapter 12 Working with Masks Masked image with and without overlay Editing Masks Ways to modify masks Use the painting tools See Chapter 9 Painting Paint with gradients textures or patterns See Creating Gradient Pattern or Texture Masks on page 296 Apply effects commands See Chapter 14 Applying Effects Create a shape in one image then use it as a mask in another image See Saving Masks on page 297 Use the Move tool to move the mask layer within the image canvas Displaying the Mask Overlay When you create a mask the image window shows the effect of the mask but does not display the mask automatically Use the Mask Overlay toggle on the Layer palette to display the mask overlay By default the overlay is a 50 percent opacity red color for completely masked pixels and lower opacity red for partially masked pixels When you paint or modify the mask this overlay shows what is painted or changed To change the color and opacity of the mask overlay see Changing the Mask Overlay Color on page 295 When the mask overlay is displayed the Mask Overlay toggle displays When the overlay is hidden the Mask Overlay to
415. r to the nearest color in the standard Web safe palette Use this method to create images for the Web that can be viewed without color distortion on most monitors Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 117 Working with Image Palettes Should load a Web safe palette for Web images Not necessarily When you load an image palette into 16 million color images you decrease the color depth to 256 colors which flattens all layers and makes many effect and correction commands unavailable Except when you want to control the specific colors in a palette keep your image at a color depth of 16 million colors in Psplmage format When you finish editing the image export it to GIF or PNG format using a Web safe palette Your original Psplmage file remains intact for later editing See Saving Images for the Web on page 341 Editing the palette of a greyscale image If you select the Edit Palette command for a greyscale image you are prompted to change the image to 8 bit indexed color Doing so allows you to add color to your greyscale image similar to the Colorize command An image palette is a collection of colors that an image uses similar to a painter s palette of paints An image palette is a subset of all the colors your monitor can display Images with color depths of 16 to 256 colors have an image palette that contains those colors that are used in the image You can edit this palette to fine tune
416. r use the Minimize and Maximize buttons in the upper right corner 18 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Flyout menu displaying tools Why some tools are inactive greyed out Some tools work only on raster or vector layers For example the Paint Brush and Clone Brush work only on raster layers the Object Selection tool works only on vector layers For information on raster and vector layers see About Layers on page 260 Using the Tools Use the Paint Shop Pro tools to crop paint draw add text and perform other image editing tasks Select a tool by clicking its button on the Tools toolbar A tool button with a small arrow on the right side includes several tools Click the down arrow to display a flyout menu and then choose a tool To view information about a tool pause the cursor over it A ToolTip displays the tool name and shortcut key and the Status bar displays hints for using the tool To use a tool 1 Click its button on the Tools toolbar For tools that share a flyout with other tools click the down arrow next to the tool and select the tool 2 Specify options using the Tool Options palette See Setting Tool Options below 3 Use the tool on the image For information on moving hiding and displaying the Tools toolbar see Using Toolbars on page 15 Setting Tool Options After you select a tool from the Tools toolbar set its options in the Tool Options palette Options
417. r vector text use the Object Selection tool to scale rotate shear distort or apply perspective to text For more information see Resizing and Reshaping Vector Objects on page 243 For raster text use the Deform tool to scale rotate shear distort or apply perspective to a raster selection or a layer For more information see Scaling and Transforming Images on page 143 Applying Effects to Text Apply any of Paint Shop Pro s effects to raster text to create an endless variety of looks Apply a drop shadow or a beveled edge turn text into brush strokes or colored chalk For vector text convert Tosite it into a raster selection and then apply effects Type of Text How to Apply Effects Text with buttonize effect and drop shadow effect Jasc Software Raster Create the raster text on a transparent layer separate from other raster data in the image Select the text on the layer using the Magic Wand tool and then apply any of the commands on the Effects menu Vector Use the Object Selection tool to select the text Choose Selections gt From Vector Object to create a raster selection of the text then choose Paste gt As New Layer Follow the steps above for raster text Turn off the visibility of the vector text but keep the vector text in case you want to edit it 310 Chapter 13 Working with Text Creating Text with Image Patterns There are several ways to create text that is filled with an image
418. reate a rectangle around the object s The rectangle must enclose all objects completely to select them A bounding box with handles surrounds the objects you selected For information on using these handles to edit the objects see Resizing and Reshaping Vector Objects on page 243 To select vector objects from the Layer palette 1 On the Layer palette click the plus sign to next to a layer to expand the layer and display the objects within the layer Click the name of the object To select multiple objects press Shift and click each object name A bounding box in the image surrounds the objects you selected To select all objects on all visible layers 1 On the Layer palette make visible the each object you want to select If there are objects you don t want selected make their layers invisible For more information see Showing and Hiding Layers Groups and Vector Objects on page 270 Right click the name of a vector object and choose Select All from the context menu 162 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images About the Text tool Making a text shaped selection is just one thing that the Text tool can do The tool s main function is to add text to your image For more information see Chapter 13 Working with Text Selecting Text You can make two types of selections with text Use the Object Selection tool to select vector text so that you can edit it Use the Text tool to create a r
419. rge it with Chapter 11 Working with Layers 281 3 Choose Layers gt Merge gt Merge Down to merge the two layers The following table describes how layer types are merged Top Layer Any layer Vector Mask Any Layer Any Layer Mask Merged with Raster Vector Mask Background Aiae Creates Raster Vector Mask Background Not Permitted To merge all layers Choose Layers gt Merge gt Merge All Flatten to merge the layers into one background layer To merge all visible layers 1 On the Layer palette click the Visibility toggle for each layer that you do not want to merge 2 Choose Layers gt Merge gt Merge Visible to merge all visible layers into a raster layer named Merged Invisible layers are not affected The new raster layer which maintains the transparency information of the original layers is the active layer Note If a visible layer is in a layer group only the visible layers in that group will be merged If the layer group is marked invisible making all layers within the group invisible none of the layers within the group will be merged To merge all layers in a layer group 1 On the Layer palette click the layer group or a layer within the group that you want to merge 2 Choose Layers gt Merge gt Merge Group to merge all layers in the group into one raster layer 282 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Color depth These commands work on 16 million color and greyscale images only To in
420. rk Boost selected colors to give selected colors more weight by a factor of the value you enter Use this if you have made a selection in the image and you want its colors stand out from the rest of the image After marking the check box and set the value to determine the amount of color boosting Mark the Include Windows colors check box to include the 16 standard Windows colors in the palette If the image will be used on the Web mark this check box 350 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools PNG Optimizer Transparency Tab The option you choose in this tab determines which area of the image becomes transparent To create a transparency from a selection make the selection before opening the PNG Optimizer dialog 1 For the type of transparency choose from these options No transparency Saves the image without transparency Single color transparency Makes one color transparent If the image contains transparency then you can then select the Existing Image or Layer Transparency option described below If the image does not contain a transparency then select the Areas that Match this Color option The Single Color Transparency option usually creates a smaller file than the Alpha Channel Transparency option but selecting it causes the image to lose existing alpha channel transparency Alpha channel transparency Uses the image s alpha channel transparency Because paletted images cannot contain alpha channels this option is
421. rk durability You can change the copyright date image attributes and durability each time you embed a watermark You only need to configure the creator ID the first time you embed a watermark To embed a watermark 1 Choose Image gt Watermarking gt Embed Watermark to open the Embed Watermark dialog 2 Choose the information you want the watermark to contain Creator ID The identification of the creator of the image Initially set to Jasc Watermark Demo To receive your own Creator ID register with Digimarc click the Personalize button See Personalizing the Creator ID on page 353 Copyright year s Type either one or two years in the copyright boxes Digimarc accepts years from 1922 to the present Image Attributes The Image Attributes are the restrictions shown when the program displays the watermark information Mark the check boxes of the attributes you want to apply to the image Restricted Use Do Not Copy or Adult Content Watermark Durability The durability indicates how visible watermarks are on the image For more information see Setting the Watermark Durability below 3 Click OK Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 353 Setting the Watermark Durability The watermark durability indicates how visible watermarks are on the image For images to be printed use stronger watermarks For images to be displayed on a monitor use weaker watermarks because they are not as visible While stronger waterm
422. ro program folder You can also include TEX files from previous versions of Paint Shop Pro in this folder To Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 95 select the current texture for the foreground or background material On the Materials palette click the Texture button on the Foreground Material box or the Background Material box The most recently chosen texture becomes active To 1 To ND _ choose a new texture On the Materials palette do one of the following To choose a foreground texture click the Foreground Material box To choose a background texture click the Background Material box The Material dialog opens Mark the Texture check box Click the Texture Type drop down list and select a type of texture Select the options for the texture Angle The angle or direction of the pattern from 0 to 359 degrees You can also click and drag the control needle to change the angle Scale The scale from 10 to 250 percent of the image s actual size At smaller values the image is repeated more frequently throughout the texture At larger values the image may be cropped and may lose detail and become blurry As you modify the options the Current color box displays the resulting material the style plus the texture To change the style of the material click the Color Gradient or Pattern tab and specify the options Click OK create a new texture Create an image in Paint
423. roduces a smaller file size and produces faster download times even though both files are 8 bit images To decrease the color depth to a selected number of colors 1 To emphasize the importance of certain colors in the conversion select an area of your image optional 2 Choose Image gt Decrease Color Depth gt X Colors 4 8 bit 3 In the Number of colors edit box enter the number of colors from 2 to 256 for the converted image s palette 4 In the Palette group box select the palette options See About Palette Options on page 116 5 In the Reduction method group box choose a color reduction method See About Color Reduction Methods on page 115 Give it a try When you decrease an image s color depth don t be intimidated by the mathematical algorithms that make up the color reduction methods and the palette options Your best bet is to start with the default settings see if you like the result and then try out several other combinations of settings Finding the right options is not an exact science it takes some experimentation Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 115 6 In the Options group box mark or clear these check boxes Boost marked colors by If you selected an area of your image and you are using the Optimized Median Cut or Optimized Octree methods mark this check box to make the colors in the selection more important by a factor from 1 to 10 The selected colors will s
424. rotate clockwise 6 Click OK Paint Shop Pro adds the frame to the image as a new layer named Picture Frame Note If the width and height differ by a considerable amount the frame appears thicker along the shorter sides Chapter 14 Applying Effects 323 Mathematically Combining Two Images Paint Shop Pro can create a variety of effects using the Arithmetic effect which combines two images to produce a third one based on settings you select To combine images using the Arithmetic command 1 Open the two images you want to combine 2 Choose Image gt Arithmetic to open the Image Arithmetic dialog 3 In the Image 1 and Image 2 drop down lists select the images to combine The size of Image 1 determines the size of the new image 4 In the Function group box select a method for combining the images The color data from the two images is combined on a pixel by pixel basis according to the function Function Add Subtract Multiply Difference Lightest Darkest Average Or And New Color Value Equals Image Value Image 2 Value Image Value Image 2 Value Image 1 Value x Image 2 Value Absolute Value of Image 1 Value Image 2 Value Maximum of Image 1 Value Image 2 Value Minimum of Image 1 Value Image 2 Value Image 1 value Image 2 Value 2 Binary Or Binary And 5 From the Channel group box select the color channels to combine m Mark the All channels check box to use
425. rushes folder in the Paint Shop Pro program folder Note If you are sharing a Preset for a custom brush brushes created from selections then you will need to select both the PspBrush file and the associated Jasc PSP Script file Chapter 9 Painting 215 Warping Images The warp brushes create strokes that produce a warping effect on image pixels You can twirl areas of images contract or expand parts of images and create many interesting effects Before and after applying the Warp Brush tool To use the Warp Brush 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Warp Brush fA It may be hidden under the Paint Brush or Airbrush 2 Specify the brush options such as shape size and hardness See Default brush options Setting Brush and Paint Options on page 211 To reset brush options to their default values on the Tool Options 3 For the Strength value enter a percentage 0 to 100 that palette click the Presets drop down specifies how strong the warping effect is Full strength is 100 window and choose Default or minimum strength 1s 1 i plpaGeer top elaulnouuan 4 Under Warp Modes choose the type of warp Push pushes pixels in the direction of the stroke similar to What are time dependent smearing paint in a time independent way warp types Time dependent means that the longer you hold the brush over an area the more the brush produces Contract 4 pulls pixels into the center of the brush in a time the effect
426. s Vector Layers Vector layers are layers with only vector objects lines and shapes vector text or vector groups Vector objects and text are composed of geometric characteristics lines curves and their locations When you edit vector objects and text you edit these lines and curves rather than editing individual pixels Vector graphics and vector text maintain their clarity and detail when scaled to any size or printed at any resolution Use vector layers to create objects or text that you can easily edit To display the names of vector objects on a vector layer click the plus sign in front of the layer name on the Layer palette Vector objects must be on vector layers If you create a vector object while a raster layer is selected Paint Shop Pro creates a vector layer just above the current layer In addition you cannot move a vector layer to a non vector layer Background Layer The background layer is the bottom layer of an image It is named Background on the Layer palette and cannot be renamed When you import file formats such as JPEG GIF or PNG into Paint Shop Pro they are one layer the background layer The background layer contains raster data but cannot display transparency You cannot change its order in the stack its blend mode or its opacity To move a background layer higher in the stacking order promote it to a regular raster layer see Promoting a Background Layer to a Regular Raster L
427. s Contract a vector layer or layer group to make the Layer palette easier to navigate To expand a layer or layer group On the Layer palette click the plus sign H in front of the vector layer or layer group name To contract a layer or layer group On the Layer palette click the minus sign El in front of the vector layer or layer group name Adding New Layers to Images Color depth An image must be greyscale or 16 million color to create adjustment layers or more than one raster layer If you have an image of another color depth Paint Shop Pro prompts you to convert it to 16 million colors when you try to add a new adjustment or raster layer Alternative ways to create new layers For all layer types place the cursor over a layer name on the Layer palette and then right click and select the new layer type from the context menu To create a layer with default layer properties press Shift and click one of the new layer buttons on the Layer palette New Raster Layer New Vector Layer or New Mask Layer There are many ways to add layers to images Create a new layer promote the background to a regular layer duplicate an existing layer or make a selection and turn it into a layer Creating New Layers Create new layers to use for placing new elements in your images To create a new layer 1 On the Layer palette click the layer which you want to add a layer above 2 Do one of the following To cr
428. s GRD format which is commonly used in other applications To export a gradient 1 Display the Gradient Editor dialog See To display the Gradient Editor dialog on page 99 2 If you have not already selected the gradient to export choose it from the Types box and edit its settings as desired 3 Click the Export button 4 Select the folder in which to save the gradient Paint Shop Pro s default gradients are stored in the Gradients folder within the Paint Shop Pro program folder 5 In the File name edit box type a name for the new gradient 6 Click the Export button Importing Gradients You can import gradients in the GRD file format which is a format used in other applications To import a GRD gradient 1 Display the Gradient Editor dialog See To display the Gradient Editor dialog on page 99 2 Click the Import button 3 Select the folder containing the gradient you want to import All GRD files are listed 4 Select the gradient s file name 5 Click OK Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials 103 Renaming and Deleting Gradients You can rename or delete gradient types To rename a gradient 1 Display the gradient you want to rename in the Gradient Editor dialog See To display the Gradient Editor dialog on page 99 2 Click the Rename button 3 Type the new name 4 Click OK To delete a gradient How can restore Paint Shop Pro s default gradients Do a
429. s to move the node 5 pixels m Click and drag a node to move it Press Shift while dragging a node to move the entire row or column Press Ctrl while dragging a node to deform the row or column into a smooth curve Choose settings from the Tool Options palette Draft quality Choose the quality of the preview that displays while you edit the mesh nodes Note Increasing the quality can slow the warping process in large images Final apply Clear the Best Quality check box to create a finished mesh warp at the lower quality of the mesh preview Mesh horizontal and Mesh vertical The values indicate the number of mesh lines within the frame The border lines are not counted Note You can change the grid size as you work Entering new Mesh values reconfigures the grid and returns it to the original position The image retains any deformations you have made Symmetric Mark this check box to create a grid that evenly covers the image If you image is not square there will be different values for Mesh horizontal and Mesh vertical Clear this check box to adjust the Mesh horizontal and Mesh vertical independently Show grid Clear the check box to hide the mesh warp grid You can save the position of the mesh nodes the deformation map to apply the deformation to other images For instructions see Saving and Loading Deformation Maps on page 148 5 Use Edit gt Undo to undo changes to the mesh as you edit 6 To apply
430. s Ctrl X To copy a selection or a layer 1 Select the area or layer you want to copy 2 Do either of the following To copy the selection or active layer choose Edit gt Copy or press Ctrl C To copy all layers of the selected area choose Edit gt Copy Merged or press Ctrl Shift C To paste a cut or copied selection as a new image Choose Edit gt Paste gt Paste As New Image or press Ctrl V To paste a cut or copied selection as a new layer 1 Select the image into which you want to paste the selection 2 Choose Edit gt Paste gt Paste As New Layer or press Ctrl L When the pasted selection looks out of proportion When you paste data into another image the data keeps its original pixel dimensions If one image is much larger or smaller than the other the selection may look out of proportion After you paste the selection use the Deform tool to scale the selection See the sidebar Quick Steps for proportional scaling on page 144 Resize the two images to make them similar size before copying and pasting See Resizing Images on page 137 Another way to remove a color from a selection Modify your selection by choosing Selections gt Modify gt Select Color Range For detailed instructions see Adding or Removing a Color from a Selection on page 170 Chapter 6 Editing Images 125 To paste a cut or copied selection into a layer 1 On the Layer palette of the
431. s Differ 106 Working with Color Channels 0 2 00 0 5 107 Understanding Color Depth 0 2 000 000 108 Working with Image Palettes 2 005 117 Making a Palette Color Transparent 120 Editing Images 000 cee eaes 123 Cutting Copying and Pasting 0 0 00 e ee eeee 124 Deletine Wmaces 4 iebeeea geen neha ES EFE RATER 127 Usine Undo REC see aeiaai E aE aed ead nee eee 127 Repeating Commands 2420 c2e4cunn5 b4e Gb eee teen Sake bed 129 Using Rulers Grids and Guides 0 0 00005 129 CLOppin es MAC Coins aoc oeee se ee oe nee eas sees eee eees 134 Resizing Mages 24 34 0465 cheeses a do e8 4 Sans 137 Changing Canvas Size 6 ee eens 139 Rotating Images 0 0 cee eens 140 Scaling and Transforming Images 000 143 Correcting Image Perspective 0 0 00 eee eee 145 Warping Images 0 0 cee eens 146 Adding Borders to Images 0 0 00 cece eee eee 150 Flipping and Mirroring Images 000005 151 Combining Two Images vi o2c20c n 04a0eedeusdenebives 151 Contents il Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 153 Using the Selection Tools 6 05 sctcacdehedece se ean 154 Using Edit Selecto 24 2464440 0406 6440064864044 440 5 164 Working with Standard and Floating Selections 165 Adjusting Selection Borders 2 000 ee
432. s Shift and press an arrow key Note Start or end nodes are easy to find The cursor will display START END when it is over the node If the shape is closed the cursor will display CLOSE Moving Nodes Moving a node alters the shape of a vector object If an object has more than one contour move a contour by moving all of its nodes Move the path to move the entire object To move a node 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Edit Mode e 3 Click and drag a node to a new position or press the arrow keys Note To move multiple nodes select them and click and drag a selected node Changing Curves and Lines You can adjust the shape of the contour at a node by changing the node type adjusting the node s control arms or changing the line segments From Cusp to Symmetrical p pa Adjusting Control Arms Ny a Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 253 Changing Node Types For example to soften a sharp corner change a cusp node to a symmetrical node To adjust a curve by changing the node type 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Edit Mode e 3 Select a node 4 Do one of the following m Choose Objects gt Node Type and select a node type Asymmetrical Ctrl Shift S Symmetrical Ctrl S Cusp Ctrl U Smooth m Right click on the node choose a Node Type from the context me
433. s a partially obscured pupil In the left preview window select the first eye to correct For the Auto Human Eye or Auto Animal Eye method click anywhere inside the red area of the eye to select the eye automatically You can also click and drag from the center of the eye to the outside edge of the red area For the Freehand Pupil Outline method click and drag the cursor around the edge of the red area of the pupil Release the mouse button when you reach the beginning point of the selection For the Point to Point Pupil Outline method left click at points a few pixels apart around the edge of the red area of the pupil Right click to reverse a click When you reach the beginning point double click Note To remove a selection click Delete After you select the eye a circle appears around the selected area and a control box for making adjustments encloses the circle The right preview window displays the corrected eye 74 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Need to change a setting To make further corrections on any eye you have selected click the circle surrounding the eye You can change any of the settings except Method To change the correction method remove the selection click Delete select the method and then select the eye again 6 Make sure the selection is positioned and sized properly over the red area of the eye To move the selection drag it to a new location For the Auto Animal Eye
434. s and Special Effects Black and White Points Feature Set the overall tonal range of photographs and bring out image detail without losing information Lens Distortion Correction Quickly correct images that have pincushion barrel or fisheye distortions Balls and Bubbles Have fun creating realistic transparent bubbles with full control over the reflection Halftone Create a trendy dot representation of a photograph Soft Focus Create your own glamorous shot Magnifying Lens Draw focus to an area of the image This effect simulates placing a lens on the image Enjoy full control over lighting reflection optical distortions and magnification strength Lens Distortion Simulate many lens distortion effects such as fisheye barrel or pincushion Offset Precisely define where an image wraps when creating seamless patterns Seamless Tiling Professionally prepare high quality seamless patterns and tiled images Share Images with Others Enhanced Print Layout Use a variety of preset printing templates designed to offer common page layouts and commercial papers such as 3 x 5 s 4 x 6 s and business cards Create and save your own custom templates to reuse or share with others More File Types Now Paint Shop Pro supports even more file types such as new JPEG 2000 and PDF as well as Wireless Bitmap WBMP EXIF Photo Information View detailed EXIF photo information from digital cameras including date time resolution
435. s for which you know the size you need use inches or centimeters By starting with the final image dimensions you can produce an image that will fit the page For printed images that you will import into another software package such as a word processor and resize as needed use whichever unit is easiest for you For images to be displayed on screen use pixels You can resize an image after you have created it but doing so may result in loss of image data For more information see Resizing Images on page 137 34 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Image Resolution The number of pixels per inch ppi or pixels per centimeter in images It is important to select an appropriate resolution Too low a resolution causes pixelation or large pixels that produce coarse output Too high a resolution adds to an image s memory requirements without producing a proportional increase in its quality Typical image resolutions are as follows For images displayed on Web pages use 72 ppi For images printed to a high quality printer set the image resolution to one half to one quarter of the actual printer resolution For example for a laser printer with a resolution of 600 dots per inch dpi use an image resolution of 150 to 300 ppl Color Depth The number of colors that a pixel can display Each pixel s color information is stored in a certain number of computer bits from 1 bit to 24 bits In a 1 bit imag
436. s look shiny or glowing or to images only To increase the color add dimension to objects Use gradients to fade Web page graphics depth of an image see page 109 into other content or use a black to white gradient as a mask You choose gradients on the Gradient tab of the Material dialog Example applications of dient AOR To choose a foreground or background gradient 1 On the Materials palette do one of the following To choose a foreground gradient click the Foreground Material box To choose a background gradient click the MAKE WAVES Background Material box The Material dialog opens 2 Click the Gradient tab 3 Click the Gradient Type drop down list and select a gradient Note The first three gradients 1 Foreground Background 2 Fading Foreground 3 Fading Background use the current foreground and background colors The other types use custom colors You can edit the colors of all gradient types see Editing Gradients on page 98 92 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials The Gradient tab of the Material dialog Get gradient ideas from preset shapes Several of Paint Shop Pro s preset shapes use gradients to create highlights and shadows You can use these shapes as resources for your gradient applications For more information on preset Shapes see Drawing Preset Shapes on page 231 4 Select the options for the gradient Style The style for the gradient Lin
437. s on the Patterns tab of the Material dialog Color depth Patterns are available for greyscale To choose a foreground or background pattern and 16 million color images only To increase the color depth of an 1 On the Materials palette do one of the following 109 Image see page 109 To choose a foreground pattern click the Foreground Material box To choose a background pattern click the The Pattern tab of the Background Material box Material dialog The Material dialog opens Cobor Gradient E Pattern 2 Click the Pattern tab py 3 Click the Pattern Type drop down list and select a type of P attern pattern Type 94 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Pattern versus texture For a comparison of patterns and textures see Understanding the Difference Between Patterns and Textures on page 96 4 Select the options for the pattern Angle The angle or direction of the pattern from 0 to 359 degrees You can also click and drag the control needle on the pattern to change the angle Scale The scale from 10 to 250 percent of the image s actual size At smaller values the image is repeated more frequently throughout the pattern At larger values the image may be cropped and may lose detail and become blurry 5 To save this pattern as a swatch that you can access later click the Add to Swatches button type a name and press Enter 6 Click OK To use an image as a pattern 1
438. s one pixel high Zoom in until you can see individual pixels to determine how many pixels make up one scan line and then resize the image so that each scan line is one pixel For example if the enlarged image has scan lines that are two pixels high you would resize it by 50 percent Keep in mind that the image loses clarity when you resize it To deinterlace an image 1 Make sure the image has no selections If necessary choose Selections gt Select None The Deinterlace command is not available if the image contains a selection 2 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Deinterlace 3 In the preview window center the area of the image where the scan lines are most apparent 4 For Scanlines to retain select either Odd or Even to determine whether the odd numbered or even numbered scan lines are kept 5 Click OK Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 63 Removing Artifacts from JPEG Images When you save a file to the JPEG format from any software package such as scanning software the file information is compressed to create a smaller file The compression produces artifacts unwanted image problems that can appear as halos or color leakage beyond the edges of objects checkerboard problems on smooth backgrounds or blocky looking areas in an image Use Paint Shop Pro s JPEG Artifact Removal command to restore a JPEG image to its original appearance Note Because JPEG compression discards image information there are
439. se a measurement system for the rulers from the Display units drop down list Choose Toolbar colors to have the ruler color match Paint Shop Pro s toolbars or choose Black on White rulers Default Resolution Choose a measurement system from the drop down list and enter the default resolution for new images You can override this resolution on an image by image basis by modifying the settings in the New Image dialog Vector Coordinates When this check box is marked objects will snap to the center of pixels while they re moving You will have to zoom in very far to see this Transparency Preferences The Transparency tab controls the grid representing transparent backgrounds and transparent areas of layers Grid size Chose a grid size from the drop down list Grid Colors Choose a color scheme from the Scheme drop down list To customize the grid colors click inside the Color 1 or Color 2 boxes and select new colors Preview displays your proposed changes to the transparency grid Warnings Preferences The Warnings tab controls how warning dialogs will display By default Paint Shop Pro displays a warning dialog whenever you are about to perform an operation that will result in lost information or one that can not be applied to the image in its current state To prevent a warning from appearing clear the check box in front of its description Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro 399 m Click the Enable All
440. se the Read Watermark command by choosing Image gt Watermarking gt Read Watermark If Paint Shop Pro does not detect a watermark it displays a message stating that no watermark was found If it detects a watermark it opens the Watermark Information dialog If your computer is connected to the Web click the Web Lookup button to open your browser and view the Digimarc Web page that displays information about the creator 355 ea jy 4 on p gt a CHAPTER Wi Printing Images With Paint Shop Pro you can print one image on a page print several images on a page or print selected images within a folder You can also create templates that save the size and placement of images There are several ways to ways to print in Paint Shop Pro Print a single image For more information see Printing a Single Image on page 359 Print multiple images on one page Arrange and size images in any way you like For more information see Printing Multiple Images on a Page on page 360 Print images from the Browser as thumbnails or in any arrangement For more information see Printing Images from the Browser on page 369 Contents Before Printing 00 ccc cece eect cece eevee eeenen 356 Choosing Printing Setup Options naana aaa 357 Printing a Single MAU Cen veda a ek hom a 359 Printing Multiple Images ona Page cece eee aes 360 Printing Images Using a Template 00 eee ee
441. sibility options 270 Layers menu Invert Mask Adjustment 295 Load Mask From Disk 298 Load Save Mask Save Mask To Alpha Channel 298 Save Mask to Disk 297 Matting Defringe 171 Remove Black Matte 171 Remove White Matte 171 New Adjustment Layer Brightness Contrast 191 Channel Mixer 189 Curves 192 Hue Saturation Lightness 186 Invert 200 Levels 195 Threshold 198 New Mask Layer From Image 291 Hide All 290 Hide Selection 292 Show All 290 Show Selection 292 View Overlay 294 layouts automatically arranging images 361 grids 363 positioning images 362 resizing images 362 rotating images 362 saving 365 Leading 307 learning tools 7 Help system 8 Learning Center 8 news groups 8 Product Tour 7 Quick Guides 7 Web resources 10 lens correction barrel distortions 70 fisheye distortion 70 pincushion distortion 71 Levels command brightness and contrast adjusting using levels 195 Lighten Darken brush 220 Index 429 Lightness 104 line options 230 anti alias 230 bevel 230 curve tracking 230 join 230 line style 230 miter limit 230 retain style 230 round 230 width 230 line segments 233 changing 253 line drawing a 232 Linear adjustment method 194 Link Colors check box 88 loading deformation map 148 masks 298 M Magic Wand tool 154 Magnifier tool 23 magnifying an image 23 making selections 153 Manual Color Correction 55 Mapping images 331
442. sks Other ways to create a new mask layer On the Layer palette right click the layer to which you want to add a mask and choose New Mask Layer gt Show All to show all underlying pixels or Hide All to hide all underlying pixels Or click the Show All button on the Layer palette Hint for editing masks Display the Overview palette choose View gt Palettes gt Overview while editing a mask so that you can see the image as it will print or display without the transparency grid or the mask overlay Creating New Mask Layers To show or hide the underlying layers completely with the new mask choose from the Show All or Hide All Layer menu commands To create a new mask layer 1 On the Layer palette click the layer you want to mask 2 Choose Layers gt New Mask Layer and then choose the type of mask Show All Shows all underlying pixels All pixels of the mask are white The underlying layer will appear unchanged Paint the mask with greys or black to hide portions of the underlying layers Hide All Hides all underlying pixels All pixels of the mask are black The underlying layer will be completely hidden Paint the mask with white or greys to show portions of underlying layers The mask layer and the selected layer are added to a new layer group The mask layer applies to the selected layer only To apply it to all underlying layers drag it from the layer group to the main level To view the mask on the imag
443. so that their top edges are evenly spaced from each other To distribute objects in relation to the canvas see Positioning Vector Objects on the Canvas on page 242 To evenly distribute objects 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool fel 2 Select one object to select it Press Shift and select the other objects Note You must have three or more objects selected to distribute them in relation to each other 3 Choose from the following To distribute objects in relation to each other On the Tool Options palette click one of the Object Distribution buttons Vertical Top Vertical Center Vertical Bottom rel Horizontal Right PE Horizontal Center H or Horizontal Left EHR 242 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects Positioning Vector Objects on the Canvas To align vector objects to the canvas 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool S 2 Click an object to select it O 3 On the Tool Options palette click one of the Position on Canvas Center on Canvas buttons Before After Center in Canvas 4 Horizontal Center in Canvas LEl or Vertical Center in Canvas ka Note All these commands are also available by choosing Object gt Align To distribute vector objects on the canvas 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool 2 Click an object to select it 3 On the Tool Options palette click one of the Position on Canvas buttons Space Evenl
444. ss Shift while selecting contiguous files or Ctrl while selecting non contiguous files and then click Start To process all files displayed click Select All The Batch Progress dialog opens and the batch conversion starts The Current Step pane displays each filename and whether it is converted while the Job Progress bar indicates the conversion progress To stop the conversion click Abort During the conversion Paint Shop Pro might open other dialogs requesting more information if you have selected Meta PostScript Photo CD or RAW files 8 After the files have been converted either click OK to close the dialog or click Save Log to save the progress messages to a text file Clicking Save Log opens the Save As dialog Type a name for the file and click Save Paint Shop Pro saves the information with a log file extension Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 391 Renaming Multiple Files To use the Batch Rename feature 1 S Open the Batch Rename dialog by choosing File gt Batch gt Rename Navigate to the folder containing the source original files If necessary use the Files of type field to display particular file formats Choose All Files to display the folder s entire contents To define a new name for the files click Modify to open the Modify Filename Format dialog The Rename Options list displays the choices for renaming your files Select an option and click Add to move it into the Included list Choose
445. strong vertical or horizontal feature such as a building or a horizon See To rotate with the Straighten tool on page 142 To Free Rotate Applies to A selection the current layer or all layers of the image All layers of the image The current layer only Raster layers only The current layer or all layers in the image Raster layers only 1 To rotate a selection or layer rather than the whole image do either of the following To rotate a selection make a selection in the image To rotate a layer on the Layer palette click the layer name 2 Choose Image gt Rotate gt Free Rotate Ctrl R to open the Rotate dialog 3 In the Direction group box select the rotation direction Right or Left 4 In the Degrees group box select the number of degrees to rotate To enter a value between 0 01 and 359 99 select the Free option Deform Tool rotation Rotation Pivot Point Rotation Handle Placing Rotation Pivot Points In Paint Shop Pro 8 pivot points will Snap to grids and guides Chapter 6 Editing Images 141 5 To apply the rotation to all layers rather than just the current layer or selection mark the All layers check box 6 Click OK Note When you rotate a selection the selection becomes a floating selection and the original image is unchanged To rotate all layers 90 degrees 1 Choose Image gt Rotate and pick Rotate 90 Clockwise or Rotate 90 Counter
446. sy to use controls for selecting colors patterns gradients and textures Enhanced Tools toolbar The tools on the Tools toolbar are grouped into related categories organized on flyouts Enhanced Layer palette The Layer palette allows you to better manage and view image data Integrated Learning Tools Learning Center Window Get started quickly with the new Learning Center window that guides you around Paint Shop Pro Try out new Quick Guides that lead you through a variety of common projects to help you get up and running fast Product Tour Familiarize yourself with Paint Shop Pro by viewing the all new Product Tour Nearly 50 topics show you the many results you can achieve using Paint Shop Pro for all of your photo and graphics projects Chapter 1 Getting Started 3 New Tools to Create Professional Results Background Eraser Brush Use the new Background Eraser brush to select a colored area of the image and replace it with transparency Warp Brush Create fun or dramatic effects by altering your photos Stretch pull push tug or swirl to create unlimited effects Straighten Tool Align crooked photos Simply draw a horizontal or vertical line specifying the direction in which to align the image Enhanced Deform Tool The new handles are easier to use Use the tool to scale shear distort rotate and apply perspective to images Enhanced Painting Engine Enjoy better photo retouching with greater precision and smoother ble
447. t To avoid joining contours when moving nodes Hold down Ctrl while you drag Breaking a contour at a node Before After Break One node dragged away Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 249 4 Select the start or end node of the first contour you want to join Note You can only join contours in the same object 5 Do one of the following To have Paint Shop Pro draw a contour between the points Press Shift and select the start or end node of the other contour Press Ctrl J or right click and choose Edit gt Join from the context menu To join contours manually Click and drag the node over the other contour s start or end node When the cursor displays JOIN release the mouse button Breaking Contours You can break a contour at any node When you break a closed path or contour you open it When you break an open path or contour you create two separate contours There are two ways to break contours at a node or with the Pen tool To break a contour at a node 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool 2 From the Tool Options palette select the Edit Mode e 3 Select the node you want to break the contour at 4 Do one of the following m Choose Objects gt Edit gt Break Ctrl K m Right click the node and choose Edit gt Break from the context menu The path or contour breaks and a new node is added on top of the current node The node square changes to a node on node
448. t a selection 1 Make a raster selection in the image using the Selection Freehand or Magic Wand tools 2 Choose Selections gt Float or press Ctrl F To defloat a selection Choose Selections gt Defloat or press Ctrl Shift F Adjusting Selection Borders Remember the Mover tool To move the selection marquee you must first select the Mover tool If you right click in the image with a selection tool you deselect the selection If you click and drag the selection with a selection tool you float the selection and move it If you did one of these by mistake press Ctrl Z to undo After you make a selection in your image you may want to modify or edit the selection borders Moving the Selection Marquee To change or fine tune the area the selection encloses you can use the Mover tool to move the marquee To move the selection marquee 1 On the Tools toolbar click the Mover tool iP 2 Right click inside or on the marquee and drag the marquee to a new position Hiding and Viewing the Selection Marquee The selection marquee is normally visible Sometimes when working with a selection it is helpful to hide the marquee temporarily without disabling the selection For example you may want to see the results of pasting a selection or feathering a selection s edges To hide or view the marquee Choose Selections gt Hide Marquee or press Ctrl Shift M Inverting a selection Chapter 7 Mak
449. t and click Open to execute the script Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 381 Stopping or Undoing a Script To stop a running script Click Stop Script amp Note The Stop Script button is only active while the script is running Depending on the script this may only be a few seconds To undo an applied script Like any other action applied to an image you can always undo an applied script by clicking Undo E on the Standard toolbar About BoundScripts Paint Shop Pro allows you to create up to nine special scripts called BoundScripts Because these scripts are essentially commands you can drag them into a toolbar a menu or assign them a keyboard shortcut Creating a BoundScript A BoundScript is created just like any other type of script However you must name it BoundScriptn where n is a number ranging from 1 to 9 Before creating a BoundScript you may want to delete the supplied sample BoundScript of the same name to ensure you are using your new Script 382 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks Adding a BoundScript to a Toolbar Add a BoundScript to a toolbar or menu just like any other command button Refer to Chapter 18 for more information on user interface customization Shown below is a section of the Customize dialog s Commands tab When you select BoundScripts in the Categories list the buttons for the nine BoundScripts appear in the Commands list Simply drag the desired button into a toolbar or menu
450. t easier to see on your image To change the mask overlay color and opacity 1 Do one of the following to open the Layer Properties dialog m On the Layer palette double click the mask layer button or right click the mask layer button and choose Properties Choose Layers gt Properties 2 Click the Overlay tab and change the following Overlay Color The default overlay color is pure red RGB 255 0 0 Click the color box and choose a new color Opacity The opacity of the overlay The default is 50 percent 3 Click OK Inverting Masks To reverse the transparency of a mask invert it Black pixels become white and white pixels become black Greys become their mirror value the maximum value 255 minus the current value To invert a mask 1 On the Layer palette select the name of the mask layer 2 Choose Layers gt Invert Mask Adjustment 296 Chapter 12 Working with Masks Using a gradient mask Using a pattern mask P ma duc Creating Gradient Pattern or Texture Masks Use a gradient pattern or texture mask to create interesting effects A gradient mask varies the opacity of an image from fully hidden to fully shown Use a gradient mask to fade an image in or out A pattern or texture mask varies the image opacity in a repeated pattern throughout the image To create any of these masks on the Materials palette select the material gradient pattern or texture and then fill the mask layer wit
451. t ink on paper both absorbs and reflects light As white light strikes the ink part of the color spectrum is absorbed and part is reflected back to your eyes resulting in the color you see In this model the primary colors cyan C magenta M and yellow Y combine in varying proportions to produce a variety of colors When the three colors are combined they produce black Because impurities in the ink make it difficult to produce a true black a fourth color black K is added Combining inks in this way is called four color process printing It is used by printing services and high end color printers Although you cannot create images in Paint Shop Pro using the CMYK model you can produce color separations that can be printed on CMYK printers There are two ways to do this You can split the images into CMYK channels or you can print color separation pages CMYK channels are simply four separate greyscale images that represent the percentage and location of cyan magenta yellow and black in the image For more information see Working with Color Channels on page 107 When you print CMYK separations Paint Shop Pro prints a separate greyscale page for each primary color You can then use these pages as color plates to give to a printing service For more information see Printing with CMYK Color Separations on page 371 106 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials How Monitor and Print Colors Differ
452. t the color visually Saturation The saturation of the selected hue Click the slider button and drag the slider to select the saturation visually 4 Click OK 198 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Reducing or Removing Colors Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command Is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit color or greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Another way to create a black and white image You can also decrease an image s color depth to 2 colors which gives you options for how colors are reduced that may result in more natural looking images than the Threshold command For more information see Decreasing Color Depth to 2 Colors 1 bit on page 111 In Paint Shop Pro you can reduce or remove colors in several ways You can create black and white greyscale duotone two color colorized and sepia images You can also create a negative image or create a positive image from a photographic negative Creating Black and White Images To create a black and white image use the Threshold command Select the threshold lightness value below which all pixels are changed to black and above which all pixels are changed to white This command does not change the color depth of the image Note The Threshold c
453. t the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Red Green Blue 3 In the Red Green and Blue edit boxes select the percentage to change each value A value of 0 indicates the original value To add more of a color use a positive number To remove some of a color use a negative number Keep in mind the following Reducing the amount of blue adds a yellow cast to the image Reducing the amount of green adds a magenta cast to the image Reducing the amount of red adds a cyan cast to the image 4 Click OK Color depth To apply this command to a selection the image must be a 16 million 24 bit color image otherwise the command is applied to the entire image In addition adjustment layers are available for 16 million 24 bit color images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 185 Changing the Color Balance of Shadows Midtones and Highlights Use the Color Balance command to change the balance of colors in an image This command provides general color correction and allows you to adjust the color balance in shadows midtones and highlights To use the Color Balance command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 Do one of the following
454. t types of lighting photographic equipment and photo processing can cause incorrect coloring in images In addition scanned images or digital camera images can have unnatural color casts Note The Automatic Color Balance and Fade Correction commands work on 16 million color images only To increase the color depth of an image see Increasing the Color Depth of an Image on page 109 Automatically Balancing Colors To create natural looking colors and remove any color cast in your image use the Automatic Color Balance command This command works best for correcting images with several colors rather than images with variations of one color You can apply the command to a selection or an entire image To balance colors automatically 1 Choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Automatic Color Balance 2 In the preview window center an important part of the image such as a face Pan the image by clicking and dragging in the preview window zoom in or out as necessary 3 Set the Strength of correction for the image from 1 the least to 100 the most Start with 30 and then adjust the strength until the image looks the most natural 4 If there is a strong color cast to the image a particular color added to all colors in the image mark the Remove color cast check box to remove it 5 In the Illuminant temperature group box adjust the image s illuminant temperature from warmer tones oranges to cooler tones blues Type a v
455. tab to determine whether the partially transparent pixels become transparent or opaque and whether they are blended with another color If you chose the None option in the Transparency tab the options in this tab are unavailable To determine how Paint Shop Pro represents partially transparent pixels choose from these options Use Full Transparency for Pixels Below x Opacity Pixels below the opacity value you enter become transparent Pixels above the opacity value become opaque As you lower the value you reduce the number of transparent pixels Use a 50 Dither Pattern Paint Shop Pro makes partially transparent pixels opaque using either the color chosen for blending or the image color depending on the blending option then applies a 50 dither pattern to make colors look more natural Use Error Diffusion Dither Paint Shop Pro makes partially transparent pixels opaque using either the color chosen for blending or the image color depending on the blending option then applies an error diffusion dither to make colors look more natural To determine how partially transparent pixels are blended choose one of these options Yes Blends the partially transparent pixels with the color in the Blend color box To choose a new color click in the color box to choose from the Color dialog Partially transparent pixels below the value you entered above are blended with this color No Uses the existing image color at 100 opacity
456. tand out from the rest of the image Include Windows colors Mark this check box if you want the 16 standard Windows colors included in the converted image s palette Reduce color bleeding If you chose the Error Diffusion reduction method you can mark this check box to make the left to right bleed effect of colors less noticeable 7 Click OK About Color Reduction Methods When you decrease an image s color depth you must select a color reduction method Depending upon the color depth you select two or three of these methods are available Nearest Color Replaces the original color of a pixel with the color in the newly generated palette that is closest to the original RGB value This method eliminates dithering and produces a high contrast image Simple graphics may look better with this method Error Diffusion Replaces the original color of a pixel with the most similar color in the palette but spreads the discrepancy between the original and new color to the surrounding pixels As it replaces a color working from the top left to the bottom right of the image it adds the error or discrepancy to the next pixel before selecting the most similar color This method produces a natural looking image and often works best for photographs or complex graphics Ordered Dither Adjusts adjacent pixels so that two colors give the illusion of a third color and intermingles pixels to produce patterns based on a known palette Use
457. target image click the layer into which you want to paste the selection 2 Choose Edit gt Paste and choose one of these commands Paste As New Selection Ctrl E Pastes the contents of the clipboard as a floating selection above the current layer If the image already contains a floating selection it is defloated first Paste As Transparent Selection Ctrl Shift E Use this command to remove a specific color from the selection you are pasting The command makes transparent any pixels in the clipboard data that exactly match the current background color in the Materials palette Then the command pastes the contents of the clipboard as a floating selection above the current layer Note Select the background color before you paste Paste Into Selection Ctrl Shift L Pastes the contents of the clipboard into the current selection The clipboard contents are resized to fit the current selection Copying One Image into Another Using the Browser You can copy all the layers of an image in the Browser into an open image by dragging the image thumbnail from the Browser onto the open image To use the Browser to copy one image into another 1 Open the image into which you want to copy the layers This target image must be a 16 million color or greyscale image 2 On the Layer palette click the layer which you want to place the new image above 3 Open the Browser choose File gt Browse or press Ctrl B 4 Navigate to
458. te To move acolored matte choose Layers gt Matting gt Defringe The Defringe dialog opens Enter the number of pixels to defringe and click OK 172 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images Removing Specks and Holes from a selection To remove holes and specks from a selection 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Remove Specks and Holes to open the Remove Specks and Holes dialog 2 Do one of the following m Choose the Remove Specks option to remove only specks from the selection Choose the Remove Holes option to remove only holes from the selection m Choose the Remove Specks and Holes option to remove both specks and holes from the edges of the selection Note In the dialog you can click the Toggle Selection button to change between showing only the selection or showing the selection and the rest of the image How specks and holes are removed ie eae i n S a 3 For the Square area smaller than enter the number of pixels and from the area that you define in the scale factor Start at low values and increase them as square pixels For example If you necessary until the specks and or holes are removed have an area of specs and or holes in an image that is 20 pixels wide by 20 pixels high then in the a 100 narax Smoothing the Boundary of a Selection 20 400 and 5 X 100 500 then all specs and or holes in a pixel area less than 500 will be removed To smooth the boundary of a selection 4 Click OK The
459. te 7 Once the images are uploaded you will be prompted to visit the photo sharing site click Yes to automatically access the web site for the photo sharing service Notes about Uploading If you are unable to log in to a photo sharing service first make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and that you have entered the correct e mail address and password on the login screen If you are unable to log in and are using Paint Shop Pro in a corporate environment you may need to modify the Proxy Server settings Check with your Network Administrator to get the Proxy Server information for your corporate network 330 Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools Previewing Images in a Web Browser If you have a Web browser installed on your computer you can use the Web Browser feature to see how your active image will look on the Web Paint Shop Pro creates an HTML page that displays your image in Windows Bitmap GIF JPEG or PNG format To preview image files in Web browsers 1 Choose View gt Preview in Web Browser to open the Preview in Web Browser dialog To change or add Web browsers click the Edit Web Browsers button For more information see Setting File Locations on page 403 You can select up to three browsers In the Select image formats list click each format in which you want to preview your image To select a background color for the Web page left click the Background color box to choose from the
460. te a new image 1 Do one of the following to open the New Image dialog m Choose File gt New m Press Ctrl N m Click the New Image button O on the toolbar 2 Choose the image dimensions To select a preset size for the new image in the Presets drop down list choose a standard size for print materials such as 4 x 6 or letter or computer screens such as 640 x 480 pixels The Presets list defaults to the Last Used option which specifies the settings that were used the last time you created a new image m To create an image using specific dimensions in the Image Dimensions group box set the following options Units The units of the dimensions pixels inches or centimeters Width The width of the new image Height The height of the new image Resolution The resolution of the new image Specify the resolution units pixels inch or pixels cm in the drop down list 3 In the Image Characteristics group box select from these options 36 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Raster Background or Vector Background The type of the bottom layer raster or vector Choose a raster background for most photographic applications Choose a vector layer if you are creating vector graphics Color depth The color depth or number of bits per pixel of the image For more information on color depth see About Image Size Resolution and Color Depth on page 33 Background The background color or material
461. te an image with the vector objects that you want to save as preset objects 2 Give each object a unique name that will help you identify it You cannot export multiple objects with the same name To name objects see Editing Vector Object Properties on page 237 3 Use the Object Selection tool to select one or more objects to save as preset shapes To export all objects make sure none are selected 4 To open the Export Shape Library dialog Choose File gt Export gt Shape m Right click and choose Export gt Shape from the context menu 5 Type a name for the library file and click OK The library file PspShape extension saves to the default Preset Shapes folder Editing File Locations on page 404 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 235 To modify a library 1 Use File gt Open to open the library file in Paint Shop Pro 2 Modify add or delete objects in the file 3 Save and close the library file Note You will have to restart Paint Shop Pro to use the modified preset objects To delete a entire library Delete the library file from the Preset Shapes folder Creating Custom Line Styles You can edit the default line styles or design your own line styles Saved styles appear in the Line Style drop down window on the Tool Options palette for the Pen Preset Shapes and Text tools To create and save a customized line style 1 Choose the Pen Preset Shapes or Text tool 2 On the Tool O
462. ted Script button i The Script Editor dialog will appear listing the actions that comprise the script as well as some basic information Shown below is a portion of the dialog M Silent H AutoColorBalance MARAE ee KO Select a mode pihe FORMER commbnl tdr PaRuEMmand coMMEMANATE She comman blanso Che asedify its setiigature name and whether you silent Interactive then click Editto show use ordontuse or Default mode or modify its Ul settings Script commands Note If the script you wish to edit is not in the Select Script drop down choose File gt Script gt Edit to display the Open dialog Navigate to where the script resides When you open the script its information will appear in the Script Editor dialog Note If the Script Editor cannot open the script e g the format is unreadable or perhaps the script was created or edited manually in a text editor the script will open in the default text editor application set in the File Locations dialog Refer to the section Editing Via a Text Editor below 2 In the Scripts Commands section you can do the following m Mark the check box to use that portion of the script m Use the Mode drop down list to set a mode for the script s actions Silent Skip all dialogs The command in the script is executed without showing any of the user interface Interactive Allows for user interaction with dialogs and other settings Default Executes the command based on what the e
463. ter settings may not be scriptable due to variations in printer drivers 5 In the Print Output group box choose the type of output Color Greyscale or CMYK Separations For more information on printing CMYK color separations see Printing with CMYK Color Separations on page 371 In the Color options group box choose an option m Negative Mark this check box to print a negative of the image Background Mark this check box to print a color background around the image and then click the color box to choose the background color 7 In the Print Marks group box choose from the following options m Corner Crop Marks Mark this check box to print crop marks at the corners of the image m Center Crop Marks Mark this check box to print crop marks at the center of the image edges Registration Marks Mark this check box to print registration marks at the corners of the image m CMYK Plate Labels Mark this check box to print labels Cyan Magenta Yellow or Black on each color plate or page This check box is available only when you select the CMYK Separations option m Image Name Mark this check box to print the image file name below the image 8 Mark the Header check box to include header text at the top of the page and then type the text in the edit box 9 Mark the Footer check box to include footer text at the bottom of the page and then type the text in the edit box 10 Click Close to apply the settings
464. than the Red Green and Blue channels Hue is the actual color and the value is the number assigned on the color wheel for example red is zero yellow is 43 green is 85 cyan is 128 blue is 170 and magenta is 212 As a reference look at the color wheel on the Jasc Color Picker Saturation is the level of grey added to the hue zero is very grey and unsaturated and 255 is no grey and fully saturated Lightness is the brightness of the hue zero is no light black 128 is middle grey and 255 is fully light white The lightness histogram has information similar to the greyscale histogram Greyscale values are levels of grey zero is black 128 is middle grey and 255 is white These represent the brightness or luminosity of an image The distribution of grey values determines the contrast of an image Guidelines for Analyzing the Histogram Here are guidelines that can help you analyze the histogram and make decisions about how to correct your images Ifa line spikes there are many pixels at that value Ifa line is close to the horizontal axis there are few pixels at that level If the graph is spread out the image has a balanced composition and probably has enough detail to be corrected If the lines are compressed into a narrow area the image probably doesn t contain enough detail to be corrected try a new scan Color depth The Histogram Adjustment command applies to greyscale and 16 million 24 bit co
465. the Add Borders command to add a colored frame around an Adding a colored border image The border increases the dimensions of the image by the width of the border For multi layer images Paint Shop Pro prompts you to flatten the image first To add colored borders without flattening an image use the Canvas Size command instead see Changing Canvas Size on page 139 To add borders 1 Choose Image gt Add Borders to open the Add Borders dialog 2 Mark the Symmetric check box to create an equal width border on all sides Clear the check box to enter each border width independently 3 In the Size in pixels group box select the dimensions of the Color choice tip border Right click the color box to pick from the Recent Colors dialog Note To change the dimensions from pixels select the units in the drop down list in the Original Dimensions group box 4 Click the Color box to choose the color for the border 5 Click OK Chapter 6 Editing Images 151 Flipping and Mirroring Images Flipping an image Mirroring an image Use the Flip command to reverse an image along its horizontal axis the on top becomes the bottom and vice versa Use the Mirror command to reverse the image along its vertical axis the left side becomes the right and vice versa Note To flip or mirror all layers in an image make them all part of the same layer group To flip a selection layer or image Choose Image gt Flip or pr
466. the Apply palette using group box select an option Nearest color matching Changes each image color to the color in the palette that is the closest match Error diffusion dithering Attempts to maintain the image s appearance by dithering colors that are not in the palette Dithering places pixels of different colors next to each other to simulate missing colors Maintain indexes Assigns each color in the palette a sequential index number and does the same for each color in the image then changes each color in the image to the like numbered color in the palette This option is not available for 16 million color images Click Open 120 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Making a Palette Color Transparent Two logos displayed on a Web page without a transparent color top and with a transparent color bottom Pelfadrine Pelfadrine Paletted images those with 256 or fewer colors such as GIF or PNG files do not support transparent backgrounds but you often need a way to make part of your image transparent when displayed on a Web page For example you may have a round logo and you want the background of the Web page to display around the logo Most Web browsers can choose not to display one color effectively making it transparent In Paint Shop Pro you have two ways to make one color transparent Use the Set Palette Transparency command to make one color in an image palette transparent The color can
467. the Deform tool and right click and drag a corner handle of the bounding box m To change perspective asymmetrically press Shift and drag a corner handle To shear press Shift while dragging a side handle To distort press Ctrl and Shift while dragging a handle 4 Adjust the deformation or view the deformation settings on the Tool Options palette For more information on these settings see More Deform Options below 5 To cancel previous deformations choose Edit gt Undo Ctrl Z Note By default you must press the Shift and Ctrl keys to deform an image To apply a deform operation without having to hold down keys choose a different Mode from the Tool Options Palette Scale The default setting you must hold down a key or keys Shear Shift Allows you to shear without holding down Shift Perspective Ctrl Allows you to change perspective without holding down Ctrl Free Shift Ctrl Allows you to distort without holding down Ctrl Shift More Deform Options You can precisely control many of the deform settings The following options appear on the Deform tool s Tool Options palette Pivot X Pivot Y Sets the X and Y coordinates of the rotation pivot point Position X Position Y Sets the X and Y coordinates of the top left corner handle Scale X Scale Y Sets the percentage change for the horizontal X and vertical Y resize Shear The offset of a side Enter positive values to shear to
468. the Layer Properties dialog mark or clear the Group is Linked check box and then click OK 274 Chapter 11 Working with Layers Changing Opacity of Layers To create interesting effects vary the opacity of a layer from the default of 100 percent fully opaque down to 0 percent transparent When a layer is partially transparent layers below it show through To change the opacity of all layers within a layer group set the opacity of the layer group The Opacity setting of the Layer palette displays the opacity of each layer The overall opacity of a layer and the opacity of individual pixels are independent of each other For example if a pixel starts at 50 opacity and the layer is set to 50 opacity the pixel will appear 25 opaque If the layer is also in a layer group that is set to 50 opacity then the pixel opacity will be 12 5 opaque To set the opacity of a layer or layer group 1 On the Layer palette click the name of the layer 2 Do one of the following m Drag the Opacity slider to the desired percentage Double click the layer name to display the Layer Properties dialog change the Opacity setting and click OK Blending Layers Create interesting effects by changing the way pixels of one layer Blend modes Normal Darken blend with pixels of underlying layers Paint Shop Pro contains a Luminance and Dissolve variety of blend modes that specify how it blends pixels The image Paipa displays the blended pi
469. the degree of masking Fully opaque pixels produce no masking partially transparent pixels create more masking transparent pixels produce full masking 7 To reverse the transparency of the mask data mark the Invert mask data check box Black pixels become white white pixels become black and greys are assigned their mirror value 8 Click OK The mask layer and the selected layer are added to a new layer group The mask layer applies to the selected layer only To apply it to all underlying layers drag it from the layer group to the main level 292 Chapter 12 Working with Masks Using a selection as a mask For information on editing the mask see Editing Masks on page 294 To view the mask on the image on the Layer palette click the Mask Overlay toggle Creating Masks from Selections Use a raster selection to create a mask that shows or hides the selection To create masks from selections on vector layers use the Selection Freehand Selection and Magic Wand tools You cannot use the Object Selection tool To create a mask from a selection 1 Use the Selection Freehand Selection or Magic Wand tool to make a selection on a raster or vector layer in the image 2 Do either of the following To mask the selection choose Layers gt New Mask Layer gt Hide Selection To mask everything except the selection choose Layers gt New Mask Layer gt Show Selection The mask layer and the sele
470. the entire text into F one object with each letter as a separate contour with the object path JASC After you convert text to curves it is no longer text so you cannot change the characters their font or leading or do any other text J ASC edits To convert text to curves 1 Use the Object Selection tool to select the text 2 Do one of the following Toconvert the entire text object into one vector object choose Objects gt Convert Text to Curves gt As Single Shape This produces one path containing a contour for each letter To convert each letter into a separate vector object with its own path choose Objects gt Convert Text to Curves gt As Character Shapes To edit the nodes of the text you must select the letters individually To edit the nodes use the Pen tool For more information see Editing Paths and Contours on page 245 314 Chapter 13 Working with Text 1315 CHAPTER EE Applying Effects Paint Shop Pro has many special effects you can apply to your images including 3D artistic geometric illumination reflection and texture effects Distort images to create subtle or dramatic effects Note To blur images see Blurring Images on page 78 Choosing UCL oc gt ae acy oe ay Soe a eR cba eee 316 Contents Adding Noise fib eea eee Gok Goes a hea 321 Adding Picture Frames aaa 322 Mathematically Combining Two Images 00 0 00s 323 Creating Tour OWN Effet 6
471. the folder containing the image you want to copy 5 Click the browser thumbnail and drag it into the target image When you release the mouse button the layers are added to the image They are linked automatically Note If a new layer duplicates the name of a layer in the target image a number is appended to the name 126 Chapter 6 Editing Images Don t have the other document visible Drag the image to the application s icon on the Windows task bar wait for the application to open move the cursor over the document and then release the mouse button Copying Paint Shop Pro Images into Other Applications Copy a Paint Shop Pro image into other applications such as word processors or desktop publishing packages in these ways m Choose File gt Save As to save the image to another file format such as TIF or BMP and then open the other application and import or place the file In Paint Shop Pro copy the image choose Edit gt Copy to copy the current selection or layer or Edit gt Copy Merged to copy all layers and then open the other application and paste the image Open the Paint Shop Pro Browser select the image and then press Alt while clicking and dragging the image to an open document in the other application A multi layered image is merged or flattened before it is copied into the other document The copy and browser options are available only for programs that support graphic clipboard data
472. the layer palette On the Layer palette right click the object name and choose Rename from the context menu 238 Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects To edit vector properties 1 2 Select the vector object s you want to edit Click Properties on the Tool Options palette or choose Objects gt Properties to open the Property dialog Note You can also open the dialog by double clicking the object s name on the Layer palette Choose the line options stroke width join miter line style and anti alias For more information see Drawing Objects on page 229 Choose stroke line and fill settings Stroke Clear the check box to choose no line Mark the check box and pick a color from the color box to choose line color Fill Clear the check box to choose no fill Mark the check box and pick a color from the color box to choose fill color In the Name field change the name of the object as it appears on the Layer palette If more than one object is selected you must change their names using the Layer palette To make the selected object s invisible or visible clear or mark the Visible check box You can also do this by clicking the Visibility Toggle on the Layer palette Invisible objects are often used as paths for text Click OK Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 239 Aligning and Arranging Vector Objects Copying and pasting vector objects Cut copy and paste vector objects just li
473. the right and negative values to shear to the left At 0 5 a side shears 50 of its length Angle The rotation around the pivot point The image rotates clock wise from 0 to 360 degrees Reset Rectangle Resets the deformation rectangle to its original shape but keeps any current deformations Chapter 6 Editing Images 145 Perspective X Perspective Y The best way to create and adjust perspective is by dragging the control handles When you create a perspective effect with the control handles you are manipulating many variables Changing the values in the Perspective fields may affect the scale shear and position values Correcting Image Perspective When you take pictures of tall objects the resulting photographs may have perspective distortion the objects seem to be leaning or angled This distortion happens when the camera is at an angle to the subjects Fix perspective distortion with two tools Tool How to Use Applies to Deform Drag the corner handles of a The current layer tool bounding box around an entire layer only to interactively change the ctive Raster layers only perspe See To use the Deform tool to correct perspective below Perspective Drag a bounding box around a The current layer Correction feature within the image suchasa only tool building that is supposed to be Raster ly rectangular but is angled Paint Shop ee are tan Pro adjusts the perspective to make the selecte
474. the surrounding area and makes it appear more natural The higher the Feather value the softer the edges Set the width to O to create a selection with no feathering and distinct edges Use the Tool Options palette to set the feathering before creating a selection After you create the selection you can modify the feathering amount and the feathering position inside or outside the selection border using commands from the Selection menu To change the feathering amount 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Feather 2 Select the number of pixels for the feathering width both inside and outside of the selection 3 Click OK An alternative To remove a color from a selection you can also use the Paste As Transparent Selection command to remove a color when you paste a selection However with this command you cannot remove shades of a color only the exact color you specify For more information see Cutting Copying and Pasting on page 124 170 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images To adjust the position and amount of feathering 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Inside Outside Feather Note In the dialog you can click the Toggle Selection button to change between showing only the selection or showing the selection and the rest of the image 2 Select the feather position Inside Outside or Both the feather amount is added to each side 3 In the Feather amount edit box enter the width in pixels of the
475. this method to give the image the appearance of containing more colors than it actually does Images may appear to be composed of cross hatches and dots and may have distinct patterns of light and dark areas 116 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials About Palette Options When you decrease an image s color depth you must select a palette option Depending upon the color depth you select two or three of these methods are available Optimized Median Cut Measures and ranks each color by how frequently it occurs in the image then uses the most frequently occurring colors to determine the new palette Even if your image contains fewer colors than the palette that is generated this method may not represent each color exactly The method therefore is not as accurate as the Optimized Octree method but it is better at weighting color importance Optimized Octree Creates an eight level tree with eight branching nodes totaling 256 individual leaves or colors to determine the new palette This method attempts to reproduce each color in the original image so if your image contains fewer colors than the palette that is generated every color in the image is represented This method is faster and more accurate than Optimized Median Cut but it is not as good at weighting color importance Windows Changes each pixel s color to the nearest color in the Windows palette Standard Web Safe Palette Changes each pixel s colo
476. thumbnail image in the right panel 5 Do either of the following To apply the selected preset effect click the Apply button To display a dialog where you can modify the selected preset effect click the Modify button If this button is greyed out the effect does not have adjustable settings Paint Shop Pro applies the effect to your image Example of a 3D effect Chapter 14 Applying Effects 317 Using Effects Dialogs Most effects open a dialog in which you adjust settings to customize the effect These dialogs contain several common features Use the preview windows to view the original image and the image with the effect applied to it For more information on using these preview windows see Using Preview Windows on page 26 To reset settings to default values in the Presets drop down list select Default When you first open a dialog Paint Shop Pro displays the last used settings The Presets drop down list is set to Last Used Use this preset to apply the same effect to multiple images without having to adjust the settings each time m To save and load your own preset effects see Using and Creating Presets on page 386 For general information on dialogs see Working with Dialogs on page 25 Applying 3D Effects The 3D effects create images or selections that appear to have three dimensions These effects are particularly useful for creating images for Web pages To see t
477. ting 401 setting 394 Preset Shape tool retain style 230 preset shapes create as vector 231 creating new 234 drawing 231 shape libraries 234 Presets about 386 brushes 213 choosing 387 deleting 387 editing 387 examples of 386 resetting Default 387 saving 387 previewing images in Web browsers 330 print layout printing 360 selecting images 360 window options 364 print template placing cells 365 printing CMYK color separations 371 from the Browser 369 greyscale 357 header text 359 image resolution 356 multiple images on a page options 357 page size 359 paper quality 356 paper size 359 print layout 360 saving images for 357 single image 359 using templates 366 Product Tour 7 Pure Colors category 57 Push brush 220 Python programming language 378 Q Quick Guides 7 R randomizing parameters 28 raster text moving 307 RAW file format preferences 411 reading Watermarks 354 recently used materials 85 red eye correction 72 fine tuning 74 Redo command 127 reducing colors to black and white 198 Reflection effects 320 regions see cells registering with Digimarc 353 Remember Text 304 removing scratches 75 77 specks 65 repeating commands 129 replacing colors 196 223 using the Hue Map 196 resampling 137 Reset Preferences command 401 Resetting settings 387 reshaping vector objects 243 resizing images 137 resizing vector obj
478. tion Dr Halo is a registered trademark of Media Cybernetics Micrografx Draw is registered trademark of Micrografx Inc Microsoft Windows Microsoft Paint Microsoft Word Video For Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation CT is a registered trademark of Scitex Corporation ZSoft Paintbrush is a registered trademark of ZSoft Corporation All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners We have done our best to ensure that the material found in this publication is both useful and accurate However please be aware that errors may exist in this publication and that neither the authors nor Jasc Software Inc make any guarantees concerning the accuracy of the information found here or in the use to which it may be put Printed in the United States of America 2003 Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started 0 0 cea 1 What s New in Version 8 0 ee eee eee 2 System Requirements 0 0 0 eee eens 6 Installing the SoUwarle 2 6454626 404 lt 5555053 656464 4e5 6 Learning Paint Shop Pro 0 2 0 0 eee eee ene J Getting Help o 444c4 ested deed chen ache ne tae fe beads 8 Getting to Know The Program 11 Starting and Exiting Paint Shop Pro 12 Exploring the User Interface 0 0 02 0 000 12 Using Toolbars and Palettes 0 2 0 0 00 eee 14 Viewing
479. tion press Ctrl while clicking and dragging the rotation pivot point to a new location Making Vector Objects the Same Size You can make all objects you select the same height width or both The dimensions of the first object selected are used for resizing To make vector objects the same size 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool M 2 Click the first vector object The first object controls how all the other selections will be resized 3 Press the Shift key and click the objects that you want to resize 4 On the Tool Options palette choose a Make Same Size option Make Same Height Make Same Width Make Same Width and Height Note All these commands are also available by choosing Objects gt Make Same Size Editing Paths and Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 245 Contours To fine tune or completely transform vector objects edit their nodes contours and paths For more detail on paths and contours see The Anatomy of a Vector Object on page 229 For more detail on types of nodes see Editing Nodes on page 251 Note All of the commands in the Objects menu appear in a context menu that opens when you right click on objects contours or nodes To edit a contour 1 2 3 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode IS Click on a contour then double click one node to select all nodes Choose Objects gt Edit and sel
480. to Paint Shop Pro E mail Technical Support Send an e mail message to Technical Support CHAPTER E Getting to Know The Program Contents The Paint Shop Pro workspace includes menus tools and palettes that you can use to create and edit images Navigate this workspace to accomplish your painting drawing and photo editing tasks Starting and Exiting Paint Shop Pro 4 2 ec caaeue area eeeea 12 Exploring the User Interface ce ee tes 12 Using Toolbars and Palettes cece ee es 14 Viewing Mages a deaicnar se se aeatod at wd ae teen dene an ew ee 20 Viewing Image Information cee ee ee es 24 Working with DOGS isc ce ot tae ese aes weed be evict we acti ae ge SE eed 25 Using Shortcut and Function Keys cece eee 28 11 12 Chapter 2 Getting to Know The Program Starting and Exiting Paint Shop Pro To start Paint Shop Pro If you chose to place the Paint Shop Pro icon on your desktop during installation you can start the program by double clicking this icon If you chose not to place the Paint Shop Pro icon on your desktop start the program by clicking the Start button and choosing Programs gt Jasc Software gt Jasc Paint Shop Pro 8 The first time you start Paint Shop Pro the program displays the File Format Associations dialog This dialog lets you assign file formats to the program so that your computer always uses Paint Shop Pro to open files in those formats You can ch
481. to a selection that is feathered the current background color fills in the feathered region of the selection To crop using a selection 1 Make a selection in the image Note The selection can be any shape Paint Shop Pro places a crop area rectangle around irregularly shaped selections 2 Do either of the following Choose Image gt Crop to Selection m Click the Crop tool and then click Current selection in the Snap crop rectangle to group box on the Tool Options palette Adjust the crop area and click Apply v Cropping Based on Opaque Areas Use this feature to eliminate transparent areas at image edges The Crop tool can automatically set the crop area to cover just the opaque non transparent area of a single layer or an entire image Note Opaque areas that are not rectangular may have transparent areas remaining after cropping To crop to the opaque area of a layer or image 1 Click the Crop tool Es 2 On the Tool Options palette select an option from the Snap crop rectangle to group box Layer Opaque Selects opaque areas of the current layer Merged Opaque Selects opaque area of all layers Note If any layer or the background has a solid color non transparent background the entire layer or image is selected as the crop area 3 Adjust the crop area as needed See To define the crop area on page 134 4 To crop the image double click the image or click Apply Iv Resizing Images Other ways
482. to add to the selection On the Tool Options palette select the tool options Hold down the Shift key as you click the parts of the image you want to add to the selection The areas do not need to be adjacent To expand the selection by a specific number of pixels 1 2 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Expand Select the number of pixels 1 to 100 by which you want to expand the selection Click OK The marquee expands while keeping its original shape To add pixels to a selection based on color values 1 3 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Select Similar Note In the dialog you can click the Transparency button to change between showing only the selection or showing the selection and the rest of the image Select from these options Tolerance Specifies how closely pixels must match the colors of the initial selection At low settings the values must be close At higher settings more pixels match Sample Merged If the check box is marked Paint Shop Pro selects matching pixels in the merged image If the check box is cleared Paint Shop Pro selects pixels in the active layer only Anti alias Mark this check box to use anti aliasing which produces a smooth edged selection by partially filling in pixels along the edge making them semi transparent Mark whether you want the areas Inside or Outside the selection marquee to be anti aliased Clear the Anti alias check box to keep the original edges Contiguo
483. to display the Guide Properties dialog and click Delete To delete all guides in an image or all open images 1 Choose View gt Change Grid Guide and Snap Properties 2 Click the Guides tab 3 Mark the Delete guides check box and then select From current image only or From ALL open images 4 Click OK Items won t snap Grids or guides must be displayed for items to snap to them Chapter 6 Editing Images 133 Snapping to Grids and Guides You can use the Snap features to align your brush strokes and objects precisely to the nearest grid line or guide The snap influence controls how many pixels away an item must be to snap to guide or grid Note An item s center point will snap to a guide or grid point if the center point is the closest part of the item to a grid point or guide To snap to the nearest grid line Choose View gt Snap to Grid Ctrl Shift G To snap to the nearest guide Choose View gt Snap to Guides Shift Alt G Note If a grid point and a guide are equal distances from an item the item will snap to the guide To change the snap influence 1 Choose View gt Change Grid Guide and Snap Properties 2 Click the Grid or Guides tab and change the Snap influence value The Default settings group box shows settings for all future guides or grids The Current image settings group box controls settings for guides in the current image 3 Click OK 134 Chapter 6 Editing Images
484. to that point on the graph This changes the lightest pixels in the image to white As a general rule keep the High percentage change the bottom edit box to below 0 1 7 If the overall image is too dark or too light adjust the gamma Gamma is a standard measure of change in an image s contrast If the image is too dark drag the Gamma slider the grey triangle to the right to increase the gamma the number changes in the Gamma edit box If the image is too light drag the Gamma slider to the left to decrease the gamma 206 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections 8 If the graph has peaks on the left and right sides and contains low points in the center the midtones need to be compressed Shadows and highlights need to be expanded to reveal the information they contain This often occurs in flash photography when a subject is too close to the camera the subject appears brightly illuminated but the background of the photograph is very dark To compress the midtones click and drag the Midtones slider up 9 If the graph peaks in the center and has a low number of pixels at 10 11 12 the left and right sides expand the midtones by dragging the Midtones slider down If you are improving your image skip this step If you are creating artistic effects use the Output Max and Min sliders on the left side of the histogram to make further adjustments The Max slider is the white circle within a grey square the Min sli
485. to the right side of the cell The image aspect ratio 1s maintained Fit and adjust top El Scales the image to fit entirely inside the cell and aligns the image to the top of the cell The image aspect ratio is maintained Fit and adjust bottom E Scales the image to fit entirely inside the cell and aligns the image to the bottom of the cell The image aspect ratio 1s maintained To move rotate and resize images in cells Follow the instructions in Choose Preferences gt Auto Arrange or click the Auto Arrange button on page 362 To delete a template 1 Do one of the following From the Paint Shop Pro workspace choose File gt Print Layout From the Paint Shop Pro Browser choose File gt Print Layout To remove an image from a template 1 Click the image to select it 2 Press Delete or choose Image gt Remove Chapter 16 Printing Images 369 Editing Template Cells You cannot move or resize cells in a template A cell s position and size is locked when a layout is saved as a template However if you saved images with a template you can revert the template back to a layout To revert a template with images to a layout 1 Open the template you want to edit For more information see Printing Images Using a Template on page 366 2 Choose File gt New Template or click the New Template button o A dialog will open asking Do you want to keep the current images in the new template
486. tor objects Press Shift and to select multiple vector objects For more information see Selecting Vector Objects on page 161 Drawing lines and shapes as vector objects gives you the flexibility of editing them after they are drawn Note All of the commands in the Objects menu appear in a context menu that opens when you right click on objects contours or nodes To delete a vector object 1 Select the vector object to delete Note To delete one object within a group you must click its name on the Layer palette 2 Press the Delete key or choose Edit gt Clear To edit the colors and materials of vector objects 1 Select the vector object s you want to edit 2 On the Materials palette choose a new foreground or background color or material The background color controls an object s fill color The foreground color controls an object s line color For more information see Using the Materials Palette on page 82 Editing Vector Object Properties Vector properties include the basics of vector objects such as line width line style and anti aliasing You can also change the name of the object as it appears on the Layer palette and change whether the object is visible or not Object editing tip You can also edit a vector object s properties by selecting the object and choosing the Pen tool Changing the settings in the Tool Options palette will modify the selected object Change object names from
487. tour or path then double click one node to select all nodes Click and drag one of the nodes Adding and Closing Contours Adding a contour to a preset shape You can add new contours to any existing object even objects you created with the Preset Shapes tool The new contour will have the same properties including color material line style and so on as the selected object To add nodes to a contour see Adding or Removing Nodes on a Contour on page 254 To add a contour to an object 1 From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool l 2 From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode D 3 Click on an object to select it 4 From the Tool Options palette select Drawing Mode a 5 Select a Segment Type and draw the new contour For more information see Drawing Lines and Custom Shapes on page 232 Another way to add contours to an object You can paste a contour into a selected contour Duplicating a contour Before Duplicate with Offset Duplicate No Offset To A Gd N e Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 247 When you finish drawing the contour do one of the following To continue editing the contour select Edit Mode from the Tool Options palette To finish this object choose another tool close a contour From the Tools toolbar select the Pen tool From the Tool Options palette select Edit Mode e Click on an contour to select it Do one
488. traight The image is resized as you adjust this value Preserve central scale Whether the scale of the center of the picture remains the same or is adjusted If you mark this check box pixels are either added to or removed from the image Clear this check box if you do not want to change the size of the image or layer Note If the Preserve central scale check box is marked the size changes to the original image display in the Result size group box 4 Click OK Correcting Fisheye Distortions If your image has a fisheye distortion it looks as though it has been pasted onto a sphere or blown up like a balloon Lines that should be straight are curved and the edges of the image look compressed To correct a fisheye distortion 1 Choose Adjust gt Lens Correction gt Fisheye Distortion Correction Adjust the image using the following options Field of View The strength of the correction Adjust this value until the distortion disappears Preserve central scale Whether the scale of the center of the picture remains the same or is adjusted If you mark this check box pixels are either added to or removed from the image Clear this check box if you do not want to change the size of the image or layer Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 71 Note If the Preserve central scale check box is marked the size changes to the original image display in the Result size group box Correcting Pincushion Distortions If your imag
489. tures we recommend you Save and edit your files in Psplmage format with a color depth of 16 million colors You can then use the Save As or Export command to save a copy of the file in the desired output format Your Original image stays intact in case you need to make changes to it later Paint Shop Pro has a native PspImage format that supports layers alpha channels and other features you use to create images You will find it convenient to save an image in this format while you are working on it and then convert it to a different format after you have finished Using Autosave You can use the Autosave feature to save your files automatically at specified intervals This can prevent you from losing your work if your computer shuts down unexpectedly For more information please refer to Setting Autosave Preferences on page 409 Compressing a PspImage File An image file in the PspImage format can be saved without compression or it can be compressed to save space Both of the compression methods that Paint Shop Pro uses are lossless and reduce the file size without losing any image information Saving a file without compressing it is the quicker method but it requires more hard disk space Paint Shop Pro uses two compression methods Run length encoding RLE which is fast and compresses most multi layered images to about 75 of their original sizes It works well with images that contain large areas of the same c
490. u can create a new gradient type that is selectable from the drop down list of the Gradient tab of the Material dialog If you use the foreground and background colors to define the gradient the image s current foreground and background colors are used when you apply the gradient To create a gradient type that always uses the same colors use custom colors for all markers To create a new gradient type 1 Display the Gradient Editor dialog See To display the Gradient Editor dialog on page 99 2 Click the New button 3 Type a name for the new gradient 4 Click the Save button The gradient is initially defined with two markers at 0O and 100 that use the custom color You can now edit the gradient For more information see Editing Gradients on page 98 How do I get my GRD format gradient to be listed To have a GRD format gradient be listed as a gradient type you must importit See Importing Gradients on page 102 Importing Jasc gradient files To import a gradient saved in J asc Gradient format PspGradient place the file in the Gradients folder All PspGradient files in that folder are automatically listed as available gradient types 102 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Exporting Gradients After creating a new gradient you may want to export it to use in another program Although Paint Shop Pro s default gradients are stored in PspGradient format you export gradients a
491. u can use the Hue S aturation Lightness command or the Colorize command to create a duotone image a greyscale image with one color added For more information on duotones see Colorizing Images on page 197 186 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Adjusting the Hue Saturation and Lightness in Unison Use the Hue Saturation Lightness command to shift all colors in an image and change their strength and lightness Here s how the command works Changing the hue shifts all pixels in an image around the color wheel to a different point For example if you change the red pixels to green the green pixels turn to blue and the yellow pixels turn to cyan Changing the saturation adjusts the amount of grey in a color The level of grey increases as the saturation decreases Changing the lightness adjusts the color s brightness To use the Hue Saturation Lightness command 1 To limit the correction to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 Do one of the following To modify the image pixels directly choose Adjust gt Hue and Saturation gt Hue Saturation Lightness To create an adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Hue Saturation Lightness For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 In the Edit drop down list choose the color range to adjust To edit all colors simult
492. u can view previews of all image files within a folder When you open a file via the Browser the Browser window stays open until you close it To open an image file using the Open dialog 1 Do one of the following Choose File gt Open m Click the Open button I m Press Ctrl O 2 In the Look in drop down list select the folder where the file is stored 3 Click the name of the file you want to open To select multiple files press Ctrl and click each name 4 To view information or a preview of the image choose an option Details Click this button to open a pop up that displays information about the selected image Click OK to close this pop up Show preview Mark this check box to display the selected image in the preview area If you have selected multiple files no preview is displayed use the Browse window instead 5 Click Open To open an image file using the Browser 1 Do one of the following Choose File gt Browse Click the Browse button m Press Ctrl B Explore the Browser For more information on using the Browser see Using the Paint Shop Pro Browser on page 43 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro 31 The Browse window opens Note that the main menu displays commands specific to the Browse window The Browse menu is active until you open a new file or click an open image 2 In the left panel of the Browse window select the folder that contains the file you want to op
493. u create a brush tip you are saving all of the options selected for the brush including the brush shape step density thickness size hardness and rotation settings You can also include the variance settings The brush tip settings that you save can be applied to any tool that has a brush tip control in the Tool Options palette When you create a tool Preset you are savings all the settings that you specified fora particular tool including all of the parameters and variance settings The tool Preset is available only when you select that particular tool To save brush tip settings as a preset 1 Click the down arrow on the Presets button and then click the Save preset button E to open the Save Preset dialog Type a name for the Preset Note You cannot use the names Default or Last Used To enter additional Preset information click the Options button and then enter information in the Author Copyright and Description fields The Preset includes group box shows the data saved with this Preset To omit any of these items from the Preset click the Save icon a red X will appear over it associated with the data Click OK To share brush tip Presets 1 Navigate to the brushes folder in the Paint Shop Pro program directory Provide the brush file or files brush files have a PspBrush extension to the person with whom you want to share the brush Preset They should place the brush files in the B
494. u want it To limit the effects of this tool to a Specific area first make a selection in the image Chapter 9 Painting 223 4 Select the Blend Mode options Blend Mode How filled pixels are blended with pixels of underlying layers The blend modes are the same as the Layer blend modes for more information see About Blend Modes on page 275 Opacity The opacity for the fill At 100 opacity the paint covers everything at 1 opacity the paint is almost transparent 5 Position the cursor over the area of the selection or image that you want to fill and then do one of the following To fill with the foreground material click the left mouse button To fill with the background material click the right mouse button If the Match Mode is None all pixels on the current layer are filled For all other Match Mode settings the Flood Fill tool fills matching pixels that are contiguous to the pixel you click Replacing Colors Apply the tool only where you want it To limit the effects of this tool to a Specific area first make a selection in the image Use the Color Replacer tool to replace one color in a selection or layer with another color You can use brush strokes to replace only those pixels that the brush touches or you can replace all pixels of a certain color in a selection or a layer You can set a tolerance value so that the Color Replacer changes similar not just identical colors To use the Color
495. ues for on screen images and higher values for high resolution printed images Strength The amount of contrast to increase in the image s pixels Start with a low value and increase it gradually Clipping The difference in lightness values that adjacent pixels must have before they are sharpened 4 Click OK 81 we Quy J ka F eel a CHAPTER Working with Colors and Materials Whether you are applying color to an image or adjusting photographic colors it s important to understand how Paint Shop Pro works with color This chapter describes how to choose colors and materials that you can use to paint draw or fill It also discusses the basics of color how it is displayed on screen and printed as well as image color depth Contents Using the Materials Palette cccccccccceccvevevevey n Understanding Color and Color ModelS aaan aaaea 103 How Monitor and Print Colors Differ aoaaa aa 106 Working with ColorChannels 0 cece ee es 107 Understanding Color Depth cc cee ees 108 Working with Image Palettes cc eee es 117 Making a Palette Color Transparent 0 eee 120 82 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Using the Materials Palette Color basics For information on color how tt is perceived displayed and printed see Understanding Color and Color Models on page 103 About the relationship between the Material and Color boxes Si
496. updates in the image window To use the Stretch command 1 To limit the adjustment to a specific area make a selection in the image 2 Choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Stretch The image updates in the image window Manually Adjusting Brightness and Contrast You can manually adjust the brightness and contrast of an image using the Brightness Contrast command This is one of the simplest of the lightness correction commands To adjust contrast and brightness manually 1 To limit the adjustment to a specific area make a selection in the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Do one of the following To modify the image pixels directly choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Brightness Contrast To create an adjustment layer choose Layers gt New Adjustment Layer gt Brightness Contrast For information on adjustment layers see Using Adjustment Layers on page 283 3 In the Brightness edit box select a negative number to darken the image or select a positive number to lighten image A value of zero indicates no change 4 In the Contrast edit box select a positive number to increase the contrast or select a negative number to decrease the contrast A value of zero indicates no change 5 Click OK 192 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Adjusting Individual Brightness Values Use the Curves command to adjust the individual brightness values Color
497. us Selects all adjacent pixels of a similar color Discontiguous Selects all pixels of a similar color anywhere within the image Click OK The selection changes to include matching pixels Subtracting from a selection How to set the feathering before you create a selection To feather a new Selection choose a selection tool Selection Freehand or Magic Wand and on the Tool Options palette adjust the Feather value When you make the new selection that feathering is used Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 169 Subtracting from a Selection You can subtract from the selection area using the selection tools either the same selection tool you used to make the original selection or a different selection tool You can also use the Contract command to contract a selection by a specific number of pixels To subtract from a selection using the selection tools Hold down the Ctrl key as you click the parts of the image you want to remove from the selection To contract the selection by a specific number of pixels 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Contract 2 Select the number of pixels by which you want to contract the selection 3 Click OK The marquee contracts while keeping its original shape Changing the Feathering of a Selection Feathering specifies a width in pixels 0 to 200 that the selection is faded along the edges When you move or paste the selection feathering helps blend the selection into
498. ush tip from 0 to 359 212 Chapter 9 Painting What is an impression A brush impression is one click of the painting tool For example if you click once with the Paint Brush tool using a round brush the impression is a circle The same round paint brush makes many impressions as you drag the cursor which results in a stroke of color The Brush Variance palette Brush Yariance Option Setting Jitter 4 Color blend Fade Out z 2s izl Hue Normal z ae Saturation Pressure ee az xl Fade rate pixels 100 i Position jitter 34 fp 4 zj E Scale Impressions per step ry fm Fe jea Opacity How well the paint covers the image surface At 100 opacity the paint covers everything At 1 opacity the paint is almost transparent Blend How painted pixels are blended with pixels on underlying layers The blend modes are the same as layer blend modes for more information see About Blend Modes on page 275 Using the Brush Variance Palette Use the Brush Variance palette to customize the brush settings in the Tool Options palette The variance settings modify the Tool Option settings by applying adjustments to the settings for a particular tool option Adjustments can be randomized by increasing the Jitter percentage Note To reset brush variance options to their default values click the Reset to Default button on the Brush Variance palette To open the Brush Variance palette Choos
499. ut not across adjacent parallel lines You can move individual lines and lines that are part of a grid As you drag a line Paint Shop Pro moves the longest segment that can be repositioned without creating a non rectangular cell To delete a line or grid border 1 Select the Eraser tool and move the cursor over the line 2 When the cursor changes to the Eraser click to delete the line If deleting the line would create an invalid area Paint Shop Pro displays an icon E to indicate that you cannot erase the line Assigning Slice Cell Properties After you have created sliced cells use the settings in the Cell Properties group box to assign URLs alternate text and targets to each cell You also set whether the cell should appear in the downloaded image By omitting cells you can add cells from other images such as logos or text and create images in non rectangular shapes To assign cell properties 1 Choose the Pan tool then click inside the cell to make it active The cell boundary information displays in the lower portion of the Cell Properties group box 2 In the URL drop down list type the address of the Web page where you want the cell to appear Click the arrow in the box to display and select recently used addresses Chapter 15 Using the Web Tools 339 3 In the Alt text box type alternate text that the browser can display while the cell is downloading if the cell doesn t download or if the user has imag
500. ve entire workspaces not just images The workspace includes open images their magnifications and screen positions as well as the positions of palettes toolbars and windows For more information see Using Custom Workspaces on page 401 The image window displays your image You can move or size the image window or open the same image in multiple image windows for example to see the image at different magnifications The title bar at the top of the image window shows the file name and the magnification percentage An asterisk after the filename indicates the image has been modified since you last saved it To see a thumbnail of the entire image display the Overview palette See Using the Overview Palette on page 19 To move an image window Click and drag the title bar to move an image to a new position in the workspace To resize an image window Click an edge or a corner of the image window and drag it to a new position If the image is larger than the window use the scrollbars to view another area of the image Note When you resize an image window you are changing the window only not the image itself To resize the image make it larger or smaller see Resizing Images on page 137 To open multiple views of the same image Choose Window gt New Window or press Shift W A new window opens with another view of the active image When you make changes in one window the other is updated
501. ve the cursor over the node until MERGE displays and then click the node To delete a node and its line segments 1 Select the node you want to delete 2 Do one of the following Press Delete Right click and choose Edit gt Delete from the context menu m Choose Objects gt Edit gt Delete Note To delete one line segment break the path at one node of the line segment and then delete the new node that is created For information on breaking paths see Breaking Contours on page 249 Transforming Nodes CW F lip OAE Mirror oe Expand OQ Contract Skew Y Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 257 Transforming Nodes You can change the shape of a contour by manipulating its nodes in a variety of ways such as flipping mirroring and rotating Transform nodes using the Object menu commands or the Tool Options palette Using the Object Menu to Transform Nodes The Objects menu will transform selected nodes using the current settings for each transformation command To transform nodes with the current settings 1 Select the nodes you want to transform 2 Choose Objects gt Transform Selected Nodes and choose a command Flip Ctrl Shift F Moves selected nodes along the vertical axis those on top go the bottom and vice versa Applied to a single node the control arms if any will flip Mirror Ctrl Shift M Moves selected nodes along the horizontal axis those on the left
502. want the 16 standard Windows colors included in the converted image s palette Reduce color bleeding If you chose the Optimized Median Cut or the Optimized Octree palette and the Error Diffusion reduction method you can mark this check box to make the left to right bleed effect of colors less noticeable 6 Click OK 114 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials Decreasing Color Depth to 32K or 64K Colors 24 Bit To reduce the number of colors used in a 24 bit image decrease the color depth of an image to 32K 32 000 or 64K 64 000 colors Displaying images with 32K or 64K colors on older monitors results in better refresh rates than displaying 24 bit images with 16 million colors To decrease the color depth to 32K or 64K colors 1 Choose Image gt Decrease Color Depth and then choose 32K Colors or 64K Colors 2 In the Reduction method group box select the method See About Color Reduction Methods on page 115 3 Click OK Decreasing Color Depth to a Selected Number of Colors To select the number of colors in an image use the X Colors command to decrease the color depth of an image and reduce the file size If you specify 16 or fewer colors the image is saved as a 4 bit image If you specify 17 to 256 colors the image is saved as an 8 bit image For some file formats particularly GIF file compression is sensitive to the number of colors in the image For example using 100 colors instead of 256 colors p
503. within an Image You can move a Selection and leave the space empty or you can move a copy of the selection and leave the original data To move a selection Do one of the following To move a selection by cutting it from a layer and leaving a transparent area or area of background color use the selection tool Selection Freehand or Magic Wand tool to drag the selection To move a copy of the selection while leaving the original unchanged float the selection before moving it or press Alt while using the selection tool to drag the selection To move the selection one pixel at a time press Shift while pressing the up down left or right arrow key To move the selection 10 pixels at a time press Shift while pressing the Page Up Page Down Home or End keys When you move the selection with any of these methods it becomes a floating selection For more information see Working with Standard and Floating Selections on page 165 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 175 Converting a Selection into a Layer To convert a selection into a layer use the Promote to Layer Color depth command on the Selections menu The original selection contents The Promote to Layer command are unchanged a copy of the selection becomes a new layer By works on 16 million color and converting the selection into a layer you can modify it without greyscale images only To increase the color depth of an image see page 109 cha
504. wnload in a folder or sub folder of that drive 4 Select the images that you want to download and click Open to open the images in Paint Shop Pro What does your image need Here are some edits your digital photograph may need m Crop the image Cropping reduces the amount of memory the image uses and eliminates extra areas of color which may allow you to make better color corrections See Cropping Images on page 134 m Correct colors or retouch parts of the image See Basic Steps in Improving Photographs on page 52 40 Chapter 3 Getting Images into Paint Shop Pro Importing Images Using the TWAIN Interface To import images using the TWAIN interface 1 Choose File gt Import gt TWAIN gt Select Source The Select Source dialog lists the TWAIN compliant devices connected to your computer Note You only need to select the source the first time you connect to the camera card reader or scanner 2 Click the name of the device then click Select 3 Choose File gt Import gt TWAIN gt Acquire to run the device s software 4 Do one of the following For scanners perform the scan using the device s software Refer to the scanner manufacturer s documentation for details For digital cameras an Import dialog displays Select the images that you want to download and then click Download When the device and software finish processing the image the image is sent to Paint Shop
505. xecution environment has set for its preference Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 385 To display and or modify a command s settings select the command and then click Edit or double click the command Be aware that command names show in italics with the words NOT editable cannot be selected for editing Note There are a small number of commands that can only be edited when an image is open in the workspace To remove commands from the script select the command and click Delete To select multiple commands use the standard Shift click or Ctrl click methods 3 To view and or edit the Python code associated with the script click the Text Editor button The default text editor will open the script Until you specify another application the default editor is Notepad To change the default text editor see Editing Scripts with a Text Editor below 4 To save your edits click Save and then click Close Editing Scripts with a Text Editor With the Script Editor dialog displayed you can edit the Python code for your script by clicking the Text Editor button If you have already modified the script in the Script Editor dialog you will be prompted to save or discard changes prior to switching to the text editor application The editor application designated for script editing will open To change the script editing application 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt File Locations to open the File Locations dialog
506. xels but layers are not actually combined By default each layer has a blend mode of Normal which blends pixels based on the opacity of the selected layer The pixels of the selected layer are blended with the combination of all underlying layers not just the layer directly beneath it To limit the pixels that the blend mode affects set the blend range See Setting Blend Ranges on page 277 To set the blend mode of a layer On the Layer palette click the Blend Mode drop down list of the layer you want to set and select the blend mode from the list For descriptions of the blend modes see About Blend Modes below Color depth and layers The Hue Saturation Color and Luminance blend modes are available only for 16 million color images The Multiply Screen Difference and Exclusion blend modes produce the same result no matter how layers are ordered within the Layer palette Chapter 11 Working with Layers 275 About Blend Modes The table describes each of the blend modes In the table selected layer refers to the layer for which you are setting the blend mode Note Several of the blend modes have been enhanced the transfer of color channels has been improved These blend modes may not be compatible with other applications Use the Legacy blend modes for compatibility with other applications Normal Darken Lighten Hue Hue Legacy Saturation Saturation Legacy Colo
507. xels to include in determining the median intensity of each pixel The filter is always an odd number of pixels To preserve image details choose the smallest filter that removes the noise For single pixel colored specks set the filter to 3 4 Click OK 68 Chapter 4 Improving Photographs Should make a selection first You can apply the Texture Preserving Smooth command to a selection or an image The command is faster and more effective when applied to a selection Removing Noise While Keeping Texture Details Use the Texture Preserving Smooth command to remove noise or specks in an image while preserving texture details This command analyze s an image s pixels to determine if they display textured or smooth areas Textured areas are preserved few noise adjustments are made and smooth areas are adjusted to remove noise For example textures in clothing may be preserved while noise from another area such as a person s face is removed To remove noise while keeping texture details 1 Select the area that contains the noise See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 2 Choose Adjust gt Add Remove Noise gt Texture Preserving Smooth 3 For Amount of correction set a value to choose the strength of the correction At lower values a small amount of noise is removed but textured areas are preserved At higher values more noise is removed but textured areas may not be fully preserved 4 Click OK
508. xels to contract nodes Skew X Sets the number of pixels to skew nodes on the horizontal axis Skew Y Sets the number of pixels to skew nodes on the vertical axis Rotate Sets the degrees nodes will rotate 5 Type a value for the selected transformation setting 6 Click Apply x 259 a CHAPTER BE Working with Layers Layers are fundamental to creating and editing images in Paint Shop Pro Use layers to add elements to your images create artistic effects and illustrations and make editing images easier You can add or delete layers rearrange their stacking order the order from top to bottom and blend their pixels in a variety of ways Unless you merge the layers each one remains independent you can edit it without affecting the others Contents ARDOU LOVE aoe euwed en esge es ban daosensans une ees 260 Using the Layer palette cece 265 Adding New Layers to Images cece eee eee ees 267 Editing Layer Properties ccc ee es 270 Modifying a VOUS cao konae eae toe a nich os ee eRe an Eee ees 219 Using Adjustment Layers ce es 283 260 Chapter 11 Working with Layers About Layers Ways to use layers For descriptions of the many tasks you can accomplish with layers check out these sections m Using Layers with Photographic Images on page 263 m Using Layers with Illustrations on page 264 When you create or import an image in Paint Shop Pro the image has a single
509. y Chapter 17 Automating Tasks 383 If a script is run from an unconfigured path it is treated as Restricted If a path appears in both the Restricted and Trusted lists it is treated as Restricted Presets Material palette Swatches and Print Layout Templates which are essentially scripts are treated as Restricted Additionally the following commands are not allowed when run from a Restricted script File Save Save As Save Copy As Close Close All Send Exit File gt Export GIF Optimizer PNG Optimizer JPEG Optimizer Image Mapper Image Slicer File gt Preferences File Locations File gt Batch Process Rename Toggling Interactive Script Playback Mode To toggle between Interactive and Silent script playback mode simply click the Interactive Script Playback Toggle button H on the Script toolbar When the button has a border around it it is in Interactive mode Note If part or all of a script has been set to run in either Silent or Interactive mode this button will not override that setting If all or part of a script is set to Default mode the state of this button will override the Default setting 384 Chapter 17 Automating Tasks Editing Scripts Scripts can be edited via the Paint Shop Pro user interface or by editing the script s Python code with a text editor application Editing Scripts Using Paint Shop Pro To edit the currently selected script 1 Click the Edit Selec
510. y The lightness of the paint controls the opacity of the selection A ruby overlay displays the brush strokes Choose Selection gt Edit Selection or click the Edit Selection button on the Layer palette The selection marquee displays the selected area To apply tools and effects to the selection marquee 1 Make a selection on the image See Using the Selection Tools on page 154 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images 165 2 Choose Selection gt Edit Selection or click the Edit Selection button on the Layer palette A ruby overlay displays in the selected area 3 Apply a tool or effect to the selection area 4 For more information see Chapter 9 Painting or Chapter 14 Applying Effects Note The Preview tab of the Overview palette displays the edits made to the selection marquee 5 When finished editing the selection choose Selection gt Edit Selection to display the selection marquee To turn off the selection marquee choose Selections gt Select None Working with Standard and Floating Selections Vector turned raster pay attention to the defloat When you use one of the raster selection tools Selection Freehand or Magic Wand to select vector objects or text the tool creates a raster selection of the object or text If you move the selection it becomes a floating selection When you try to perform a new action Paint Shop Pro automatically promotes the floating selection to a new layer
511. y Horizontal 4 or Space Evenly Vertical t Note All these commands are also available by choosing Object gt Distribute Arranging Vector Objects Each object you draw on a layer is stacked on top of the next even if they don t overlap If you draw 50 objects on a layer the 50th is at the top and the Ist in on the bottom When you have overlapping objects you can move objects up or down the stack of objects Bringing the circle to the top an amp L L To arrange vector objects 1 On the Tools toolbar choose the Object Selection tool M 2 Click an object to select it Chapter 10 Drawing and Editing Objects 243 3 Do one of the following Using the Layer palette to arrange vector objects To move an object to the top 7 On the Tool Options palette click Bring to Top Et To change an object s position on a layer select the object name in To move an object to the bottom Click Send to Bottom E the Layer palette click and drag _ the object up or down in the list of To move an object up or down one position objects Click Move Up or Move Down EJ Note All these commands are also available by choosing Objects gt Arrange Resizing and Reshaping Vector Objects The Object Selection tool gives you the power to transform vector Quick steps for objects and vector text interactively Select an object and drag the proportional scaling handles on the bounding box to resize rotate shear dist
512. y colors because people remember them particularly well and notice when they don t look natural Typical examples are skin tones and sky colors Memory color categories in the Color Category list are Beverage Foliage Fruits Grasses Grays Hair Colors Metals Skintones Sky Various Foods Vegetables Water and Woods Chapter 4 Improving Photographs 57 There are other categories that you may find helpful when defining the target colors for your photographs Pure Colors The main colors on the color wheel example red orange yellow Standard A set of colors designed to let you make very subtle changes in hue When you select a source color the Nearest preset color field above the list displays a number for the color that is the closest match in the Standard category To correct an image using Standard Colors 1 Choose Adjust gt Color Balance gt Manual Color Correction 2 Click in the left preview window to select a source color 3 Select the Preset colors option 4 In the list underneath choose Standard The Nearest preset color area above the list box displays the Standard color that is the closest match to the source color Click the Color box to the right of the list and scroll to view the color 5 Modify the target color using one of the following options To shift all hues in the image slightly choose a color from the Preset colors list that is similar to the current color To shift all hues in the image
513. y if the areas are on a layer m Fixed The edge pixels are replicated to fill in the areas between the edge of the image and the edge of the warp m Wraparound The areas between the edge of the image and the edge of the warp are filled with material from the opposite side of the image Click Open Deformation Map to open the Load Deformation Map dialog In the Deformation map group box choose a map from the drop down list Click the Edit Paths button to load a map from a different folder In the Operation group box select how you want the map to be added Chapter 6 Editing Images 149 m Replace current map Replaces the existing mesh nodes with the new map Any adjustments you have made but not applied are lost Add to current map Adds the settings from the new deformation map to the mesh nodes Any adjustments you have made are retained 5 In the Mapping group box select how Paint Shop Pro should adjust the size of the map to fit to the layer or image m Fit to canvas The map size adjusts to fit the image canvas m Fit to layer The map size adjusts to fit the current layer Current size centered on The map retains its original size and is positioned in the center of the Canvas or Layer 6 In the Preview group box choose a Checkerboard size from the drop down list to obtain the best preview of the deformation 7 Click Load 150 Chapter 6 Editing Images Adding Borders to Images Adding Borders Use
514. y the result to a new layer mark the Result on new layer check box Choose an Anti alias option m Inside to anti alias the inside of the selection marquee Outside to anti alias outside of the selection marquee Click OK to anti alias the selection edges Shape Based Anti aliasing Use the Shape Based Anti alias command to anti alias a selection based on its shape To anti alias based on shape 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Shape Based Anti alias to open the Shape based Anti alias dialog 2 Choose an Anti alias option m Inside to anti alias the inside of the selection marquee Outside to anti alias outside of the selection marquee 3 Click OK to anti alias the selection edges 174 Chapter 7 Making Selections in Images Modifying the Select Selection Borders Use the Select Selection Borders command to add a border around the selection This command is useful when you want to add a border around the selection and then fill that border using the Flood Fill tool To change the shape based anti alias 1 Choose Selections gt Modify gt Select Selection Borders to open the Select Selection Borders dialog Choose whether you want to add a selection border Inside Outside or on Both sides of the selection border Mark the Anti alias check box if you want to smooth the edges of the selection border Enter the width of the border in pixels Click OK to add a selection border Moving Selections
515. you adjust the color channels in the next step you change the amount of each channel that is used to create the monochrome image 4 In the Source channels group box use the Red Green and Blue edit boxes or sliders to change the current percentage of that color in the channel you are editing For example if you are editing the Red channel and set the Red value to 50 you reduce the amount of red in the image to 50 of its original amount 5 To brighten the color channel drag the Constant slider to the right To darken the color channel drag the slider to the left The default of zero is the original setting 6 Click OK 190 Chapter 8 Making Color and Tonal Corrections Adjusting Brightness and Contrast There are numerous methods for correcting the brightness and contrast of an image Automatic adjustment Choose Adjust gt Brightness and Contrast gt Automatic Contrast Enhancement to adjust the contrast with several easy to use options Creative ideas for equalizing In some cases the effect of equalizing the histogram of an image may be too strong You may get better results when you blend the original image with the equalized version Copy and paste the original as a new layer then equalize the copied layer and use the layer opacity options to blend the two layers together For more information on the Opacity options see Changing Opacity of Layers on page 274 Analyze the image with the histogram a
516. you can customize Paint Shop Pro Note CMYK Conversion Preferences are covered in Chapter 16 Printing Images Setting General Program PreferenceS 0 cece ee 394 Resetting Application Preferences cece ee 401 Using Custom WOIKSNGCES lt isu0 aes S04 ow ede edew donee dys 401 Setting File Locations ca cnadoetacas dees ene ies ydderees 403 Setting File Format Associations ccc es 407 Setting Autosave Preferences cece 409 Setting File Format Preferences ccc eee eee 410 Customizing Toolbars and MenuS cee es 412 Setting Other View Options ce ee 416 Adjusting Monitor Display Options 0c cc eee eee 418 393 394 Chapter 18 Customizing Paint Shop Pro setting General Program Preferences General Program Preferences define the behavior of various features To set General Program Preferences 1 Choose File gt Preferences gt General Program Preferences to open the Paint Shop Pro Preferences dialog 2 Click the tab containing the preference information you want to change 3 Modify the desired settings and then click OK Undo Redo Preferences The Undo tab controls some settings of the Undo and Redo commands Enable the undo system Mark this check box to activate the Undo command Clear the check box to deactivate the Undo and Redo commands When the undo system is active choose from these options Limit undo redo disk usage per open image Sets the maximum am
517. your preferred color model RGB or HSL whenever color values are displayed such as with the Dropper tool When you select colors from the asc Color Picker you are able to enter RGB or HSL values regardless of your preference setting The color model used to display color values on screen has no effect on how colors are printed Choose a color model preference that is easier for you to use 104 Chapter 5 Working with Colors and Materials To describe how color is produced or perceived we use color models Computer monitors display colors by producing varying amounts of red green and blue light the RGB color model Human eyes perceive color by its hue saturation and lightness levels the HSL color model With Paint Shop Pro you can select colors using either the RGB or HSL color model You can also output images using the CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black model which is used for high end printing applications RGB Model All colors on your computer screen are created by mixing red green and blue light in varying proportions and intensities Adding all the colors together creates white Each primary color red green and blue is assigned a value from 0 none of the color present to 255 the color at full strength For example pure red is produced by combining a red value of 255 a green value of 0 and a blue value of 0 Yellow is a combination of a red value of 255 a green value of 255 and a blue value of 0 S

Paint Shop Pro 8 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents